Omron SYSDRIVE 3G3MV-A4022 User manual

Below you will find brief information for SYSDRIVE 3G3MV 3G3MV-A2001, SYSDRIVE 3G3MV 3G3MV-A2002, SYSDRIVE 3G3MV 3G3MV-A2004, SYSDRIVE 3G3MV 3G3MV-A2007, SYSDRIVE 3G3MV 3G3MV-A2015, SYSDRIVE 3G3MV 3G3MV-A2022, SYSDRIVE 3G3MV 3G3MV-A2040, SYSDRIVE 3G3MV 3G3MV-A2055, SYSDRIVE 3G3MV 3G3MV-A2075, SYSDRIVE 3G3MV 3G3MV-AB001. This compact inverter features open-loop vector control, ensuring powerful torque. It meets EC Directives and UL/cUL standards for worldwide use and incorporates various control, network, and I/O functions. The inverter offers convenient control, ease of maintenance, and robust protective features.

PDF

Document

Cat. No. I527-E2-02

USER’S MANUAL

SYSDRIVE 3G3MV

Multi-function Compact Inverter

Thank you for choosing this SYSDRIVE 3G3MV-series product. Proper use and handling of the product will ensure proper product performance, will lengthen product life, and may prevent possible accidents.

Please read this manual thoroughly and handle and operate the product with care.

NOTICE

1. This manual describes the functions of the product and relations with other products. You should assume that anything not described in this manual is not possible.

2. Although care has been given in documenting the product, please contact your OMRON representative if you have any suggestions on improving this manual.

3. The product contains potentially dangerous parts under the cover. Do not attempt to open the cover under any circumstances. Doing so may result in injury or death and may damage the product. Never attempt to repair or disassemble the product.

4. We recommend that you add the following precautions to any instruction manuals you prepare for the system into which the product is being installed.

Precautions on the dangers of high-voltage equipment.

Precautions on touching the terminals of the product even after power has been turned off. (These terminals are live even with the power turned off.)

5. Specifications and functions may be changed without notice in order to improve product performance.

Items to Check Before Unpacking

Check the following items before removing the product from the package:

Has the correct product been delivered (i.e., the correct model number and specifications)?

Has the product been damaged in shipping?

Are any screws or bolts loose?

Checking Before Unpacking

Checking the Product

On delivery, always check that the delivered product is the SYSDRIVE 3G3MV Inverter that you ordered.

Should you find any problems with the product, immediately contact your nearest local sales representative.

Checking the Nameplate

Inverter model

Input specifications

Output specifications

Checking the Model

3G3MV-A 4 007 N Z 00001

Special software option

No Heatsink

No potentiometer

Maximum applicable motor capacity

Voltage class

Installation type

Series name: 3G3MV Series

Installation Type

A Closed wall mounting

Voltage Class

Three-phase 200-VAC input

(200-V class)

Single-phase 200-VAC input

(200-V class)

Three-phase 400-VAC input

(400-V class)

Maximum Applicable Motor Capacity

001 0.1 (0.1) kW

002 0.2 (0.25/0.37) kW

004 0.4 (0.55) kW

007 0.75 (1.1) kW

015 1.5 (1.5) kW

022 2.2 (2.2) kW

030 3.0 (3.0) kW

040 4.0 (4.0) kW

055 5.5 (5.5) kW

075 7.5 (7.5) kW

Note The figures in parentheses indicate capacities for motors used outside Japan.

Front Cover options

Blank cover

No potentiometer

Heatsink option

Z No Heatsink

Checking for Damage

Check the overall appearance and check for damage or scratches resulting from transportation.

Warning Labels

Warning labels are pasted on the product as shown in the following illustration. Be sure to follow the instructions given there.

Warning Labels

Warning label

Contents of Warning

WARNING

Be sure confirm that the RUN signal is turned OFF before turning ON the power supply, resetting the alarm, or switching the LOCAL/REMOTE selector. Doing so while the RUN signal is turned ON may result in injury.

Caution

Be sure to confirm permissible ranges of motors and machines before operation because the Inverter speed can be easily changed from low to high. Not doing so may result in damage to the product.

Provide a separate holding brake when necessary. Not doing so may result in injury.

Do not perform a signal check during operation. Doing so may result in injury or damage to the product.

Do not carelessly change settings. Doing so may result in injury or damage to the product.

Maintenance and Inspection Precautions

WARNING

Do not touch the Inverter terminals while the power is being supplied.

WARNING

Maintenance or inspection must be performed only after turning OFF the power supply, confirming that the CHARGE indicator (or status indicators) is turned OFF, and after waiting for the time specified on the front cover. Not doing so may result in electrical shock.

WARNING

Maintenance, inspection, or parts replacement must be performed by authorized personnel. Not doing so may result in electrical shock or injury.

WARNING

Do not attempt to take the Unit apart or repair. Doing either of these may result in electrical shock or injury.

Caution

Carefully handle the Inverter because it uses semiconductor elements. Careless handling may result in malfunction.

Do not change wiring, disconnect connectors or Operator, or replace fans while power is being supplied. Doing so may result in injury or malfunction.

Caution

Install external breakers and take other safety measures against short-circuiting in external wiring. Not doing so may result in fire.

Confirm that the rated input voltage of the Inverter is the same as the AC power supply voltage. An incorrect power supply may result in fire, injury, or malfunction.

If you use a Braking Resistor or a Braking Resistor Unit, connect them as specified in the manual. Not doing so may result in fire.

Be sure to wire correctly and securely. Not doing so may result in injury or damage to the product.

Be sure to firmly tighten the screws on the terminal block. Not doing so may result in fire, injury, or damage to the product.

Do not connect an AC power to the U, V, or W output. Doing so may result in damage to the product or malfunction.

Operation and Adjustment Precautions

WARNING

Turn ON the input power supply only after mounting the front cover, terminal covers, bottom cover, Operator, and optional items. Not doing so may result in electrical shock.

WARNING

Do not remove the front cover, terminal covers, bottom cover, Operator, or optional items while the power is being supplied. Not doing so may result in electrical shock.

WARNING

Do not operate the Operator or switches with wet hands. Doing so may result in electrical shock.

WARNING

Do not touch the inside of the Inverter. Doing so may result in electrical shock.

WARNING

Do not come close to the machine when using the error retry function because the machine may abruptly start when stopped by an alarm. Doing so may result in injury.

WARNING

Do not come close to the machine immediately after resetting momentary power interruption to avoid an unexpected restart (if operation is set to be continued in the processing selection function after momentary power interruption is reset). Doing so may result in injury.

WARNING

Provide a separate emergency stop switch because the STOP Key on the Operator is valid only when function settings are performed. Not doing so may result in injury.

Transportation Precautions

Caution

Do not hold by front cover or panel , instead, hold by the radiation fin (heat sink) while transporting the product. Doing so may result in injury.

Caution

Do not pull on the cables. Doing so may result in damage to the product or malfunction.

Use the eye-bolts only for transporting the Inverter. Using them for transporting the machinery may result in injury or malfunction.

Installation Precautions

Caution

Be sure to install the product in the correct direction and provide specified clearances between the Inverter and control panel or with other devices. Not doing so may result in fire or malfunction.

Caution

Do not allow foreign objects to enter inside the product. Doing so may result in fire or malfunction.

Do not apply any strong impact. Doing so may result in damage to the product or malfunction.

Provide an appropriate stopping device on the machine side to secure safety. (A holding brake is not a stopping device for securing safety.) Not doing so may result in injury.

Provide an external emergency stopping device that allows an instantaneous stop of operation and power interruption. Not doing so may result in injury.

Wiring Precautions

WARNING

Wiring must be performed only after confirming that the power supply has been turned OFF. Not doing so may result in electrical shock.

WARNING

Wiring must be performed by authorized personnel. Not doing so may result in electrical shock or fire.

WARNING

Be sure to confirm operation only after wiring the emergency stop circuit. Not doing so may result in injury.

WARNING

Always connect the ground terminals to a ground of 100 W or less for the 200-VAC class, or 10 W or less for the 400-VAC class. Not connecting to a proper ground may result in electrical shock.

General Precautions

Observe the following precautions when using the SYSDRIVE Inverters and peripheral devices.

This manual may include illustrations of the product with protective covers removed in order to describe the components of the product in detail. Make sure that these protective covers are on the product before use.

Consult your OMRON representative when using the product after a long period of storage.

WARNING

Do not touch the inside of the Inverter. Doing so may result in electrical shock.

WARNING

Operation, maintenance, or inspection must be performed after turning OFF the power supply, confirming that the CHARGE indicator (or status indicators) are OFF, and after waiting for the time specified on the front cover. Not doing so may result in electrical shock.

WARNING

Do not damage, pull on, apply stress to, place heavy objects on, or pinch the cables.

Doing so may result in electrical shock.

WARNING

Do not touch the rotating parts of the motor under operation. Doing so may result in injury.

WARNING

Do not modify the product. Doing so may result in injury or damage to the product.

Caution

Do not store, install, or operate the product in the following places. Doing so may result in electrical shock, fire or damage to the product.

Locations subject to direct sunlight.

Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified in the specifications.

Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in temperature.

Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.

Locations subject to exposure to combustibles.

Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts.

Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals.

Locations subject to shock or vibration.

Do not touch the Inverter radiator, regenerative resistor, or Servomotor while the power is being supplied or soon after the power is turned OFF. Doing so may result in a skin burn due to the hot surface.

Do not conduct a dielectric strength test on any part of the Inverter. Doing so may result in damage to the product or malfunction.

Caution

Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in the following locations. Not doing so may result in equipment damage.

Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.

Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields and magnetic fields.

Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity.

Locations close to power supplies.

Notice:

OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator and only for the purposes described in this manual.

The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual.

Always heed the information provided with them. Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or damage to property.

DANGER

Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

Caution

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury, or property damage.

OMRON Product References

All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual. The word “Unit” is also capitalized when it refers to an OMRON product, regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product.

The abbreviation “Ch,” which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products, often means “word” and is abbreviated “Wd” in documentation in this sense.

The abbreviation “PC” means Programmable Controller and is not used as an abbreviation for anything else.

Visual Aids

The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of information.

Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation of the product.

Ó OMRON, 2001

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of OMRON.

No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because

OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication.

Table of Contents

Chapter 1. Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-1 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-2 Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-3 New Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-1

1-2

1-5

1-8

Chapter 2. Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-1-1 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-1-2 Installation Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-1-3 Removing and Mounting the Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-2 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-2-1 Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-2-2 Standard Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-2-3 Wiring around the Main Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-2-4 Wiring Control Circuit Terminals

2-2-5 Conforming to EC Directive

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-1

2-2

2-6

2-8

2-11

2-12

2-20

2-21

2-38

2-41

Chapter 3. Preparing for Operation and Monitoring . . . .

3-1 Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-1-1 Names of Parts and their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-1-2 Outline of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-2 Parameter Copy and Verify Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-2-1 Parameter for Copying and Verifying Set Values

3-2-2 Parameter Copying Procedure

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-2-3 Parameter Read-prohibit Selection (Prohibiting Data Written to the

EEPROM of the Digital Operator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-2-4 Parameter Copy or Verify Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-1

3-2

3-3

3-10

3-11

3-18

3-19

Chapter 4. Test Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-1 Procedure for Test Run

4-2 Operation Example

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-1

4-4

4-6

Chapter 5. Basic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-1

5-1 Initial Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-2

5-1-1 Setting the Parameter Write-prohibit Selection/Parameter Initialization

(n001) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-2

5-1-2 Setting the Control Mode (n002)

5-2 Operation in Vector Control

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-3 Operation in V/f Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-3-1 Setting the Rated Motor Current (n036) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-3

5-5

5-7

5-3-2 Setting the V/f Patterns (n011 to n017)

5-4 Setting the Local/Remote Mode

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-5 Selecting the Operation Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-7

5-10

5-11

xii

Table of Contents

5-6 Setting the Frequency Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-6-1 Selecting the Frequency Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-6-2 Upper and Lower Frequency Reference Limits

5-6-3 Frequency Referencing by Analog Input

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-6-4 Setting Frequency References through Key Sequences

5-6-5 Setting Frequency References by Pulse Train Input

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-7 Setting the Acceleration/Deceleration Time

5-8 Selecting the Reverse Rotation-prohibit

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-9 Selecting the Stopping Mode

5-10 Multi-function I/O

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-10-1 Multi-function Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-10-2 Multi-function digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-11 Multi-function Analog Output and Pulse Monitor Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-11-1 Setting the Multi-function Analog Output (n065 through n067)

5-11-2 Setting the Pulse Monitor Output (n065 and n150)

. . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-12

5-13

5-14

5-19

5-25

5-27

5-30

5-31

5-32

5-38

5-41

5-42

Chapter 6. Advanced Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-1

6-1 Precise Vector Control Settings and Adjustments

6-1-1 Precise Vector Control Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-1-2 Adjusting Output Torque in Vector Control

6-2 Energy-saving Control

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-2-1 Energy-saving Control Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-2-2 Performing Energy-saving Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-3 PID Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-3-1 PID Control Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-3-2 PID Control Operation

6-3-3 Types of PID Control

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-14

6-3-4 Block Diagram of PID Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-16

6-3-5 Input Selection of PID Control Target Value and Detection Value .

6-17

6-2

6-3

6-6

6-7

6-13

6-3-6 PID Control Settings

6-3-7 PID Adjustments

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-3-8 PID Fine Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-4 Setting the Carrier Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-18

6-22

6-24

6-26

6-5 DC Injection Braking Function

6-6 Stall Prevention Function

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-7 Overtorque Detection Function

6-8 Torque Compensation Function

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-9 Slip Compensation Function

6-10 Other Functions

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-10-1 Digital Operator Disconnection Error Detection

6-10-2 Motor Protection Functions (n037 and n038)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-10-3 Cooling Fan Operation Function (n039) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-10-4 Momentary Power Interruption Compensation (n081) . . . . . . . . . .

6-10-5 Fault Retry (n082) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-10-6 Frequency Jump Function (n083 to n086) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-29

6-31

6-35

6-37

6-39

6-41

6-42

6-43

6-44

Table of Contents

6-10-7 Accumulated Operating Time (n087, n088)

6-10-8 Frequency Detection Function

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-10-9 UP/DOWN Command Frequency Memory (n100)

6-10-10 Input Open-phase Detection (n166, n167)

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-10-11 Output Open-phase Detection (n168, n169)

6-10-12 Fault Log (n178)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-45

6-46

6-48

6-50

6-51

6-52

Chapter 7. Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-1 Inverter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-1-1 Setting the Communications Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-1-2 RUN Command Selection (n003) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-1-3 Frequency Reference Input Selection (n004) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-1-4 Setting the Multi-function Inputs (n050 to n056)

7-2 Message Communications Basic Formats

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-3 DSR Message and Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-3-1 Data Read (Function Code: 03 Hex) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-3-2 Data Write/Broadcast Data Write (Function Code: 10 Hex)

7-3-3 Loop-back Test (Function Code: 08 Hex)

. . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-4 Enter Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-5 Setting the Communications Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-6 Register Number Allocations in Detail

7-6-1 I/O Function

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-6-2 Monitor Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-7 Communications Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-8 Self-diagnostic Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-9 Communications with Programmable Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-9-1 Available Programmable Controller and Peripheral Device . . . . . .

7-9-2 Wiring the Communications Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-9-3 Outline of Protocol Macro Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-9-4 Creating a Project File

7-9-5 Ladder Program

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-9-6 Communications Response Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-1

7-15

7-17

7-20

7-21

7-23

7-25

7-30

7-32

7-33

7-2

7-6

7-7

7-9

7-12

7-36

7-37

7-42

7-52

7-57

Chapter 8. Maintenance Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-1 Protective and Diagnostic Functions

8-1-1 Fault Detection (Fatal Error)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-1-2 Warning Detection (Nonfatal Error)

8-2 Troubleshooting

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-2-1 Parameters Fail Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-2-2 Motor Fails to Operate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-2-3 Motor Rotates in the Wrong Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-2-4 Motor Outputs No Torque or Acceleration is Slow . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-2-5 Speed Accuracy of the Inverter Rotating at High Speed in Vector

Control is Low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-2-6 Motor Deceleration Rate is Low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-1

8-2

8-11

8-18

8-21

8-22

xiii

xiv

Table of Contents

8-2-7 Vertical-axis Load Drops when Brakes are Applied

8-2-8 Motor Burns

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-22

8-23

8-2-9 Controller or AM Radio Receives Noise when Inverter is Started .

8-24

8-2-10 Ground Fault Interrupter is Actuated when Inverter is Started . . . .

8-24

8-2-11 Mechanical Vibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-2-12 Stable PID Control is Not Possible or Control Fails . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-2-13 Inverter Vibrates in Energy-saving Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-25

8-26

8-2-14 Motor Rotates after Output of Inverter is Turned OFF

8-2-15 Detects 0 V and Stalls when Motor Starts

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-27

8-2-16 Output Frequency Does Not Reach Frequency Reference . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-27

8-2-17 Inverter Does Not Run Because EF (Simultaneous Inputs of Forward and

Reverse Commands) is Detected, Or Motor Rotates Momentarily When

Control Device Power is Turned OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-27

8-3 Maintenance and Inspection 8-29

Chapter 9. Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-1 Inverter Specifications

9-2 Option Specifications

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-2-1 EMC-compatible Noise Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-2-2 DIN Track Mounting Bracket

9-2-3 DC Reactor

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-2-4 AC Reactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-2-5 Output Noise Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-2-6 CompoBus/D Communications Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-1

9-2

9-8

9-17

9-19

9-20

9-22

9-24

Chapter 10. List of Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10-1

Chapter 11. Using the Inverter for a Motor . . . . . . . . . . . .

11-1

Overview

1-1 Function

1-2 Nomenclature

1-3 New Features

Chapter 1

Overview

1-1 Function

Chapter 1

The high-function compact SYSDRIVE 3G3MV-Series Inverter is the first compact Inverter to feature open-loop vector control.

The 3G3MV Inverter meets EC Directives and UL/cUL standard requirements for worldwide use.

Furthermore, the 3G3MV-Series Inverter incorporates a variety of convenient control, network, and I/O functions that are versatile and easy-to-use.

SYSDRIVE 3G3MV Inverter Models

·The following 200-V-class (three- and single-phase 200-VAC types) and 400-V-class

(three-phase 400-VAC type) 3G3MV models are available.

Model Rated voltage Protective structure

Panel mounting type

(conform to IP20)

Maximum applied motor capacity

0.1 (0.1) kW

0.2 (0.25) kW

0.4 (0.55) kW

0.75 (1.1) kW

1.5 (1.5) kW

2.2 (2.2) kW

4.0 (4.0) kW

5.5 (5.5) kW Closed wall mounting type

(conform to NEMA1 and IP20)

7.5 (7.5) kW

Single-phase 200 VAC Panel mounting type

(conforming to IP20)

0.1 (0.1) kW

(conforming to IP20) 0.2 (0.25) kW

0.4 (0.55) kW

0.75 (1.1) kW

1.5 (1.5) kW

2.2 (2.2) kW

4.0 (4.0) kW

3G3MV-A2001

3G3MV-A2002

3G3MV-A2004

3G3MV-A2007

3G3MV-A2015

3G3MV-A2022

3G3MV-A2040

3G3MV--A2055

3G3MV--A2075

3G3MV-AB001

3G3MV-AB002

3G3MV-AB004

3G3MV-AB007

3G3MV-AB015

3G3MV-AB022

3G3MV-AB040

1-2

Overview

Chapter 1

Panel mounting type

(conform to IP20)

0.2 (0.37) kW

0.4 (0.55) kW

0.75 (1.1) kW

1.5 (1.5) kW

2.2 (2.2) kW

3.0 (3.0) kW

4.0 (4.0) kW

5.5 (5.5) kW

3G3MV-A4002

3G3MV-A4004

3G3MV-A4007

3G3MV-A4015

3G3MV-A4022

3G3MV-A4030

3G3MV-A4040

3G3MV--A4055 Closed wall mounting type

(conform to NEMA1 and IP20)

7.5 (7.5) kW 3G3MV--A4075

Note The figures in parentheses indicate capacities for motors used outside Japan.

Powerful Torque Ideal for a Variety of Applications

The 3G3MV is OMRON’s first compact Inverter incorporating an open-loop vector control function, which ensures a torque output that is 150% of the rated motor torque at an output frequency of 1 Hz.

Ensures a more powerful revolution at low frequencies than any conventional inverter.

Furthermore, the 3G3MV Inverter suppresses the revolution fluctuation caused by the load.

Incorporates a fully automatic torque boost function that drives the motor powerfully in

V/f control.

Incorporates a high-speed current limit function, thus suppressing overcurrent caused by high torque and ensuring smooth operation of the motor.

Convenient Easy-to-use Functions

·The FREQUENCY adjuster of the Digital Operator allows easy operation. The default setting is for operation according to the FREQUENCY adjuster setting.

·The Digital Operator has a parameter copy function ensuring easy parameter control.

·Ease of maintenance is ensured. The cooling fan is easily replaceable. The life of the cooling fan can be prolonged by turning ON the cooling fan only when the Inverter is in operation.

·Incorporates a braking transistor. Therefore, the Inverter will provide powerful control by just connecting a braking resistor.

·Incorporates an inrush current preventive circuit that prevents contact weld at the input power supply block.

1-3

Overview

Chapter 1

International Standards (EC Directives and UL/cUL

Standards)

The 3G3MV Inverter meets the EC Directives and UL/cUL standard requirements for worldwide use.

UL/cUL

Classification Applicable standard

EN50081-2 and EN50082-2

Low-voltage directive prEN50178

UL508C

Compatible with CompoBus/D and RS-422/485

·Supports RS-422 and RS-485 communications conforming to the MODBUS Communications Protocol, thus making it possible to easily construct networks with the use of the Protocol Macro or ASCII Unit mounted on an OMRON SYSMAC PC. The MOD-

BUS Communications Protocol is a trademark of AEG Schneider Automation.

·Connects to the 3G3MV-PDRT1-SINV CompoBus/D Communications Unit. A remote

I/O function for CompoBus/D communications is available to the 3G3MV Inverter, which ensures ease of communications just like standard I/O communications.

Furthermore, CompoBus/D communications conform to the DeviceNet communications protocol for open networks, thus allowing construction of multi-vendor networks in which other companies’ devices can coexist.

Note Modbus communication and CompoBus/D communication cannot be performed simultaneously. It is necessary to select the type of communication required.

Handles a Variety of I/O Signals

Handles a variety of I/O signals over a wide application range as described below.

·Analog voltage input:

0 to 10 V

·Analog current input:

4 to 20 or 0 to 20 mA

·Pulse train input:

0.1 to 33.0 kHz

·Multi-function analog output or pulse train output is selectable as monitor output

Suppression of Harmonics

Connects to DC reactors, thus suppressing harmonics more effectively than conventional AC reactors.

Further improvement in the suppression of harmonics is possible with the combined use of the DC and AC reactors.

1-4

Overview

1-2 Nomenclature

Panel

Chapter 1

Digital Operator

Front panel mounting screw

RUN indicator

ALARM display

Terminal cover

Front cover

Four mounting holes

Bottom cover

Note None of the following 200-V models have a terminal cover or mounting holes.

Instead, the front cover is used as a terminal cover and two U-shaped cutouts are provided in place of the mounting holes.

3G3MV-A2001 (0.1 kW), 3G3MV-A2002 (0.2 kW), 3G3MV-A2004 (0.4 kW), and

3G3MV-A2007 (0.75 kW)

3G3MV-AB001 (0.1 kW), 3G3MV-AB002 (0.2 kW), and 3G3MV-AB004 (0.4 kW)

1-5

Overview

Digital Operator

Data display

Simplified-LED indicators

Operation keys

Chapter 1

FREQUENCY adjuster

Appearance Name

Data display

FREQUENCY adjuster

FREF indicator

FOUT indicator

IOUT indicator

MNTR indicator

F/R indicator

LO/RE indicator

Function

Displays relevant data items, such as frequency reference, output frequency, and parameter set values.

Sets the frequency reference within a range between 0 Hz and the maximum output frequency.

The frequency reference can be monitored or set while this indicator is lit.

The output frequency of the Inverter can be monitored while this indicator is lit.

The output current of the Inverter can be monitored while this indicator is lit.

The values set in U01 through U18 are monitored while this indicator is lit. Depending on the inverter capacity, the quantity of the Uxx will be different.

The direction of rotation can be selected while this indicator is lit when operating the Inverter with the RUN Key.

The operation of the Inverter through the Digital

Operator or according to the set parameters is selectable while this indicator is lit.

Note This status of this indicator can be only monitored while the Inverter is in operation.

Any RUN command input is ignored while this indicator is lit.

1-6

Overview

Chapter 1

Appearance Name

PRGM indicator

Function

The parameters in n001 through n179 can be set or monitored while this indicator is lit.

Mode Key

Increment Key

Decrement Key

Enter Key

RUN Key

Note While the Inverter is in operation, the parameters can be only monitored and only some parameters can be changed. Any

RUN command input is ignored while this indicator is lit. Unless n001 is 5.

Switches the simplified-LED (setting and monitor) item indicators in sequence.

Parameter being set will be canceled if this key is pressed before entering the setting.

Increases multi-function monitor numbers, parameter numbers, and parameter set values.

Decreases multi-function monitor numbers, parameter numbers, and parameter set values.

Enters multi-function monitor numbers, parameter numbers, and internal data values after they are set or changed.

Starts the Inverter running when the 3G3MV is in operation with the Digital Operator.

STOP/RESET Key Stops the Inverter unless parameter n007 is set to disable the STOP Key. Functions as a Reset

Key when an inverter error occurs (see note).

Note For safety reasons, the reset will not work while a RUN command (forward or reverse) is in effect.

Wait until the RUN command is OFF before resetting the Inverter.

1-7

Overview

1-3 New Features

Chapter 1

New features have been added to 3G3MV-Series models with 5.5-kW and 7.5-kW capacities (i.e., the 3G3MV-A2055/A2075/ A4055/A4075). These features are outlined below and explained in detail in Chapter 6.

New Features for 3G3MV-A2055/A2075/ A4055/A4075 only

Enclosure Rating: Closed Wall-mounting Conforming to IP20/NEMA1

The 5.5-kW and 7.5-kW Inverters have closed wall-mounting specifications that conform to

IP20/NEMA1, so they can operate in an ambient temperature range of --10 to 40°C.

Note To operate this Inverter within an ambient temperature range of --10 to 50°C, remove the top and bottom covers to convert it to a panel-mounting model (IP00).

Default Settings Changed for V/f Patterns (Parameters: n011 to n017)

For 5.5-kW and 7.5-kW Inverters, two of the default settings have been changed. The default settings for the middle output frequency voltage (VC) (n015) and the minimum output frequency voltage (VMIN

(n017) have both been changed to 10 V for 200-V-class models and to 20 V for 400-V-class models.

Inverter Overheating Warning Input

(Parameters: n050 to n056; Fault Display: oH3)

An Inverter overheating warning input has been added as a new function that can be set for multi-function inputs 1 to 7 (n050 to n056). When this warning is input, an oH3 fault (nonfatal error, please check page 8-11) will be displayed. This input can be used for functions such as thermal contact connections for peripheral overheating detection.

Frequency Reference Loss Detection (Parameter: n064)

When the frequency is referenced using analog frequency reference inputs (0 to 10 V/4 to 20 mA/0 to 20 mA), this function detects sudden changes in analog inputs as errors (disconnection, short circuit, breakdown, etc.) and outputs the frequency reference loss output that is set in multi-function outputs 1 to 3 (n057 to n059). After the change is detected, operation continues at 80% of the frequency reference prior to the change.

Accumulated Operating Time (Monitor: U-13; Parameters: n087, n088)

This function calculates and stores in memory the Inverter’s accumulated power-ON time or RUN time.

Use it for checking and determining the maintenance schedule.

Speed Search Adjustment (Parameters: n101, n102)

A function has been added for adjusting the speed search. (The speed search is a function for detecting and smoothly controlling the speed of a free running motor.) The speed search operating time and search level can be adjusted.

Input Open-phase Detection

(Parameters: n166, n167; Fault Display: PF)

This function detects the Inverter’s input power supply open phase. Open phases are detected through main circuit voltage fluctuations, so this function can also be used for detecting abnormal voltage fluctuations in the input power supply voltage.

1-8

Overview

Output Open-phase Detection

(Parameters: n168, n169; Fault Display: LF)

This function detects open phases between the Inverter output and the motor.

Chapter 1

Ground Fault Detection (Fault Display: GF)

This function detects ground faults between the Inverter output and the motor.

Load Short-circuit Detection (Fault Display: SC)

Prior to an Inverter output, this function detects whether the output is short-circuited. If short-circuiting occurs during an output, it detects an overcurrent (oC).

1-9

Design

2-1 Installation

2-2 Wiring

Chapter 2

Design

2-1 Installation

Chapter 2

2-1-1 Dimensions

3G3MV-A2001 to 3G3MV-A2007 (0.1 to 0.75 kW) 3-phase 200-VAC Input

3G3MV-AB001 to 3G3MV-AB004 (0.1 to 0.4 kW) Single-phase 200-VAC

Input

Rated voltage Model 3G3MV-

3-phase 200 VAC A2001

A2002

A2004

Single-phase

200 VAC

A2007

AB001

AB002

AB004

108

128

131

Dimensions (mm)

D t

Approx. 0.6

Approx. 0.9

Approx. 1.1

Approx. 0.6

Approx. 0.7

Approx. 1.0

2-2

Design

Chapter 2

3G3MV-A2015 to 3G3MV-A2022 (1.5 to 2.2 kW) 3-phase 200-VAC Input

3G3MV-AB007 to 3G3MV-AB015 (0.75 to 1.5 kW) Single-phase 200-VAC

Input

3G3MV-A4002 to 3G3MV-A4022 (0.2 to 2.2 kW) 3-phase 400-VAC Input

A2015

A2022

Single-phase 200 VAC

AB007

AB015

A4002

A4004

A4007

A4015

A4022

Four, 5 dia.

110

140

156

Dimensions (mm)

131

140

156

Approx. 1.4

Approx. 1.5

Approx. 1.0

Approx. 1.1

Approx. 1.5

2-3

Design

Chapter 2

3G3MV-A2040 (4.0 kW) 3-phase 200-VAC Input

3G3MV-AB022 (2.2 kW) Single-phase 200-VAC Input

3G3MV--A4030 to 3G3MV-A4040 (3.0 to 4.0 kW) 3-phase 400-VAC Input

Four, 5 dia.

3-phase 200 VAC A2040

Single-phase 200 VAC AB022

3-phase 400 VAC

A4030

A4040

Dimensions (mm)

143

163

143

Approx. 2.1

Approx. 2.2

Approx. 2.1

3G3MV-AB040 (4.0 kW) Single-phase 200-VAC Input

Single-phase 200 VAC AB040

2-4

Dimensions (mm)

180 Approx. 2.9

Design

Chapter 2

3G3MV-A2055 to 3G3MV--A2075 (5.5 to 7.5kW) 3-phase 200-VAC Input

3G3MV-A4055 to 3G3MV--A4075 (5.5 to 7.5kW) 3-phase 400-VAC Input

Two, 6 dia.

Rated voltage

3-phase 200 VAC

3--phase 400 VAC

Model 3G3MV-

A2055

A2075

A4055

A4075

170

Dimensions D

(mm)

Weight (kg)

Approx. 4.6

Approx. 4.8

2-5

Design

2-1-2 Installation Conditions

Chapter 2

WARNING

Provide an appropriate stopping device on the machine side to secure safety.

(A holding brake is not a stopping device for securing safety.) Not doing so may result in injury.

WARNING

Provide an external emergency stopping device that allows an instantaneous stop of operation and power interruption. Not doing so may result in injury.

Caution

Be sure to install the product in the correct direction and provide specified clearances between the Inverter and control panel or with other devices. Not doing so may result in fire or malfunction. See explanation below.

Caution

Do not allow foreign objects to enter inside the product. Doing so may result in fire or malfunction.

Do not apply any strong impact. Doing so may result in damage to the product or malfunction.

Installation Direction and Dimensions

·Install the Inverter under the following conditions.

Ambient operating temperature:

Panel-mounting models (conforming to IP20): --10 to 50°C (0.1- to 4.0-kW Inverters)

Closed wall-mounting models (conforming to NEMA1 and IP20):

--10 to 40°C (5.5- to 7.5-kW Inverters)

Humidity: 95% max. (with no condensation)

Note 1.

By removing the top and bottom covers from a 5.5- to 7.5-kW Inverter, it can be used as a panel-mounting model (conforming to IP00) within an ambient temperature range of --10 to 50°C.

Install the Inverter in a clean location free from oil mist and dust. Alternatively, install it in a totally enclosed panel that is completely protected from floating dust.

When installing or operating the Inverter, always take special care so that metal powder, oil, water, or other foreign matter does not get into the Inverter.

Do not install the Inverter on inflammable material such as wood.

If a 5.5kW or 7.5kW Inverter is to be installed inside of a control panel, it must have the top and bottom covers removed and be used as a panel-mounting model (conforming to IP00).

2-6

Design

Chapter 2

Direction

·Install the Inverter on a vertical surface so that the characters on the nameplate are oriented upward.

Dimensions

·When installing the Inverter, always provide the following clearances to allow normal heat dissipation from the Inverter.

W = 30 mm min.

100 mm min.

Air

Inverter Inverter Inverter Side

100 mm min.

Air

Ambient Temperature Control

·To enhance operation reliability, the Inverter should be installed in an environment free from extreme temperature changes.

·If the Inverter is installed in an enclosed environment such as a box, use a cooling fan or air conditioner to maintain the internal air temperature below 50°C.

The life of the built-in electrolytic capacitors of the Inverter is prolonged by maintaining the internal air temperature as low as possible.

·The surface temperature of the Inverter may rise approximately 30°C higher than the ambient temperature. Be sure to keep away equipment and wires from the Inverter as far as possible if the equipment and wires are easily influenced by heat.

Protecting Inverter from Foreign Matter during Installation

·Place a cover over the Inverter during installation to shield it from metal power produced by drilling.

Upon completion of installation, always remove the cover from the Inverter. Otherwise, ventilation will be affected, causing the Inverter to overheat.

2-7

Design

2-1-3 Removing and Mounting the Covers

Chapter 2

To mount the Inverter, it is necessary to remove the front cover, terminal cover (unless the Inverter is a 200-V model), and the Digital Operator. To wire the Inverter, it is necessary to remove the front cover, terminal cover

(unless the Inverter is a 200-V model), and bottom cover from the Inverter.

Follow the instructions below to remove the covers from the Inverter.

To mount the covers, take the opposite steps.

Removing the Front Cover

·Loosen the front cover mounting screws with a screwdriver.

·Press the left and right sides of the front cover in the arrow 1 directions and lift the bottom of the cover in the arrow 2 direction to remove the front cover as shown in the following illustration.

2-8

Design

Chapter 2

Removing the Terminal Cover

0.2- to 3.7-kW Inverters

After the front cover is removed, press the left and right sides of the terminal cover in the arrow 1 directions and lift the terminal cover in the arrow 2 direction as shown in the following illustration.

5.5-/7.5-kW Inverters

Loosen the terminal cover screws in the direction of arrows 1.

Press the left and right sides of the terminal cover in the direction of arrows 2 and lift it in the direction of arrow 3 as shown in the following illustration.

Note None of the following 200-V models have a terminal cover. Instead, the front cover is used as a terminal cover.

3G3MV-A2001 (0.1 kW), 3G3MV-A2002 (0.2 kW), 3G3MV-A2004 (0.4 kW),

3G3MV-A2007 (0.75 kW), 3G3MV-AB001 (0.1 kW), 3G3MV-AB002 (0.2 kW), and 3G3MV-AB004 (0.4 kW)

2-9

Design

Chapter 2

Removing the Bottom Cover

·After removing the front cover and terminal cover, press the bottom cover in the arrow 1 direction based on position A as a fulcrum.

Removing the Digital Operator

·After removing the front cover, lift up the upper and lower right-hand sides (positions A) of the Digital Operator in the arrow 1 direction as shown in the following illustration.

2-10

Design

2-2 Wiring

Chapter 2

WARNING

Wiring must be performed only after confirming that the power supply has been turned OFF. Not doing so may result in electrical shock.

WARNING

Wiring must be performed by authorized personnel. Not doing so may result in electrical shock or fire.

WARNING

Be sure to confirm operation only after wiring the emergency stop circuit. Not doing so may result in injury.

WARNING

Always connect the ground terminals to a ground of 100 W or less for the 200-VAC class, or 10 W or less for the 400-VAC class. Not connecting to a proper ground may result in electrical shock.

Caution

Install external breakers and take other safety measures against short-circuiting in external wiring. Not doing so may result in fire.

Confirm that the rated input voltage of the Inverter is the same as the

AC power supply voltage. An incorrect power supply may result in fire, injury, or malfunction.

If you use a Braking Resistor or a Braking Resistor Unit, connect them as specified in the manual. Not doing so may result in fire.

Be sure to wire correctly and securely. Not doing so may result in injury or damage to the product.

Be sure to firmly tighten the screws on the terminal block. Not doing so may result in fire, injury, or damage to the product.

Do not connect an AC power to the U, V, or W output. Doing so may result in damage to the product or malfunction.

2-11

Design

2-2-1 Terminal Block

Chapter 2

To wire the terminal block of the Inverter, remove the front cover, terminal cover (unless the Inverter is a 200-V model), and bottom cover from the

Inverter.

There is a label under the front cover indicating the arrangement of main circuit terminals. Be sure to remove the label after wiring the terminals. The output terminal of the motor has a label as well. Remove the label before wiring the motor terminal.

Arrangement of Control Circuit Terminals

Control circuit terminals

Arrangement of Main Circuit Terminals

3G3MV-A2001 through 3G3MV-A2007 (0.1 through 0.75 kW):

3-phase 200-VAC Input

3G3MV-AB001 through 3G3MV-AB004 (0.1 through 0.4 kW):

Single-phase 200-VAC Input

Power supply input Motor output

Braking resistor

Note For single-phase input, connect R/L1 and S/L2.

2-12

Design

Chapter 2

3G3MV-A2015 to 3G3MV-A2022 (1.5 to 2.2 kW): 3-phase 200-VAC Input

3G3MV-AB007 to 3G3MV-AB015 (0.75 to 1.5 kW):

Single-phase 200-VAC Input

3G3MV-A4002 to 3G3MV-A4022 (0.2 to 2.2 kW): 3-phase 400-VAC Input

Power supply input

Braking

Resistor

Motor output

Note For single-phase input, connect R/L1 and S/L2.

3G3MV-A2040 (4.0 kW) to --A2075 (4.0 to 7.5kW): 3-phase 200-VAC Input

3G3MV-AB022 to 3G3MV-AB040 (2.2 to 4.0 kW):

Single-phase 200-VAC Input

3G3MV--A4030 to 3G3MV-A4075 (3.0 to 7.5 kW): 3-phase 400-VAC Input

Power supply input

Braking

Resistor

Motor output

Note For single-phase input, connect R/L1 and S/L2.

2-13

Design

Chapter 2

Main Circuit Terminals

Symbol

R/L1

S/L2

T/L3

U/T1

V/T2

W/T3

Name

Power supply input terminals

Motor output terminals

Description

3G3MV-A2j: 3-phase 200 to 230 VAC

3G3MV-ABj: Single-phase 200 to 240 VAC (see note

3G3MV-A4j: 3-phase 380 to 460 VAC

3-phase power supply output for driving motors. (see note 2)

3G3MV-A2j and 3G3MV-ABj: 3-phase 200 to

230 VAC

3G3MV-A4j: 3-phase 380 to 460 VAC

Braking Resistor connection terminals

Terminals for attaching an external Braking Resistor or a Braking Resistor Unit. (Connect to detect overvoltage during braking.)

Connection terminals

+1 and +2:

DC reactor connection terminals

Connect the DC reactor for suppressing harmonics to terminals +1 and +2.

When driving the Inverter with DC power, input the DC power to terminals +1 and --.

+1 and --:

DC power supply input terminals

Ground terminal Be sure to ground the terminal under the following conditions.

3G3MV-A2j: Ground at a resistance of 100 W or less.

3G3MV-ABj: Ground at a resistance of 100 W or less.

3G3MV-A4j: Ground at a resistance of 10 W or less.

To conform to EC Directives, connect to the neutral point of the power supply.

Note Be sure to connect the ground terminal directly to the motor frame ground.

Note 1. Connect single-phase input to both the R/L1 terminal and the S/L2 terminal.

Note 2. The maximum voltage at the output side corresponds to the power supply voltage for Inverter input.

2-14

Design

Chapter 2

Control Circuit Terminals

Symbol Name

Input S1 Multi-function input 1

(Forward/Stop)

S2 Multi-function input 2

(Reverse/Stop)

S3 Multi-function input 3

(External fault: Normally open)

S4 Multi-function input 4

(Fault reset)

M ulti-function input 5

(Multi-step speed reference 1)

S6 Multi-function input 6

(Multi-step speed reference 2)

S7 Multi-function input 7

(Inching frequency command)

SC Sequence input common

FS Frequency reference power supply output

FR Frequency reference input

FC Frequency reference common

RP Pulse train input

Specification

Photocoupler

8 mA at 24 V DC (See notes 2 and 3.)

20 mA at 12 V DC

0 to 10 V DC (Input impedance: 20 kW)

CN2 1 Multi-function analog voltage input

2 Multi-function analog current input

3 Multi-function analog input common

* ED = Operating Duty Cycle.

Response frequency: 0 to 33 kHz (30% to 70% ED)*

H: 3.5 to 13.2 V

L: 0.8 V max.

(Input impedance: 2.24 kW)

Voltage input (between terminals 1 and 3):

0 to 10 V DC (Input impedance: 20 kW)

Current input (between terminals 2 and 3):

4 to 20 mA (Input impedance: 250 W). This connector is located in the Unit Operator of the Inverter.

2-15

Design

Chapter 2

Symbol

Output

Name

MA Multi-function contact output (Normally open:

During operation)

MB Multi-function contact output (Normally closed:

During operation)

MC Multi-function contact output common

P1 Multi-function photocoupler output 1

(Fault)

P2 Multi-function photocoupler output 2

(Fault)

PC Multi-function photocoupler output common

AM Multi-function analog output

Relay output

1 A max. at 30 V DC

Specification

Open collector output 50 mA max.

at 48 V DC

Analog output: 2 mA max. at 0 to 10 V DC

Pulse train output (max. output voltage: 12 V DC)

(See note 4.)

When Used as Voltage Output

Output voltage (insulation type) Load impedance

+5 V

+10 V

1.5 kW min.

10 kW min.

Load impedance

AC Multi-function analog output common

When External Power Supply is Used

External power supply

12 V DC

Load impedance

External power supply (V)

12 V DC (±5%)

Note

Input current (mA) from external power supply

16 mA max.

Do not use a 5-V DC or 24-V DC external power supply. Doing so can cause internal circuit damage or malfunctioning.

Input current

16 mA max.

External power supply ground

Communications

R--

S--

Sender side

2-16

Design

Chapter 2

Note 1.

Parameter settings can be used to select various functions for multi-function inputs 1 to 7, multi-function contact outputs, and multi-function photocoupler outputs. The functions in parentheses are the default settings.

Note 2.

NPN is the default setting for these terminals. Wire them by providing a common ground. No external power supply is required.

Note 3.

To provide an external power supply and wire the terminals through a common positive line, set SW1 to PNP and use a 24 V DC ±10% external power supply.

Note 4.

When multi-function analog outputs are used for pulse train outputs, they can be directly connected to the pulse train inputs at other 3G3MV-series Inverters for simple synchronization or other applications.

Selecting Input Method

·Switches SW1 and SW2, both of which are located above the control circuit terminals, are used for input method selection.

Remove the front cover and optional cover to use these switches.

Selectors

Control circuit terminal block

2-17

Design

Selecting Sequence Input Method

·By using SW1, NPN or PNP input can be selected as shown below.

Chapter 2

SW1

(Default setting)

S1 to 7

24 VDC

(+/--10%)

S1 to 7

SW1

Selecting RS-422/485 Termination Resistance

·Termination resistance can be selected by setting pin 1 of the SW2 to ON. The default setting for the pin is OFF.

Selects RS-422/485 termination resistance

Selects frequency reference input method

2-18

Design

Communications method

RS-422

RS-485

Chapter 2

Pin 1 setting

Set to ON

Set to ON only if the Unit is the end Slave.

Pin 1

120-W termination resistance (1/2 W)

Selecting Frequency Reference Input Method

·By using pin 2 of SW2, voltage input or current input can be selected as the input method for frequency reference. The default setting is for voltage input.

Parameter settings are required together with the selection of the frequency reference input method.

Frequency reference input method

Voltage input (default setting)

Current input

V (OFF)

Pin 2 setting Frequency reference selection (parameter n004)

Set value 2

I (ON) Set value 3 or 4

Note Do not set pin 2 to ON for current input while voltage input is ON, otherwise the resistor in the input circuit may burn out.

2-19

Design

2-2-2 Standard Connections

DC reactor

(optional)

Noise Filter

Chapter 2

Braking Resistor

(optional)

3-phase 200/400 VAC

Single-phase 200 VAC (see note)

Multi-function input 1

Multi-function input 2

Multi-function input 3

Multi-function input 4

Multi-function input 5

Multi-function input 6

Multi-function input 7

FREQUENCY adjuster (2kW

1/4 W min.)

Pulse generator

Sequence input common

Frequency reference power supply 20 mA at +12 V

Frequency reference input

Frequency reference common

Pulse train input

Multi-function contact output

Common

Multi-function photocoupler output 1

Multi-function photocoupler output 2

Multi-function photocoupler output common

Multi-function analog output/Pulse monitor output

RS-422 communications

(RS-485 selection)

Multi-function analog output common

Multi-function analog voltage input (0--10V)

Multi-function analog current input (4--20mA)

Analog input common

3G3MV--PCN--CN2 cable can be used for multi--function analog input

Connector

Digital Operator

(rear side)

Note Connect single-phase 200 VAC to terminals R/L1 and S/L2 of the 3G3MV-ABj.

2-20

Design

Chapter 2

Example of 3-wire Sequence Connections

Stop switch

(NC)

RUN switch

(NO)

RUN input (Operates with the RUN switch closed)

Direction switch

Stop input (Stops with the stop switch opened)

Sequence input common

Note Set parameter 052 to forward/reverse rotation command 0 for 3-wire sequence input.

2-2-3 Wiring around the Main Circuit

Wire Size, Terminal Screw, Screw Tightening Torque, and

Molded-case Circuit Breaker Capacities

·For the main circuit and ground, always use 600-V polyvinyl chloride

(PVC) cables.

·If any cable is long and may cause voltage drops, increase the wire size according to the cable length.

3-phase 200-VAC Model

Model

3G3MV-

Terminal symbol

A2001

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2,

--, +1, +2, U/T1, V/T2,

W/T3

Terminal screw

M3.5

Screw tightening torque

(NSm)

Wire size

(mm

)

Recommended wire size

(mm

)

0.8 to 1.0 0.75 to 2 2

Moldedcase circuit breaker capacity (A)

A2002

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2,

--, +1, +2, U/T1, V/T2,

W/T3

M3.5

0.8 to 1.0 0.75 to 2 2 5

A2004 R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2,

--, +1, +2, U/T1, V/T2,

W/T3

M3.5

0.8 to 1.0 0.75 to 2 2 5

2-21

Design

Chapter 2

Model

3G3MV-

Terminal symbol

A2007 R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2,

--, +1, +2, U/T1, V/T2,

W/T3

Terminal screw

M3.5

Screw tightening torque

(NSm)

Wire size

(mm

)

Recommended wire size

(mm

)

0.8 to 1.0 0.75 to 2 2

Moldedcase circuit breaker capacity (A)

A2015 R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2,

--, +1, +2, U/T1, V/T2,

W/T3

M4 1.2 to 1.5 2 to 5.5

2 20

3.5

1.2 to 1.5 2 to 5.5

3.5

20 A2022 R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2,

--, +1, +2, U/T1, V/T2,

W/T3

A2040 R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2,

--, +1, +2, U/T1, V/T2,

W/T3

A2055 R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2,

--, +1, +2, U/T1, V/T2,

W/T3

A2075

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2,

--, +1, +2, U/T1, V/T2,

W/T3

1.2 to 1.5 2 to 5.5

5.5

2.5

5.5 to 8 8

Single-phase 200-VAC Model

Model

3G3MV-

Terminal symbol Terminal screw

AB001 R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2,

--, +1, +2, U/T1, V/T2,

W/T3

M3.5

Terminal torque

(NSm)

Wire size

(mm

)

Recommended wire size

(mm

)

0.8 to 1.0 0.75 to 2 2 5

Circuit breaker capacity (A)

2-22

Design

Chapter 2

Model

3G3MV-

Terminal symbol

AB002 R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2,

--, +1, +2, U/T1, V/T2,

W/T3

Terminal screw

M3.5

Terminal torque

(NSm)

Wire size

(mm

)

Recommended wire size

(mm

)

0.8 to 1.0 0.75 to 2 2 5

Circuit breaker capacity (A)

0.8 to 1.0 0.75 to 2 2 10 AB004 R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2,

--, +1, +2, U/T1, V/T2,

W/T3

M3.5

AB007 R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2,

--, +1, +2, U/T1, V/T2,

W/T3

AB015 R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2,

--, +1, +2, U/T1, V/T2,

W/T3

AB022

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2,

--, +1, +2, U/T1, V/T2,

W/T3

AB040

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2,

--, +1, +2, U/T1, V/T2,

W/T3

1.2 to 1.5 2 to 5.5

3.5

1.2 to 1.5 2 to 5.5

5.5

3.5

1.2 to 1.5 2 to 5.5

5.5

2.3 to 2.4 5.5 to 8 8

1.2 to 1.5 2 to 8 5.5

3-phase 400-VAC Model

Model

3G3MV-

Terminal symbol

A4002 R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2,

--, +1, +2, U/T1, V/T2,

W/T3

Terminal screw

Screw tightening torque

(NSm)

Wire size

(mm

1.2 to 1.5 2 to 5.5

)

Recommended wire size

(mm

)

Moldedcase circuit breaker capacity (A)

2-23

Design

Chapter 2

Model

3G3MV-

Terminal symbol

A4004 R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2,

--, +1, +2, U/T1, V/T2,

W/T3

Terminal screw

Screw tightening torque

(NSm)

Wire size

(mm

1.2 to 1.5 2 to 5.5

)

Recommended wire size

(mm

)

Moldedcase circuit breaker capacity (A)

1.2 to 1.5 2 to 5.5

2 5 A4007 R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2,

--, +1, +2, U/T1, V/T2,

W/T3

A4015 R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2,

--, +1, +2, U/T1, V/T2,

W/T3

A4022

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2,

--, +1, +2, U/T1, V/T2,

W/T3

A4030

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2,

--, +1, +2, U/T1, V/T2,

W/T3

A4040 R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2,

--, +1, +2, U/T1, V/T2,

W/T3

A4055 R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2,

--, +1, +2, U/T1, V/T2,

W/T3

A4075 R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2,

--, +1, +2, U/T1, V/T2,

W/T3

1.2 to 1.5 2 to 5.5

3.5

1.2 to 1.5 2 to 5.5

1.8

5.5

3.5

5.5

5.5 to 8 5.5

2-24

Design

Wiring on the Input Side of the Main Circuit

Chapter 2

Installing a Molded-case Circuit Breaker

Always connect the power input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3) and power supply via a molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) suitable to the Inverter.

·Install one wiring circuit breaker per Inverter.

·Choose an MCCB with a capacity of 1.5 to 2 times the Inverter’s rated current.

·For the MCCB’s time characteristics, be sure to consider the Inverter’s overload protection (one minute at 150% of the rated output current).

·If the MCCB is to be used in common among multiple Inverters, or other devices, set up a sequence such that the power supply will be turned OFF by a fault output, as shown in the following diagram.

Inverter

3-phase/

Single-phase

200 VAC

3-phase

400 VAC

Power supply

(see note)

Fault output

(NC)

Note Use a 400/200 V transformer for a 400-V model.

Installing a Ground Fault Interrupter

Inverter outputs use high-speed switching, so high-frequency leakage current is generated.

In general, a leakage current of approximately 100 mA will occur for each Inverter (when the power cable is 1 m) and approximately 5 mA for each additional meter of power cable.

Therefore, at the power supply input area, use a special-purpose breaker for Inverters, which detects only the leakage current in the frequency range that is hazardous to humans and excludes high-frequency leakage current.

2-25

Design

Chapter 2

·For the special-purpose breaker for Inverters, choose a ground fault interrupter with a sensitivity amperage of at least 10 mA per Inverter.

·When using a general leakage breaker, choose a ground fault interrupter with a sensitivity amperage of 200 mA or more per Inverter and with an operating time of 0.1 s or more.

Installing a Magnetic Contactor

If the power supply of the main circuit is to be shut off because of the sequence, a magnetic contactor can be used instead of a molded-case circuit breaker.

When a magnetic contactor is installed on the primary side of the main circuit to stop a load forcibly, however, the regenerative braking does not work and the load coasts to a stop.

·A load can be started and stopped by opening and closing the magnetic contactor on the primary side. Frequently opening and closing the magnetic contactor, however, may cause the Inverter to break down.

·When the Inverter is operated with the Digital Operator, automatic operation cannot be performed after recovery from a power interruption.

·When using the Braking Resistor Unit, be sure to arrange a sequence in which the thermal relay of the Unit turns the magnetic contactor OFF.

Connecting Input Power Supply to the Terminal Block

Input power supply can be connected to any terminal on the terminal block because the phase sequence of input power supply is irrelevant to the phase sequence (R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3).

Installing an AC Reactor

If the Inverter is connected to a large-capacity power transformer (660 kW or more) or the external phase advance capacitor of the customer is switched, an excessive peak current may flow through the input power circuit, causing the converter unit to break down.

To prevent this, install an optional AC reactor on the input side of the Inverter.

This also improves the power factor on the power supply side.

Installing a Surge Absorber

Always use a surge absorber or diode for the inductive loads near the Inverter. These inductive loads include magnetic contactors, electromagnetic relays, solenoid valves, solenoid, and magnetic brakes.

2-26

Design

Chapter 2

Installing a Noise Filter on the Power Supply Side

The Inverter’s outputs utilize high-speed switching, so noise may be transmitted from the Inverter to the power line and adversely affect other devices in the vicinity. It is recommended that a Noise Filter be installed at the Power Supply to minimize this noise transmission. Conversely, noise can also be reduced from the power line to the Inverter.

Wiring Example

Power supply

3G3MV-PFI

Noise

Filter

3G3MV

SYSDRIVE

Programmable

Controller

Other controllers

Note Use a special-purpose Noise Filter for the SYSDRIVE 3G3MV. A general purpose noise filter will be less effective and may not reduce noise.

Please, use the noise filters as explained in Chapter 9-2.

Wiring on the Output Side of the Main Circuit

Connecting the Terminal Block to the Load

Connect output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 to motor lead wires U, V, and W.

Check that the motor rotates forward with the forward command. Forward means shaft of the AC motor rotates in CCW (Counter Clock Wise), if you look from shaft to motor end. Switch over any two of the output terminals to each other and reconnect if the motor rotates in reverse with the forward command.

Never Connect a Power Supply to Output Terminals

Never connect a power supply to output terminals U/T1, V/T2, or W/T3.

If voltage is applied to the output terminals, the internal circuit of the Inverter will be damaged.

Never Short or Ground Output Terminals

If the output terminals are touched with bare hands or the output wires come into contact with the Inverter casing, an electric shock or grounding will occur. This is extremely hazardous.

Also, be careful not to short the output wires.

2-27

Design

Chapter 2

Do not Use a Phase Advancing Capacitor or Noise Filter

Never connect a phase advance capacitor or LC/RC Noise Filter to the output circuit.

Doing so will result in damage to the Inverter or cause other parts to burn.

Do not Use an Electromagnetic Switch of Magnetic Contactor

Do not connect an electromagnetic switch of magnetic contactor to the output circuit.

If a load is connected to the Inverter during running, an inrush current will actuate the overcurrent protective circuit in the Inverter.

Installing a Thermal Relay

The Inverter has an electronic thermal protection function to protect the motor from overheating. If, however, more than one motor is operated with one inverter or a multipolar motor is used, always install a thermal relay (THR) between the Inverter and the motor and set n037 to 2 (no thermal protection).

In this case, program the sequence so that the magnetic contactor on the input side of the main circuit is turned OFF by the contact of the thermal relay.

Installing a Noise Filter on the Output Side

Connect a Noise Filter to the output side of the Inverter to reduce radio noise and induction noise.

Power supply

3G3MV

SYSDRIVE

3G3IV-PFO

Signal line

Induction noise

Controller

Radio noise

AM radio

Note Please, check page 2-41 for more detailed explanation.

Induction Noise: Electromagnetic induction generates noise on the signal line, causing the controller to malfunction.

Radio Noise: Electromagnetic waves from the Inverter and cables cause the broadcasting radio receiver to make noise.

2-28

Design

Chapter 2

Countermeasures against Induction Noise

As described previously, a Noise Filter can be used to prevent induction noise from being generated on the output side. Alternatively, cables can be routed through a grounded metal pipe to prevent induction noise. Keeping the metal pipe at least 30 cm away from the signal line considerably reduces induction noise.

Power supply

3G3MV

Metal pipe

SYSDRIVE

30 cm min.

Signal line

Controller

Countermeasures against Radio Interference

Radio noise is generated from the Inverter as well as the input and output lines. To reduce radio noise, install Noise Filters on both input and output sides, and also install the Inverter in a totally enclosed steel box.

The cable between the Inverter and the motor should be as short as possible.

Steel box

Power supply

Noise

Filter

3G3MV

SYSDRIVE

Noise

Filter

Metal pipe

Cable Length between Inverter and Motor

As the cable length between the Inverter and the motor is increased, the floating capa-city between the Inverter outputs and the ground is increased proportionally. The increase in floating capacity at the Inverter outputs causes the high-frequency leakage current to increase, and this may adversely affect peripheral devices and the current detector in the Inverter’s output section. To prevent this from occurring, use a cable of no more than 100 meters between the Inverter and the motor. If the cable must be longer than 100 meters, take measures to reduce the floating capacity by not wiring in metallic ducts, by using a separate cable for each phase, and so on.

Also adjust the carrier frequency (set in n80) according to the cable length between the

Inverter and the motor, as shown in the table below.

2-29

Design

Chapter 2

Cable length

50 m max.

Carrier frequency

10 kHz max.

100 m max.

5 kHz max.

More than 100 m

2.5 kHz max.

Single--phase motors cannot be used

The inverter is not suited for the variable speed control of single--phase motors. Single-phase motors are either capacitor start motors or split--phase start motors (the method for determining rotation direction at startup is different). If a capacitor start motor is used, the capacitor may be damaged by a sudden electric discharge caused by inverter output. If a split--phase motor is used, the starting coil may burn because the centrifugal switch does not operate.

2-30

Design

Chapter 2

Ground Wiring

·Always use the ground terminal of the 200-V Inverter with a ground resistance of 100 W or less. Similarly, always use the ground terminal of the 400-V Inverter with a ground resistance of 10 W or less.

·Do not share the ground wire with other devices such as welding machines or power tools.

·Always use a ground wire that complies with technical standards on electrical equipment and minimize the length of the ground wire.

Leakage current flows through the Inverter. Therefore, if the distance between the ground electrode and the ground terminal is too long, the potential on the ground terminal of the Inverter will become unstable.

·When using more than one Inverter, be careful not to loop the ground wire.

2-31

Design

Chapter 2

Harmonics

Definition

Harmonics consist of electric power produced from AC power and alternating at frequencies that are integral multiples of the frequency of the AC power.

The following frequencies are harmonics of a 60- or 50-Hz commercial power supply.

Second harmonic: 120 (100) Hz

Third harmonic: 180 (150) Hz

Second harmonic (120 Hz)

Basic frequency (60 Hz)

Third harmonic (180 Hz)

Problems Caused by Harmonics Generation

The waveform of the commercial power supply will be distorted if the commercial power supply contains excessive harmonics. Machines with such a commercial power supply will malfunction or generate excessive heat.

Basic frequency (60 Hz) Third harmonic (180 Hz)

Distorted current wave form

Causes of Harmonics Generation

·Usually, electric machines have built-in circuitry that converts commercial AC power supply into DC power.

Such AC power, however, contains harmonics due to the difference in current flow between DC and AC.

Obtaining DC from AC Using Rectifiers and Capacitors

DC voltage is obtained by converting AC voltage into a pulsating one-side voltage with rectifiers and smoothing the pulsating one-side voltage with capacitors. Such AC current, however, contains harmonics.

2-32

Design

Chapter 2

Inverter

The Inverter as well as normal electric machines has an input current containing harmonics because the Inverter converts AC into DC. The output current of the Inverter is comparatively high. Therefore, the ratio of harmonics in the output current of the

Inverter is higher than that of any other electric machine.

Voltage

Time

Rectified

Voltage

Time

Smoothed

Voltage

Time

Current

A current flows into the capacitors. The current is different from the voltage in waveform.

Time

2-33

Design

Chapter 2

Countermeasures with Reactors against Harmonics Generation

DC/AC Reactors

The DC reactor and AC reactor suppress harmonics and currents that change suddenly and greatly.

The DC reactor suppresses harmonics better than the AC reactor. The DC reactor used with the AC reactor suppresses harmonics more effectively.

The input power factor of the Inverter is improved by suppressing the harmonics of the input current of the Inverter.

Connection

Connect the DC reactor to the internal DC power supply of the Inverter after shutting

OFF the power supply to the Inverter and making sure that the charge indicator of the

Inverter turns OFF.

Do not touch the internal circuitry of the Inverter in operation, otherwise an electric shock or burn injury may occur.

Wiring Method

Please refer to Chapter 9 for more detailed information on AC and DC Reactors.

[With DC Reactor]

DC reactor

(optional)

Power supply

3-phase 200 VAC, single-phase

200 VAC, or

3-phase 400 VAC

SYSDRIVE

3G3MV

[With DC and AC Reactors]

DC reactor

(optional)

Power supply

3-phase 200 VAC, single-phase

200 VAC, or

3-phase 400 VAC

AC reactor

(optional)

SYSDRIVE

3G3MV

2-34

Design

Chapter 2

Reactor Effects

Harmonics are effectively suppressed when the DC reactor is used with the AC reactor as shown in the following table.

Harmonics suppression method

No reactor

AC reactor

DC reactor

DC and AC reactors

5th harmonic

7th harmonic

14.5

9.1

Harmonic generation rate (%)

11th harmonic

8.5

7.4

8.4

7.2

7.7

3.4

13th harmonic

4.1

17th harmonic

4.3

3.2

4.7

3.2

19th harmonic

3.1

1.9

3.2

2.4

23rd harmonic

2.6

1.7

3.0

1.6

25th harmonic

1.8

1.3

2.2

1.4

Connecting the Braking Resistor and Braking Resistor Unit

When running a load with a large inertia or a vertical axis, regeneration energy will return to the Inverter. If OV (overvoltage) is generated during deceleration, this indicates that the regeneration energy is exceeding the capacity of the Inverter. In this case, use a

Braking Resistor or a Braking Resistor Unit.

·Connect the Braking Resistor as shown in the following diagram.

Note 1. When using a Braking Resistor, install a thermal relay to monitor the temperature of the resistor.

Note 2. When using a Braking Resistor or a Braking Resistor Unit, be sure to include a sequence whereby the power supply for the Inverter will be turned OFF in the case of abnormal overheating. Not doing so may result in burning.

Braking Resistor: Use the output of the thermal relay used to monitor the temperature of the thermometer.

Braking Resistor Unit: Use the error contact output of the Braking Resistor Unit.

2-35

Design

Chapter 2

·When using a Braking Resistor, be sure to set n092 (deceleration stall prevention selection) to “1” (without deceleration stall prevention).

Inverter

Power supply

3-phase, 200 VAC (single-phase

200 VAC/3-phase 200 VAC)

Braking

Resistor/Braking

Resistor Unit

Contact points for thermal trip of Braking

Resistor Unit or external thermal relay

Braking Resistors and Braking Resistor Units for 200-V-class Inverters

Inverter

3G3MV-

Braking Resistor

(3% usage rate ED)

3G3IV-

Braking Resistor Unit

(10% usage rate ED)

3G3IV-

Minimum connection resistance

A2001/AB001 PERF150WJ401 (400 W)

---

A2002/AB002

A2004/AB004 PERF150WJ201 (200 W)

PLKEB20P7 (200 W, 70 W)

200 W

A2007/AB007 120 W

A2015/AB015 PERF150WJ101 (100 W) PLKEB21P5 (100 W, 260 W) 60 W

A2022/AB022 PERF150WJ700 (70 W)

A2040/AB040 PERF150WJ620 (62 W)

PLKEB22P2 (70 W, 260 W)

PLKEB23P7 (40 W, 390 W) 32 W

A2055

A2075

PERF500WJ360T (36 W) PLKEB25P5 (30 W, 520 W) 9.6 W

PERF101WJ360T (36 W) PLKEB27P5 (20 W, 780 W) 9.6 W

Note Do not use resistances less than than the minimum connection resistance value.

Doing so may damage the Inverter.

Note The usage rate is shown as a percentage of the braking time in one cycle. If one cycle is 10 seconds, for example, one second of braking is possible using a Braking Resistor Unit (10% usage rate ED). If the usage rate is to be exceeded, a detailed regeneration energy calculation will be required.

2-36

Design

Chapter 2

Braking Resistors and Braking Resistor Units for 400-V-class Inverters

Inverter

3G3MV-

Braking Resistor

(3% usage rate ED)

3G3IV-

A4002 PERF150WJ751 (750 W)

A4004

Braking Resistor Unit

(10% usage rate ED)

3G3IV-

A4007

A4015 PERF150WJ401 (400 W)

A4022 PERF150WJ301 (300 W)

PLKEB41P5 (400 W, 260 W)

PLKEB42P2 (250 W, 260 W)

A4030 PERF150WJ401 (400 W) ´ 2 PLKEB43P7 (150 W, 390 W)

A4040 PERF150WJ401 (400 W) ´ 2 PLKEB43P7 (150 W, 390 W)

A4055 PERF500WJ360T (36 W) PLKEB45P5 (100 W, 520 W)

A4075 PERF101WJ360T (36 W) PLKEB47P5 ( 75 W, 780 W)

Minimum connection resistance

510 W

240 W

200 W

100 W

32 W

Note Do not use resistances less than than the minimum connection resistance value.

Doing so may damage the Inverter.

The dimensions of a Braking Resistor Unit

Model No.

3G3IV-

PLKEB40P7

PLKEB41P5

PLKEB42P2

PLKEB43P7

PLKEB45P5

PLKEB47P5

105

130

250

275

350

Dimensions (mm)

200

260

335

Mounting Screws

M5x3

M5x4

M6x4

Weight

(kg)

3.0

4.5

5.0

7.5

8.5

2-37

Design

2-2-4 Wiring Control Circuit Terminals

Chapter 2

A control signal line must be 50 m maximum and separated from power lines.

The frequency reference must be input into the Inverter through shielded, twisted-pair wires.

Wiring Control I/O Terminals

Wire each control I/O terminal under the following conditions.

Wires and Tightening Torque

Multi-function Contact Output (MA, MB, and MC)

Terminal screw size

Tightening

torque N S m

Wire Wire size mm

(AWG)

M3 0.5 to 0.6

Recommended wire size mm

(AWG)

0.75 (18)

Single wire 0.5 to 1.25

(20 to 16)

Stranded wire

0.5 to 1.25

(20 to 16)

Cable

Cable with polyethylene sheath

Sequential Input (S1 through S7 and SC), Multi-function Photocoupler

Output (P1, P2, PC), RS-422/485 Communications (R+, R--, S+, S--) and

Multi-function Analog Output (AM or AC), and Pulse Train Input (RP)

Terminal screw size

Tightening

torque N S m

Wire Wire size mm

(AWG)

0.22 to 0.25

Single wire 0.5 to 1.25

(20 to 16)

Stranded wire

0.5 to 0.75

(20 to 18)

Recommended wire size mm

(AWG)

0.75 (18)

Cable

Cable with polyethylene sheath

Frequency Reference Input (FR, FS, and FC)

Terminal screw size

Tightening torque

N S m

0.22 to

0.25

Wire Wire size mm

(AWG)

Single wire 0.5 to 1.25

(20 to 16)

Stranded wire

0.5 to 0.75

(20 to 18)

Recommended wire size mm

(AWG)

0.75 (18)

Cable

Special cable with polyethylene sheath and shield for measurement use

2-38

Design

Chapter 2

Solderless Terminals for Control Circuit Terminals

The use of solderless terminals for the control circuit terminals is recommended because solderless terminals are easy to connect securely.

Note When using the following solderless terminal, make sure that the wire size is

0.5 mm

1.0 dia.

Model: Phoenix Contact’s A1 0.5-8 WH

2.6 dia.

(Size: mm)

Wiring Method

1. Loosen the terminal screws with a thin-slotted screwdriver.

2. Insert the wires from underneath the terminal block

3. Tighten the terminal screws firmly to a torque of 0.5 NSm.

Note 1. Always separate the control signal line from the main circuit cables and other power cables.

Note 2. Do not solder the wires to the control circuit terminals. The wires may not contact well with the control circuit terminals if the wires are soldered.

Note 3. The end of each wire connected to the control circuit terminals must be stripped for approximately 5.5 mm.

Thin-slotted screwdriver

Control circuit terminal block

Strip the end for 5.5 mm if no solderless terminal is used.

Wires

Solderless terminal or wire without soldering

Note Applying a torque of greater than 0.5 NSm may damage the terminal block. If the tightening torque is insufficient, however, wires may be disconnected.

Note 4. Connect the shield to the ground terminal of the inverter. Do not ground the shield on control side.

Note 5. Cover the shield with tape so that the shield will not come into contact with other signal wires or machines.

2-39

Design

Chapter 2

Wiring Frequency Reference Input Terminals

Wire the frequency reference input terminals FR and FC as described below for executing frequency references with the D/A Unit for digital-to-analog data conversion or external power supply.

Wires Used

Use shielded, twisted-pair wires for wiring in order to prevent the Inverter from malfunctioning due to noise.

Wire type

Single wire

Stranded wire

Wire size

0.5 to 1.25 mm

0.5 to 0.75 mm

Wire to be used

Polyethylene-shielded cable for measurement use

Solderless Terminals for Frequency Reference Input Terminals

The use of solderless terminals for the frequency reference input terminals is recommended because solderless terminals are easy to connect securely.

Note Make sure that the wire size is 0.5 mm

2 nal.

when using the following solderless termi-

1.0 dia.

Model: Phoenix Contact’s A1 0.5-8 WH

2.6 dia.

(Size: mm)

Wiring Method

·The wiring method for the frequency reference input terminals is the same as that of the control I/O terminals.

·Always separate the control signal line from the main circuit cables and other power cables.

·Connect the shield to the ground terminal of the Inverter. Do not connect the shield to the load.

·Cover the shield with tape so that the shield will not come into contact with other signal wires or machines.

2-40

Design

2-2-5 Conforming to EC Directive

Chapter 2

The following description provides the wiring method of the Inverter to meet EC Directive requirements. If the following requirements are not satisfied, the whole equipment incorporating the Inverter will need further confirmation.

Standard Connection

Main Circuit Terminals

Line breakers

Noise Filter

Braking Resistor

(optional)

Clamp core

3-phase 200 VAC, single-phase

200 VAC, or 3-phase 400 VAC

2-41

Design

Control Circuit Terminals

Multi-function input 1

Multi-function input 2

Multi-function input 3

Multi-function input 4

Multi-function input 5

Multi-function input 6

Multi-function input 7

Sequence input common

FREQUENCY adjuster (2kW

1/4 W min.)

Frequency reference power supply 20 mA at +12 V

Frequency reference input

Frequency reference common

Pulse generator

Pulse train input

RS-422 communications

(RS-485 selection)

Note I/O signals can be connected to a single shielded cable.

Chapter 2

Multi-function contact output

Common

Multi-function photocoupler output 1

Multi-function photocoupler output 2

Multi-function photocoupler output common

Multi-function analog output/Pulse monitor output

Multi-function analog output common

2-42

Design

Conforming to EC Directives

Chapter 2

Wiring the Power Supply

Make sure that the Inverter and Noise Filter are grounded together.

·Always connect the power input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3) and power supply via a dedicated Noise Filter.

·Reduce the length of the ground wire as much as possible.

·Locate the Noise Filter as close as possible to the Inverter. Make sure that the cable length between the Noise Filter and the Inverter does not exceed 40 cm.

·The following Noise Filters are available (all footprint type).

3-phase 200-VAC Noise Filter

Inverter

Model 3G3MV-

3-phase 200-VAC Noise Filter

Model 3G3MV-

A2001/A2002/A2004/A2007 PFI2010-E 10

Rated current (A)

A2015/A2022

A2040

A2055/A2075

PFI2020-E

PFI2030-E

PFI2050--E

16 to 20

26 to 30

Single-phase 200-VAC Noise Filter

Inverter

Model 3G3MV-

AB001/AB002/AB004

AB007/AB015

AB022

AB040

Single-phase 200-VAC Noise Filter

Model 3G3MVRated current (A)

PFI1010-E

PFI1020-E

PFI1030-E

PFI1040-E

3-phase 400-VAC Noise Filter

Inverter

Model 3G3MV-

A4002/A4004

A4007/A4015/A4022

A4030/A4040

A4055/A4075

3-phase 400-VAC Noise Filter

Model 3G3MVRated current (A)

PFI3005-E

PFI3010-E

PFI3020-E

PFI3030--E

15 to 20

2-43

Design

Chapter 2

Connecting a Motor to the Inverter

·When connecting a motor to the Inverter, be sure to use a cable with a braided shield.

·Reduce the length of the cable as short as possible and ground the shield on the

Inverter side as well as the motor side. Furthermore, it is recommended that a clamp core (Clamp Filter) be connected close to the output terminals of the Inverter.

Product

Clamp Filter

Model

3G3IV--PFO OC2 RASMI

Manufacturer

Wiring a Control Cable

·Be sure to connect a cable with a braided shield to the control circuit terminals.

·Ground the shield on the Inverter side only.

Grounding the Shield

In order to ground the shield securely, it is recommended that a cable clamp be directly connected to the ground plate as shown below.

Ground plate

Cable clamp

Cable

Shield

2-44

Design

Chapter 2

Conforming to LVD

·Always connect the Inverter and power supply via a molded case circuit breaker

(MCCB) suitable to the Inverter for protecting the Inverter from damage that may result from short-circuiting.

·Use one MCCB per Inverter.

·Select a suitable MCCB from the following table.

200-V Models

Inverter

Model 3G3MV-

A2001

A2002

A2004

A2007

A2015

A2022

A2040

A2055

A2075

AB001

AB002

AB004

AB007

AB015

AB022

AB040

MCCB (Mitsubishi Electric)

Type Rated current (A)

400-V Models

Inverter

Model 3G3MV-

A4002

A4004

A4007

A4015

A4022

A4030

A4040

A4055

A4075

MCCB (Mitsubishi Electric)

Type Rated current (A)

2-45

Chapter 3 Preparing for

Operation and

Monitoring

3-1 Nomenclature

3-2 Parameter Copy and Verify Function

Preparing for Operation and Monitoring

3-1 Nomenclature

3-1-1 Names of Parts and their Functions

Chapter 3

Data display

Simplified-LED indicators

Operation keys

FREQUENCY adjuster

3-2

Appearance Name

Data display

FREQ adjuster

Function

Displays relevant data items, such as frequency reference, output frequency, and parameter set values.

Sets the frequency reference within a range between 0 Hz and the maximum output frequency.

FREF indicator

FOUT indicator

IOUT indicator

MNTR indicator

The frequency reference can be monitored or set while this indicator is lit.

The output frequency of the Inverter can be monitored while this indicator is lit.

The output current of the Inverter can be monitored while this indicator is lit.

The values set in U-01 through U-10 are monitored while this indicator is lit.

F/R indicator The direction of rotation can be selected while this indicator is lit, when operating the Inverter with the RUN Key.

LO/RE indicator The operation of the Inverter through the Digital

Operator or according to the parameters set is selectable while this indicator is lit.

Note This status of this indicator can be only monitored while the Inverter is in operation.

Any RUN command input is ignored while this indicator is lit.

Preparing for Operation and Monitoring

Appearance

Chapter 3

Name Function

PRGM indicator The parameters in n001 through n179 can be set or monitored while this indicator is lit.

Mode Key

Increment Key

Decrement Key

Enter Key

RUN Key

STOP/RESET

Key

Note While the Inverter is in operation, the parameters can be only monitored and only some parameters can be changed.

The RUN command input is ignored while this indicator is lit.

Switches the simplified-LED (setting and monitor) item indicators in sequence.

Parameter setting being made is canceled if this key is pressed before entering the setting.

Increases multi-function monitor numbers, parameter numbers, and parameter set values.

Decreases multi-function monitor numbers, parameter numbers, and parameter set values.

Enters multi-function monitor numbers, parameter numbers, and internal data values after they are set or changed.

Starts the Inverter running when the 3G3MV is in operation with the Digital Operator.

Stops the Inverter unless parameter n007 is set to disable the STOP Key. Functions as a Reset

Key when an inverter error occurs (see note).

Note For safety reasons, the reset will not work while a RUN command (forward or reverse) is in effect.

Wait until the RUN command is OFF before resetting the Inverter.

3-1-2 Outline of Operation

Selecting Indicators

Whenever the Mode Key is pressed, an indicator is lit in sequence beginning with the FREF indicator. The data display indicates the item corresponding to the indicator selected.

The FOUT or IOUT indicator will be lit by turning the Inverter ON again if the

Inverter is turned OFF while the FOUT or IOUT indicator is lit. The FREF indicator will be lit by turning the Inverter ON again if the Inverter is turned

OFF while an indicator other than the FOUT or IOUT indicator is lit.

3-3

Preparing for Operation and Monitoring

Power On

FREF (Frequency Reference)

Monitors and sets the frequency reference.

Chapter 3

FOUT (Output Frequency)

Monitors the output frequency.

Note This indicator will be lit by turning the Inverter ON again if the Inverter is turned OFF while this indicator is lit.

IOUT (Output Current)

Monitors the output current.

Note This indicator will be lit by turning the Inverter ON again if the Inverter is turned OFF while this indicator is lit.

MNTR (Multi-function Monitor)

Monitors the values set in U-01 through U-18.

Note Depending on the inverter capacity, the number of the Uxx is different.

F/R (Forward/Reverse Rotation)

Selects the direction of rotation.

LO/RE (Local/Remote)

Selects the operation of the Inverter through the Digital

Operator or according to the parameters.

PRGM (Parameter Setting)

Monitors or sets the values in n001 through n179.

The FREF indicator is lit again.

Note The setting unit of the frequency reference and output frequency is determined by the set value in n035. The default unit is Hz.

3-4

Preparing for Operation and Monitoring

Example of Frequency Reference Settings

Chapter 3

Key sequence

Indicator Display example

Explanation

Power On

Note If the FREF indicator has not been lit, press the Mode Key repeatedly until the

FREF indicator is lit.

Use the Increment or Decrement Key to set the frequency reference.

The data display will flash while the frequency reference is set. (see note 1)

Press the Enter Key so that the set value will be entered and the data display will be lit.

(see note 1)

Note 1. The Enter Key need not be pressed when n009 is 1. The frequency reference will change when the set value is changed with the Increment or Decrement

Key while the data display is continuously lit.

Note 2. The frequency reference can be set in either of the following cases.

Parameter n004 for frequency reference selection is set to 1 (i.e., frequency reference 1 is enabled) and the Inverter is in remote mode.

Parameter n008 for frequency selection in local mode is set to 1 (i.e., the Digital

Operator is enabled) and the Inverter is in local mode.

Frequency references 2 through 8 are input for multi-step speed operation.

Note 3. The frequency reference can be changed, even during operation.

3-5

Preparing for Operation and Monitoring

Example of Multi-function Display

Chapter 3

Key sequence

Indicator Display Explanation

Power On

Press the Mode Key repeatedly until the

MNTR indicator is lit.

U01 will be displayed.

Use the Increment or Decrement Key to select the monitor item to be displayed.

Press the Enter Key so that the data of the selected monitor item will be displayed.

The monitor item will appear again by pressing the Mode Key.

Status Monitor

Item Display

U-01 Frequency reference

U-02 Output frequency

Display unit

Hz (see note 1)

U-03 Output current A

U-04 Output voltage V

Hz (see note 1)

U-05 DC bus voltage V

U-06 Input terminal status

Function

Monitors the frequency reference. (Same as FREF)

Monitors the output frequency. (Same as FOUT)

Monitors the output current. (Same as IOUT)

Monitors the internal output voltage reference value of the Inverter.

Monitors the DC voltage of the internal main circuit of the Inverter.

Shows the ON/OFF status of inputs.

Not used

: ON : OFF

Terminal S1: Multi-function input 1

Terminal S2: Multi-function input 2

Terminal S3: Multi-function input 3

Terminal S4: Multi-function input 4

Terminal S5: Multi-function input 5

Terminal S6: Multi-function input 6

Terminal S7: Multi-function input 7

3-6

Preparing for Operation and Monitoring

Chapter 3

Item Display

U-07 Output terminal status

Display unit

Function

Shows the ON/OFF status of outputs.

U-08

U-09

U-10

U-11

U-13

U-15

U-16

U-17

U-18

Torque monitor %

Error log (most recent one)

Software No.

Output power

Accumulated operating time

Communications error

PID feedback

PID input

PID output

---

W x10H

---

: ON : OFF

Not used

Terminal MA-MC: Multi-function contact output

Terminal P1-PC: Multi-function photo-coupler output 1

Terminal P2-PC: Multi-function photo-coupler output 2

Displays the torque being currently output as a percentage of the rated motor torque. This display can only be made in vector control mode.

The four most recent errors can be checked.

Error generation item

Error

Note “1” means that the latest error is displayed.

Press the Increment Key to display the second latest error. A maximum of four errors can be displayed.

OMRON use only.

Monitors the output power of the Inverter (see note

2).

Monitor the accumulated operating time in 10-hour units.

(See note 3.)

Displays communications errors that occur during serial communications (RS-422/RS-485). The errors that are displayed have the same content as the serial communications error at register number 003D Hex.

(Not used.)

: Error : Normal operation

CRC error

Data length error

(Not used.)

Parity error

Overrun error

Framing error

Communications time-over

Monitors the PID control feedback (Max. frequency:

100%)

Monitors the PID control input (Max. frequency:

100%)

Monitors the PID output (Max. frequency: 100%)

3-7

Preparing for Operation and Monitoring

Chapter 3

Note 1. The setting unit of the frequency reference and output frequency is determined by the set value in n035. The default unit is Hz.

Note 2. The output power monitor is not displayed in vector control mode. ’--------’ is displayed instead

Note 3. This function is provided for 200-- and 400--V (5.5/7.5kW) inverters only.

Example of Forward/Reverse Selection Settings

Key sequence

Indicator Display example

Explanation

Press the Mode Key repeatedly until the F/R indicator is lit.

The present setting will be displayed.

For: Forward; rEv: Reverse

Use the Increment or Decrement Key to change the direction of motor rotation. The direction of motor rotation selected will be enabled when the display changes after the key is pressed.

Note The direction of motor rotation can be changed, even during operation.

Example of Local/Remote Selection Settings

Key sequence

Indicator Display example

Explanation

Press the Mode Key repeatedly until the

LO/RE indicator is lit.

The present setting will be displayed.

rE: Remote; Lo: Local

Use the Increment or Decrement Key to set the Inverter to local or remote mode. The selection will be enabled when the display changes after the key is pressed.

3-8

Preparing for Operation and Monitoring

Chapter 3

Note 1. Local or remote selection is possible only when the Inverter is not in operation.

The present setting can be monitored when the Inverter is in operation.

Note 2. Local or remote settings in multi-function input terminals can be changed through the multi-function input terminals only.

Note 3. Any RUN command input will be ignored while the LO/RE indicator is lit. To enable a RUN command, first turn OFF the RUN command and then press the

Mode Key to display an item with the green indicator (FREF to MNTR). Finally, input the RUN command again.

Example of Parameter Settings

Cancels set data.

In approximately 1 s.

Key sequence

Indicator Display example

Explanation

Power On

Press the Mode Key repeatedly until the

PRGM indicator is lit.

Use the Increment or Decrement Key to set the parameter number.

Press the Enter Key.

The data of the selected parameter number will be displayed.

Use the Increment or Decrement Key to set the data. At that time the display will flash.

Press the Enter Key so that the set value will be entered and the data display will be lit.

(see note 1)

The parameter number will be displayed.

In approximately

1 s.

Note 1. To cancel the set value, press the Mode Key instead. The parameter number will be displayed.

Note 2. There are parameters that cannot be changed while the Inverter is in operation.

Refer to the list of parameters. When attempting to change such parameters, the data display will not change by pressing the Increment or Decrement Key.

3-9

Preparing for Operation and Monitoring

3-2 Parameter Copy and Verify Function

Chapter 3

The Digital Operator of the 3G3MV Inverter has an EEPROM in which the set values in all the parameters and data on the capacity and software version of the Inverter can be stored.

By using the EEPROM, most parameter set values in the Inverter can be copied to another Inverter.

Note In the above case, however, the Inverters must have the same power supply specification and control mode (i.e., V/f or vector control mode). Some types of parameter set values cannot be copied.

3-2-1 Parameter for Copying and Verifying Set Values

·Use the following parameter to read, copy, and verify the set values.

Parameter

n176

Register Name

01B0 Parameter copy and verify function selection

Description

The following items are selectable.

rdy: Ready to accept the next command rEd: Reads the parameter

CPy: Copies the parameter vFy: Verifies the parameter vA: Displays the capacity of the Inverter

Sno: Displays the software version.

Setting range

rdy to

Sno

Unit of setting

---

Default setting

rdy

Changes during operation

Note No value can be copied or written while the Inverter is in operation.

3-10

Preparing for Operation and Monitoring

Sequence of Display

Chapter 3

Reading

Writing

Verifying

Inverter capacity

Software version

Completed reading

Completed writing

Completed verifying or or or or or

Note The following display is an example of the capacity displayed.

Voltage class

2: 3-phase 200 V b: Single-phase 200 V

4: Three-phase 400 V

Max. applicable motor capacity

0.1: 0.1 kW 0.2: 0.25 kW/0.37 kW

0.4: 0.55 kW 0.7: 1.1 kW

1.5: 1.5 kW

3.0: 3.0 kW

5.5: 5.5 kW

2.2: 2.2 kW

4.0: 4.0 kW

7.5: 7.5kW

3-2-2 Parameter Copying Procedure

·To copy parameter values to another Inverter, take the following steps.

1. Set n001 for parameter write-prohibit selection/parameter initialization to 4.

2. Set n177 for parameter read-prohibit selection to 1 so that the parameters can be read.

3. Read the parameter set value with the EEPROM of the Digital Operator with the item rED selected.

4. Turn OFF the Inverter and remove the Digital Operator.

5. Mount the Digital Operator to the Inverter to which the parameters are to be copied.

Then turn ON the Inverter.

6. Copy the data in the EEPROM to the Inverter with the item CPy selected.

7. Check that the data is written correctly with the item vFy selected.

3-11

Preparing for Operation and Monitoring

Chapter 3

·The above procedure is possible provided that the Inverters have the same power supply specification and control mode (i.e., V/f or vector control). It is not possible to copy parameters from a 200-V model to a 400-V model or from an Inverter that is in V/f control mode to another that is in vector control mode, for example.

Note 1. The following parameter set values or output frequency on hold cannot be copied.

n176: Parameter copy function selection n177: Parameter read-prohibit selection n178: Error log n179: Software version

Note 2. The following parameter set values cannot be copied if the Inverters are different to each other in capacity.

n011 to n017: V/f setting n036: Rated motor current n080: Carrier frequency n105: Torque compensation core loss n106: Rated motor slip n107: Motor wire-to-wire resistance n108: Motor leakage inductance n109: Torque compensation limit n110: Motor no-load current n140: Energy-saving control coefficient K2 n158: Motor code

Note 3. Functions for 5.5/7.5kW Inverters cannot be copied to Inverters with different capacities.

3-12

Preparing for Operation and Monitoring

Chapter 3

Setting n001 for Parameter Write-prohibit Selection/Parameter

Initialization

·No data can be written to n176 for parameter copy function selection unless the default setting is changed. To write data to this parameter, set n001 for parameter write-prohibit selection/parameter initialization to 4.

Parameter

Register Name

n001 0101

Description Setting range

Unit of setting

Default setting

Changes during operation

No Parameter writeprohibit selection/ parameter initialization

Used to prohibit parameters to be written, sets parameters, or change the monitor range of parameters.

Used to initialize parameters to default settings.

0: Sets or monitor parameter n001. The parameters within a range from n002 to n179 can be monitored only.

1: Sets or monitor the parameters within a range from n001 to n49 (i.e., function group 1 settings).

2: Sets or monitor the parameters within a range from n001 to n79 (i.e., function groups 1 and 2 settings).

3: Sets or monitor the parameters within a range from n001 to n119 (i.e., function groups 1 through 3 settings).

4: Sets or monitor the parameters within a range from n001 to n179 (i.e., function groups 1 through 4 settings).

5: Same operation as set to

4, but RUN command is excepted in program mode.

6: Clears the error log.

8: Initializes parameters to default settings in 2-wire sequence.

9: Initializes parameters in

3-wire sequence.

10:For the USA, initializes parameter in 2--wire sequence.

11:For the USA, initializes parameter in 3--wire sequence.

0 to 9

3-13

Preparing for Operation and Monitoring

Parameter Settings in n001

Key sequence

Indicator Display example

In approximately

1 s.

Explanation

Chapter 3

Power ON

Press the Mode Key repeatedly until the

PRGM indicator is lit.

Check that “n001” is displayed.

Press the Enter Key.

The data of the specified parameter number is displayed.

Press the Increment Key repeatedly to display the figure “4.” At that time the display flashes.

Press the Enter Key so that the set value will be entered and the data display will be lit.

The parameter number will be displayed again in approximately 1 s.

Reading the Parameter Set Value (rEd)

·To read the parameter set values in the Inverter with the EEPROM of the Digital Operator, set n176 for parameter copy function selection to rEd.

Procedure to Read the Parameter Set Values

Key sequence

Indicator Display example

Explanation

Check that the PRGM indicator is lit. If the

PRGM is not lit, press the Mode Key repeatedly until the PRGM indicator is lit.

Use the Increment or Decrement Key to display n176.

Press the Enter Key. Then “rdy” will be displayed.

Use the Increment Key to display “rEd.”

Completes or

Press the Enter Key so that the parameter set values in the Inverter will be read by the

EEPROM of the Digital Operator, during which the display flashes.

When the set values have been all read,

“End” will be displayed.

Press the Mode or Enter Key. The parameter number (n176) will be displayed again.

3-14

Preparing for Operation and Monitoring

Chapter 3

Note Be sure to set n177 for parameter read-prohibit selection to 1 so that the parameters can be read.

Copying the Data in the EEPROM of the Digital Operator to another Inverter (CPy)

·To copy the parameter set values to another Inverter from the EEPROM of the Digital

Operator, set n176 for parameter copy function selection to CPy.

·When the parameter set values have been read, turn OFF the Inverter and remove the

Digital Operator. Refer to 2-1-3 Removing and Mounting the Covers for details.

·Mount the Digital Operator to the Inverter to which the parameters are copied. Then turn ON the Inverter.

·Check that n001 for parameter write-prohibit selection/parameter initialization is set to

4 in the Inverter (i.e., values can be set in n001 through n179). If n001 is not set to 4, take the steps described above and set n002 to 4.

Note The above procedure is possible provided that the Inverters are the same in power supply specification and control mode (i.e., V/f or vector control).

Procedure to Copy the Parameter Set Values

Key sequence

Indicator Display example

Power ON

Explanation

Press the Mode Key repeatedly until the

PRGM indicator is lit.

Use the Increment or Decrement Key to display “n176.”

Press the Enter Key. Then “rdy” will be displayed.

Use the Increment Key to display “CPy.”

Completes or

Press the Enter Key so that the parameter set values in the EEPROM of the Digital

Operator will be copied to the Inverter, during which the display flashes.

When the set values have been all copied,

“End” will be displayed.

Press the Mode or Enter Key. The parameter number (n176) will be displayed again.

Note 1. Check and verify the set ranges and set values of the parameters written to the

Inverter. If any error is found as a result, all the parameter set values will be prohibited and the previous values will be reset.

3-15

Preparing for Operation and Monitoring

Chapter 3

If a set range error results, the corresponding parameter number will flash. In the case of a verification error, “oPj” (j is a figure) will flash.

Note 2. The following parameter set values or output frequency on hold cannot be copied.

n176: Parameter copy function selection n178: Error log n177: Parameter read-prohibit selection n179: Software version

Note 3. The following parameter set values cannot be copied if the Inverters are different to each other in capacity.

n011 to n017: V/f setting n036: Rated motor current n108: Motor leakage inductance n109: Torque compensation limit n080: Carrier frequency n110: Motor no-load current n105: Torque compensation core loss n140: Energy-saving control coefficient K2 n106: Rated motor slip n107: Motor wire-to-wire resistance n158: Motor code

Note 4. Functions for 5.5/7.5kW Inverters cannot be copied to Inverters with different capacities.

Verifying the Parameter Set Values (vFy)

·In order to verify that the copied parameter set values in the Inverter coincide with those in the EEPROM of the Digital Operator, set n176 for parameter copy function selection to vFy.

Note The parameter set values can be verified provided that they are copied between the Inverters that are the same in power supply specification and control mode

(i.e., V/f or vector control).

Procedure to Verify the Parameter Set Values

Key sequence

Indicator Display example

Power ON

Explanation

Press the Mode Key repeatedly until the

PRGM indicator is lit.

Use the Increment or Decrement Key to display “n176.”

Press the Enter Key. Then “rdy” will be displayed.

Use the Increment Key to display “vFy.”

Press the Enter Key so that the parameter set values are verified, during which the display flashes.

3-16

Preparing for Operation and Monitoring

Chapter 3

Key sequence

Indicator Display example

Explanation

Completes or

If there is a parameter set value that does not coincide, the parameter number will flash.

Press the Enter Key so that the corresponding set value in the Inverter will flash.

Press the Enter Key again so that the corresponding set value in the EEPROM of the Digital Operator will flash.

Press the Increment Key so that verification will resume.

When the set values have been all checked,

“End” will be displayed.

Press the Mode or Enter Key. The parameter number (n176) will be displayed again.

Note 1. The above operation is interrupted when the STOP/RESET Key is pressed while the parameter number or parameter set value is flashing because the parameter set value does not coincide. “End” will be displayed. By pressing the

Mode or Enter Key, the parameter number (n176) is displayed again.

Note 2. By attempting to verify the parameter set values in Inverters that are different in capacity, “vAE” flashes for a capacity error. Press the Enter Key to continue verifying the parameter set values. To cancel the operation, press the STOP/RE-

SET Key.

3-17

Preparing for Operation and Monitoring

Chapter 3

3-2-3 Parameter Read-prohibit Selection (Prohibiting

Data Written to the EEPROM of the Digital

Operator)

·To store the parameter set values in the EEPROM of the Digital Operator, set n177 for parameter read-prohibit selection to 0. A protection error (PrE) will be detected by attempting to read the parameter set values in the Inverter with rEd set. This protects the parameter set values in the EEPROM from change. The PrE display is turned OFF by pressing the Mode Key.

Parameter

Register Name

n177 01B1

Description Setting range

Unit of setting

Default setting

Changes during operation

No Parameter readprohibit selection

Used to keep the data in the

EEPROM of the Digital

Operator on hold.

0: Parameter read-prohibit

(No data can be written to the EEPROM)

1: Parameter read possible

(Data can be written to the

EEPROM)

0, 1

Note 1. No data can be written to n177 unless the default setting is changed. To write data to this parameter, set n001 for parameter write-prohibit selection/parameter initialization to 4.

Note 2. The parameter setting has an effect on the Digital Operator. If the Digital Operator with the data in the EEPROM protected is mounted to another Inverter, n117 will be set to 0 regardless of the n117 setting in the Inverter.

Steps to Set Parameter Read-prohibit

Key sequence

Indicator Display example

Power ON

Explanation

Press the Mode Key repeatedly until the

PRGM indicator is lit.

Use the Increment or Decrement Key to display “n177.”

Press the Enter Key. The present set data will be displayed.

3-18

Preparing for Operation and Monitoring

Key sequence

In approximately

1 s.

Indicator

Chapter 3

Display example

Explanation

Use the Increment or Decrement Key to display to set the data, during which the display flashes.

0: Parameter read-prohibit (No data can be written to the EEPROM)

1: Parameter read possible (Data can be written to the EEPROM)

Press the Enter Key so that the set value will be entered and the data display will be lit.

The parameter number will be displayed again in approximately 1 s.

3-2-4 Parameter Copy or Verify Errors

·The following description provides information on errors that may result while the parameter set values are read, copied, or verified, and the remedies to be taken. The display flashes while displaying these errors.

Display

pre rde cse nde

Name

Protection error

Probable cause

An attempt was made to read the parameter set values while n177 for parameter read-prohibit selection was set to 0.

Read error The parameter set values were not read correctly or a main-circuit low voltage was detected while the parameter set values were read.

Checksum error A checksum error resulted in the parameter set values in the EEPROM of the Digital

Operator.

No data error There are no parameter set values stored in the

EEPROM of the Digital

Operator.

Remedy

Set n177 to 1 and retry after rechecking the necessity of reading the parameter set values.

Retry after checking that the voltage of the main circuit is normal.

Read the parameter set values again and store them in the EEPROM.

Read the parameter set values and store them in the

EEPROM.

3-19

Preparing for Operation and Monitoring

Chapter 3

Display

cpe cye uae ife

Name

Copy error

Copy voltage error Main-circuit low voltage is detected while the Inverter

Capacity error

Communications error

Probable cause

An attempt was made to copy or verify the parameter set values while the

Inverters are different to each other in voltage or control mode.

was copying the parameter set values.

An attempt was made to verify the parameter set values while the Inverters were different to each other in capacity.

A communications error resulted between the

Inverter and Digital

Operator.

Remedy

Check that the Inverters are the same in voltage and control mode. If either of them is different, no parameter set values can be either copied or verified.

If the Inverters are different only in control mode, retry after changing the mode of the Inverter to which the parameter set values are to be written.

Retry after checking that the voltage of the main circuit is normal.

To continue verifying the parameter set values, press the Enter Key.

To cancel the operation, press the STOP/RESET

Key.

Retry after checking the connection between the

Inverter and Digital

Operator.

3-20

Test Run

4-1 Procedure for Test Run

4-2 Operation Example

Chapter 4

Test Run

Chapter 4

WARNING

Turn ON the input power supply only after mounting the front cover, terminal covers, bottom cover, Operator, and optional items. Not doing so may result in electrical shock.

WARNING

Do not remove the front cover, terminal covers, bottom cover,

Operator, or optional items while the power is being supplied. Not doing so may result in electrical shock.

WARNING

Do not operate the Operator or switches with wet hands. Doing so may result in electrical shock.

WARNING

Do not touch the inside of the Inverter. Doing so may result in electrical shock.

WARNING

Do not come close to the machine when using the error retry function because the machine may abruptly start when stopped by an alarm.

Doing so may result in injury.

WARNING

Provide a separate emergency stop switch because the STOP Key on the Operator is valid only when function settings are performed.

Not doing so may result in injury.

WARNING

Be sure confirm that the RUN signal is turned OFF before turning ON the power supply, resetting the alarm, or switching the

LOCAL/REMOTE selector. Doing so while the RUN signal is turned

ON may result in injury.

Caution

Be sure to confirm permissible ranges of motors and machines before operation because the Inverter speed can be easily changed from low to high. Not doing so may result in damage to the product.

Provide a separate holding brake when necessary. Not doing so may result in injury.

4-2

Test Run

Caution

Chapter 4

Do not perform a signal check during operation. Doing so may result in injury or damage to the product.

4-3

Test Run

4-1 Procedure for Test Run

Chapter 4

1. Installation and Mounting

Install the Inverter according to the installation conditions. Refer to page 2-2. Ensure that the installation conditions are met.

2. Wiring and Connection

Connect to the power supply and peripheral devices. Refer to page 2-11. Select peripheral devices which meet the specifications and wire correctly.

3. Power Connection

Carry out the following pre-connection checks before turning ON the power supply.

Always ensure that a power supply to the correct voltage is used and that the power input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3) are wired correctly.

3G3MV-A2j: 3-phase 200 to 230 VAC

3G3MV-ABj: Single-phase 200 to 240 VAC (Wire R/L1 and S/L2)

3G3MV-A4j: 3-phase 380 to 460 VAC

Make sure that the motor output terminals (U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3) are connected to the motor correctly.

Ensure that the control circuit terminals and the control device are wired correctly.

Make sure that all control terminals are turned OFF.

Set the motor to no-load status (i.e., not connected to the mechanical system).

Having conducted the above checks, connect the power supply.

4. Check the Display Status

Check to be sure that there are no faults in the Inverter.

If the display at the time the power is connected is normal, it will read as follows:

RUN indicator: Flashes

ALARM indicator: OFF

Simplified-LED (setting/monitor) indicators: FREF, FOUT, or IOUT is lit.

Data display: Displays the corresponding data of the indicator that is lit.

When a fault has occurred, the details of the fault will be displayed. In that case, refer to Chapter 8 Maintenance Operations and take necessary remedies.

5. Initializing Parameters

Initialize the parameters.

Set n001 to 8 for initialization in 2-wire sequence.

4-4

Test Run

Chapter 4

6. Setting Parameters

Set the parameters required for a test run.

Perform the test run in V/f control mode. The control mode needs to be set to V/f control since it will not be initialized. Set the rated motor current in order to prevent the motor from burning due to overloading.

7. No-load Operation

Start the no-load motor using the Digital Operator.

Set the frequency reference using the Digital Operator and start the motor using key sequences.

8. Actual Load Operation

Connect the mechanical system and operate using the Digital Operator.

When there are no difficulties using the no-load operation, connect the mechanical system to the motor and operate using the Digital Operator.

9. Operation

Basic Operation:

Operation based on the basic settings required to start and stop the Inverter. Refer to page 5-1.

Advanced Operation:

Operation that uses PID control or other functions. Refer to page 6-1.

For operation within standard parameters, refer to Chapter 5 Basic Operation.

Refer to Chapter 5 Basic Operation and Chapter 6 Advanced Operation for the various advanced functions, such as energy-saving control, PID control, stall prevention, carrier frequency setting, overtorque detection, torque compensation, and slip compensation.

4-5

Test Run

4-2 Operation Example

Chapter 4

1 Power Connection

Checkpoints before Connecting the Power Supply

·Check that the power supply is of the correct voltage and that the motor output terminals (R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3) are connected to the motor correctly.

3G3MV-A2j: Three-phase 200 to 230 VAC

3G3MV-ABj: Single-phase 200 to 240 VAC (Wire R/L1 and S/L2)

3G3MV-A4j: Three-phase 380 to 460 VAC

·Make sure that the motor output terminals (U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3) are connected to the motor correctly.

·Ensure that the control circuit terminals and the control device are wired correctly.

Make sure that all control terminals are turned OFF.

·Set the motor to no-load status (i.e., not connected to the mechanical system).

Connecting the Power Supply

·After conducting the above checks, connect the power supply.

2 Check the Display Status

·If the display is normal when the power is connected, it will read as follows:

Normal

RUN indicator: Flashes

ALARM indicator: Off

Simplified-LED (setting/monitor) indicators: FREF, FOUT, or IOUT is lit.

Data display: Displays the corresponding data for the indicator that is lit.

·When a fault has occurred, the details of the fault will be displayed. In that case, refer to

Chapter 8

Maintenance

Operations and take necessary action.

Fault

RUN indicator: Flashes

ALARM indicator: Lit (fault detection) or flashes (alarm detection)

Simplified-LED (setting/monitor) indicators: FREF, FOUT, or IOUT is lit.

Data display: The fault code, such as UV1, is displayed. The display will differ depending on the type of fault.

4-6

Test Run

Chapter 4

3 Initializing Parameters

·Initialize the parameters using the following procedure.

·To initialize the parameters, set n01 to 8.

Key sequence Indicator Display example

Explanation

Power On

---

In approximately

1 s.

Press the Mode Key repeatedly until the

PRGM indicator is lit.

Press the Enter Key. The data of n001 will be displayed.

Use the Increment or Decrement Key to set n01 to 8. The display will flash.

Press the Enter Key so that the set value will be entered and the data display will be lit.

Parameter n001 will be initialized and reset to

1 from 8.

The parameter number will be displayed.

4-7

Test Run

Chapter 4

4 Setting the Motor Current Parameter

·Run the Inverter in V/f control mode for trial operation. The control mode is not initialized. Therefore, set n002 to 0 for V/f control. Set the motor current parameter in n036 in order to prevent the motor from burning due to overloading.

Control Mode Setting

Parameter

n002

Register Name

0102

Description

Control mode selection

Sets the control mode for the

Inverter.

0: V/f control mode

1: Vector control mode

0, 1

Note

1. The control mode is not initialized with n001 settings.

Note

2. There are parameters that are changed according to the set value in n002. For details, refer to

5-1-2 Setting the

Control Mode

(n002).

Setting range

Unit of setting

Default setting

Changes during operation

Key sequence Indicator Display example

In approximately

1 s.

Explanation

The parameter number is displayed.

Use the Increment or Decrement Key to display “n002.”

Press the Enter Key to display the set value in n002.

Use the Increment or Decrement key to set n002 to 0 unless the value is already set to 0, during which the display flashes.

Press the Enter Key so that the set value will be entered and the data display will be lit.

The parameter number will be displayed again in approximately 1 s.

4-8

Test Run

Chapter 4

Setting the Rated Motor Current

Parameter

Register Name Description Setting range

Unit of setting

n036 0124 Rated motor current

Used to set the rated motor current (A) used for the reference current of motor overload detection (OL1).

Note

1. The default setting for the rated motor current is the standard rated current of the maximum applicable motor.

Note

2. Motor overload detection (OL1) is disabled by setting the parameter to 0.0.

0.0% to

150%

(A) of rated output current of the

Inverter

Key sequence Indicator Display example

0.1 A

Explanation

Default setting

See note

1 under

“Description.”)

Changes during operation

In approximately

1 s.

The parameter number is displayed.

Use the Increment or Decrement Key to display “n036.”

Press the Enter Key to display the set value in n036.

Use the Increment or Decrement Key to set n036 to the rated motor current, during which the display flashes.

Press the Enter Key so that the set value will be entered and the data display will be lit.

The parameter number will be displayed again in approximately 1 s.

4-9

Test Run

Chapter 4

5 No-load Operation

·Start the no-load motor (i.e., not connected to the mechanical system) using the Digital

Operator.

Note Before operating the Digital Operator, check that the FREQ adjuster is set to MIN.

Forward/Reverse Rotation with the Digital Operator

Key sequence

Indicator Display example

Explanation

Monitors the frequency reference.

Press the RUN Key. The RUN Indicator will be lit.

Turn the FREQ adjuster clockwise slowly.

The monitored frequency reference will be displayed.

The motor will start rotating in the forward direction according to the frequency reference.

Press the MODE Key to turn ON the F/R indicator.

“For” will be displayed.

Use the Increment or Decrement Key to change the direction of motor rotation. The direction of motor rotation selected will be enabled when the display is changed after the Key is pressed.

·After changing the frequency reference or the rotation direction, check that there is no vibration or abnormal sound from the motor.

·Check that no faults have occurred in the Inverter during operation.

Stopping the Motor

·On completion of operating the motor in the no-load state in the forward or reverse direction, press the STOP/RESET Key. The motor will stop. (The RUN indicator will flash until the motor stops.)

6 Actual Load Operation

·After checking the operation with the motor in no-load status, connect the mechanical system and operate with an actual load.

Note Before operating the Digital Operator, check that the FREQ adjuster is set to MIN.

Connecting the System

·After confirming that the motor has stopped completely, connect the mechanical system.

·Be sure to tighten all the screws when fixing the motor axis in the mechanical system.

4-10

Test Run

Chapter 4

Operation Using the Digital Operator

·In case a fault occurs during operation, make sure the Stop Key on the Digital Operator is easily accessible.

·Use the Digital Operator in the same way as no-load operation.

·First set the frequency reference to a low speed of one tenth the normal operating speed.

Checking the Operating Status

·Having checked that the operating direction is correct and that the machine is operating smoothly at slow speed, increase the frequency reference.

·After changing the frequency reference or the rotation direction, check that there is no vibration or abnormal sound from the motor. Check the monitor display (IOUT or multifunction monitor U-03) to ensure that the output current is not becoming excessive.

4-11

Chapter 5 Basic Operation

5-1 Initial Settings

5-2 Operation in Vector Control

5-3 Operation in V/f Control

5-4 Setting the Local/Remote Mode

5-5 Selecting the Operation Command

5-6 Setting the Frequency Reference

5-7 Setting the Acceleration/Deceleration

Time

5-8 Selecting the Reverse Rotation-prohibit

5-9 Selecting the Stopping Mode

5-10 Multi-function I/O

5-11 Multi-function Analog Output and Pulse

Monitor Output

Basic Operation

Chapter 5

This section explains the basic settings required to operate and stop the

Inverter.

The settings of parameters described here will be sufficient for simple

Inverter operations.

First, make these basic settings, then skip to the explanations of those special functions, even when your application requires special functions, such as energy-saving control, PID control, stall prevention, carrier frequency setting, overtorque detection, torque compensation, slip compensation.

Refer to Chapter 6 Advanced Operation.

5-1 Initial Settings

·The following initial settings are required.

Parameter Write-prohibit Selection/Parameter Initialization (n001): Set n001 to 4 so that n001 through n179 can be set or displayed.

Control Mode Selection (n002): Set to V/f or vector control mode according to the application.

5-1-1 Setting the Parameter Write-prohibit

Selection/Parameter Initialization (n001)

·Set n001 to 4 so that n001 through n179 can be set or displayed.

n001

Parameter Write-prohibit

Selection/Parameter Initialization

Setting range

0 to 9

Register 0101

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

Note This parameter makes it possible to write-prohibit parameters, change the parameter set or displayed range, or initialize all parameters to default values.

5-2

Basic Operation

Chapter 5

Set Values

Value

Description

Displays and sets n001. Parameters from n002 to n179 can be displayed only.

Sets or monitors parameters n001 through n049 (i.e., function group 1 settings).

Sets or monitors parameters n001 through n079 (i.e., function groups 1 and 2 settings).

Sets or monitors parameters n001 through n119 (i.e., function groups 1 through 3 settings).

Sets or monitors parameters n001 through n179 (i.e., function groups 1 through 4 settings).

Same operation as set to 4, but RUN command is accepted in program mode.

Clears the error log.

Initializes parameters to default settings in 2-wire sequence. (See note.)

Initializes parameters in 3-wire sequence. (See note.)

For the USA, inizializes parameters in 2--wire sequence (See note)

For the USA, inizializes parameters in 3--wire sequence (See note)

Note The set value in n002 is not initialized with n001 set to 8,9,10 or 11..

Each of the following parameters is initialized according to the preset control mode. The default value varies with the control mode. For details, refer to page

5-3.

n014 (middle output frequency), n015 (middle output frequency voltage), n016

(minimum output frequency), n017 (minimum output frequency voltage), n104

(torque compensation primary-delay time constant), n111 (slip compensation gain), n112 (slip compensation primary-delay time constant)

5-1-2 Setting the Control Mode (n002)

·The 3G3MV Inverter operates in vector or V/f control mode to be selected according to the application.

·These two modes have the following characteristics.

Vector Control Mode

The Inverter in vector control mode calculates the vector of the operating condition of the motor. Then the 150% rated output torque of the motor is provided at an output frequency of 1 Hz. Vector control provides more powerful motor control than V/f control and makes it possible to suppress speed fluctuation regardless of changes in loads. Normally set the Inverter to this mode.

5-3

Basic Operation

Chapter 5

V/f Control Mode

This mode, which is used by conventional general-purpose inverters, is convenient when replacing a conventional model with the 3G3MV Inverter because the Inverter in this mode can be operated without considering the constants of the motor. Furthermore, set the Inverter to this mode if the Inverter is connected to more than one motor or special motors such as high-speed motors.

n002

Control Mode Selection

Setting range

0, 1

Register 0102

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

Note This parameter is used for selecting the control mode of the Inverter.

Set Values

Value

V/f control mode

Vector control mode (open loop)

Description

Note 1. This parameter is not initialized by setting n001 (parameter write-prohibit selection/parameter initialization) to 8 or 9 for parameter initialization.

Note 2. Each of the following parameters is initialized according to the control mode set in this parameter. The default value varies with the control mode. Therefore, be sure to set the following parameters after setting the control mode in n002.

Parameter

n014 n015 n016 n017 n104 n111 n112

Middle output frequency

Middle output frequency voltage

Minimum output frequency

Minimum output frequency voltage

Torque compensation primary-delay time constant

Slip compensation gain

Slip compensation primary-delay time constant

V/f control

(Set value: 0)

1.5 Hz

12.0 V (24.0 V)

(see note 2)

1.5 Hz

12.0 V (24.0 V)

(see note 2)

0.3 s

Default value

Vector control

(Set value: 1)

3.0 Hz

11.0 V (22.0 V)

1.0 Hz

4.3 V (8.6 V)

0.2 s

0.0

2.0 s

1.0

0.2 s

Note 1. Values in parentheses are for 400-V models.

Note 2. For 5.5- and 7.5-kW Inverters, this value is set to 10.0 V for 200-V-class models and to 20.0 V for 400-V-class models.

5-4

Basic Operation

5-2 Operation in Vector Control

Chapter 5

To operate the Inverter in vector control mode, be sure to set the following parameters.

n036 (rated motor current), n106 (rated motor slip), n107 (motor wire-towire resistance), n110 (motor no-load current)

Setting the Rated Motor Current (n036)

·Check the motor nameplate and set this parameter to the rated current.

·This parameter is used as a vector control constant. Be sure to set the parameter correctly. This set value is also used for determining the electronic thermal characteristics to protect the motor from overheating. The correct set value protects the motor from burning that may result from overloading.

n036

Rated Motor Current

Setting range

0.0% to 150% (A) of rated output current of the Inverter

Register 0124

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

0.1 A Default setting See note

Note The default setting for this parameter is the standard rated current of the maximum applicable motor.

Setting the Rated Motor Slip (n106)

·Set the rated motor slip in n106.

·This parameter is used as a vector control constant. Be sure to set the parameter correctly. This set value is used for slip compensation as well.

·Calculate the rated motor slip value from the rated frequency (Hz) and rpm on the motor nameplate by using the following formula.

Rated slit value (Hz) = Rated frequency (Hz) -- Rated rpm x Number of poles/120 n106

Rated Motor Slip

Setting range

0.0 to 20.0 (Hz)

Register 016A

Hex

Unit of setting

0.1

Changes during operation

Yes

Default setting

See note

Note The default setting for this parameter is the standard motor slip of the maximum applicable motor.

5-5

Basic Operation

Chapter 5

Setting the Motor Phase to neutral Resistance (n107)

·Set this parameter to 1/2 of the phase-to-phase resistance of the motor, or phase to neutral resistance.

·Contact the manufacturer of the motor for the above resistance.

·This parameter is used as a vector control constant. Be sure to set the parameter correctly.

n107

Motor Phase to neutral

Resistance

Setting range

0.000 to 65.50 (W)

Register 016B

Hex

Unit of setting

See note 1

Changes during operation

Default setting

See note 2

Note 1. The value will be set in 0.001-W increments if the resistance is less than 10 W and 0.01-W increments if the resistance is 10 W or over.

Note 2. The default setting for this parameter is the standard phase to neutral resistance of the maximum applicable motor.

Setting the Motor No-load Current (n110)

·Set the motor no-load current in percentage based on the rated current of the Inverter as 100%.

·Contact the manufacturer of the motor for the motor no-load current.

·This parameter is used as a vector control constant. Be sure to set the parameter correctly. This set value is used for slip compensation as well.

n110

Motor No-load Current

Setting range

0 to 99 (%)

Register 016E

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

See note

Note The default setting for this parameter is the standard no-load current of the maximum applicable motor.

5-6

Basic Operation

5-3 Operation in V/f Control

Chapter 5

Inverter is connected to than two or more motors or special motors, such as high-speed motors.

To operate the Inverter in V/f control mode, be sure to set n036 for the rated motor current and n011 through n017 for the V/f pattern.

5-3-1 Setting the Rated Motor Current (n036)

·Check the motor nameplate and set this parameter to the rated current.

·This set value is used for determining the electronic thermal characteristics to protect the motor from overheating. The correct set value protects the motor from burning that may result from overloading.

n036

Rated Motor Current

Setting range

0.0% to 150% (A) of rated output current of the Inverter

Register 0124

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

0.1 A Default setting

See note 1

Note 1. The default setting for this parameter is the standard rated current of the maximum applicable motor.

Note 2. Motor overload detection (OL1) is disabled by setting the parameter to 0.0.

5-3-2 Setting the V/f Patterns (n011 to n017)

·Set the V/f pattern so that the motor output torque is adjusted to the required load torque.

·The 3G3MV incorporates an automatic torque boost function. Therefore, a maximum of 150% torque can be output at 3 Hz without changing the default settings. Check the system in trial operation and leave the default settings as they are if no torque characteristic changes are required.

n011

Maximum Frequency (FMAX)

Setting range

50.0 to 400.0 (Hz)

Register 010B

Hex

Unit of setting

0.1

Changes during operation

Default setting

60.0

5-7

Basic Operation

Chapter 5

n012

Maximum Voltage (VMAX)

Setting range

0.1 to 255.0 [0.1 to 510.0] (V) n013

Maximum Voltage Frequency

(FA)

Setting range

0.2 to 400.0 (Hz)

Register 010C

Hex

Unit of setting

Register 010D

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

0.1 V Default setting

Hex

0.1

Hz n014

Middle Output Frequency (FB)

Register 010E

Hex

Setting range

0.1 to 399.9 (Hz)

Unit of setting

0.1

Changes during operation

Default setting

60.0

Changes during operation

200.0

[400.0]

Default setting

1.5

n015

Middle Output Frequency

Voltage (VC)

Setting range

0.1 to 255.0 [0.1 to 510.0] (V)

Register 010F

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

0.1 V Default setting

12.0

[24.0]

(seenote2) n016

Minimum Output Frequency

(FMIN)

Setting range

0.1 to 10.0 (Hz)

Register 0110

Hex

Unit of setting

0.1

Changes during operation

Default setting

1.5

n017

Minimum Output Frequency

Voltage (VMIN)

Setting range

0.1 to 50.0 [0.1 to 100.0] (V)

Register 0111

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

0.1 V Default setting

12.0

[24.0]

(seenote2)

Note 1. [ ] values indicate those for 400-V-class Inverters.

Note 2. For 5.5- and 7.5-kW Inverters, this value is set to 10.0 V for 200-V-class models and to 20.0 V for 400-V-class models.

Output voltage (V) n012 (VMAX) n015 (VC) n017 (VMIN) n016

(FMIN) n014

(FB) n013

(FA)

Note 1. Set the parameters so that the following condition will be satisfied.

n016 n014 < n013 n011

Note 2. The value set in n015 will be ignored if parameters n016 and n014 are the same in value.

Frequency (Hz) n011

(FMAX)

5-8

Basic Operation

Chapter 5

·Set the rated motor frequency as the maximum voltage frequency, and set the rated motor voltage as the maximum voltage.

·The vertical-axis load or the load with high viscous friction may require high torque at low speed. If the torque is insufficient at low speed, increase the voltage in the lowspeed range by 1 V, provided that no overload (OL1 or OL2) is detected. If an overload is detected, decrease the set values or consider the use of an Inverter model with a higher capacity.

·The required torque of fan or pump control increases in proportion to the square of the speed. By setting a quadratic V/f pattern to increase the voltage in the low-speed range, the power consumption of the system will increase.

5-9

Basic Operation

5-4 Setting the Local/Remote Mode

Chapter 5

The 3G3MV operates in local or remote mode. The following description provides information on these modes and how to select them.

Basic Concept

Operation mode

Local

Basic concept

The Inverter in a system operates independently in this mode so that the

Inverter can be checked independently.

Remote The Inverter in a system operates according to the control signal of the host controller.

Description

Operation Command

Starts with the RUN Key of the Digital

Operator and stops with the

STOP/RESET Key.

Frequency Reference

Set with the Digital Operator or the FREQ adjuster.

Set with frequency reference selection in local mode in n007.

Operation Command

Selectable from four types and set in n003.

Frequency Reference

Selectable from ten types and set in n004.

Local/Remote Selection Methods

·The following two selection methods are available to set the Inverter to local or remote mode. However, it is not possible to switch between local and remote modes during operation command input.

Select the mode with the LO/RE Key of the Digital Operator.

Set any one of multi-function inputs 1 through 7 (n050 through n056) to 17 to set the

Inverter to local mode with control input turned ON.

Note If the above setting is made, mode selection will be possible only with multi--function input, and not with the Digital Operator.

·The inverter always goes into remote mode when the power is turned ON. To operate immediately after power--up, preset the RUN command and frequency reference settings in remote mode.

5-10

Basic Operation

5-5 Selecting the Operation Command

Chapter 5

The following description provides information on how to input operation commands to start or stop the Inverter or change the direction of rotation of the Inverter.

Two types of command input methods are available. Select either one of them according to the application.

Selecting the Operation Mode (n003)

·Select the method of operation mode input to start or stop the Inverter.

·The following method is enabled in remote mode only. The command can be input through key sequences on the Digital Operator.

n003

Operation Command

Selection

Setting range

0 to 3

Register 0103

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

Set Values

Value

Description

The RUN and STOP/RESET Keys of the Digital Operator are enabled.

Multi-function input in 2- or 3-wire sequence through the control circuit terminals is enabled.

MODBUS RS-422/485 communications are enabled.

Input from optional the CompoBus/D Communications Unit is enabled.

Selecting the STOP/RESET Key Function (n007)

·When parameter n003 is not set to 0, set whether or not to use the STOP/RESET Key of the Digital Operator to stop the Inverter in remote mode. The STOP/RESET Key is always enabled in local mode regardless of the setting in n003.

n007

STOP Key Function Selection

Setting range

0, 1

Register 0107

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

Set Values

Value

Description

The STOP/RESET Key of the Digital Operator is enabled.

The STOP/RESET Key of the Digital Operator is disabled.

5-11

Basic Operation

5-6 Setting the Frequency Reference

Chapter 5

5-6-1 Selecting the Frequency Reference

The following description provides information on how to set the frequency reference in the Inverter. Select the method according to the operation mode.

Remote mode:Select and set one out of ten frequency references in n004.

Local mode: Select and set one out of two frequency references in n008.

Selecting the Frequency Reference (n004) in Remote Mode

·Select the input method of frequency references in remote mode.

·Ten frequency references are available in remote mode. Select one of them according to the application.

n004

Frequency Reference Selection

Register 0104

Hex

Setting range

0 to 9

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

Set Values

Value

Description

The settings of the FREQUENCY adjuster in the Digital Operator are enabled. (see note 1)

Frequency reference 1 (n024) is enabled.

The frequency reference control terminal (for 0- to 10-V input) is enabled.

(see note 2)

The frequency reference control terminal (for 4- to 20-mA current input) is enabled. (see note 3)

The frequency reference control terminal (for 0- to 20-mA current input) is enabled. (see note 3)

The pulse train command control input is enabled.

Frequency reference (0002 Hex) through MODBUS communications is enabled.

Multi-function analog voltage input (0 to 10 V) is enabled. This setting is not required unless two analog inputs are required in PID control.

Multi-function analog current input (4 to 20 mA) is enabled. This setting is not required unless two analog inputs are required in PID control.

Frequency reference input from the CompoBus/D Communications Unit is enabled.

Note 1. The maximum frequency (FMAX) is set when the FREQ adjuster is set to MAX.

5-12

Basic Operation

Chapter 5

Note 2. The maximum frequency (FMAX) is set with 10 V input.

Note 3. The maximum frequency (FMAX) is set with 20 mA input, provided that SW2 on the control PCB is switched from V to I.

Note 4. Set n149 for the pulse train input scale to the pulse train frequency that is equivalent to the maximum frequency (FMAX).

·The frequency reference set in n004 functions as frequency reference 1 when the

Inverter is in multi-step speed operation. The set values in n025 through n031 and n120 through n127 for frequency references 2 through 16 are enabled.

Selecting the Frequency Reference (n008) in Local Mode

·Select the input method of frequency references in local mode.

·Two frequency references are available in local mode. Select one of them according to the application.

n008

Frequency Reference Selection in Local Mode

Setting range

0, 1

Register 0108

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

Set Values

Value

Description

The settings of the FREQ adjuster in the Digital Operator are enabled.

(see note 1)

Key sequences on the Digital Operator are enabled. (see note 2)

Note 1. The maximum frequency (FMAX) is set when the FREQ adjuster is set to MAX.

Note 2. The frequency reference can be set with key sequences while the FREF indicator is lit or with the set value in n024 for frequency reference 1. In either case, the value is set in n024.

5-6-2 Upper and Lower Frequency Reference Limits

Regardless of the methods of operation mode and frequency reference input, the upper and lower frequency reference limits can be set.

Setting the Upper and Lower Frequency Reference Limits

(n033 and n034)

·Set the upper and lower frequency reference limits as percentage based on the maximum frequency as 100%.

5-13

Basic Operation

Chapter 5

n033

Upper Frequency Reference

Limit

Setting range

0% to 110%

(Max. frequency = 100%) n034

Lower Frequency Reference

Limit

Setting range

0% to 110%

(Max. frequency = 100%)

Register 0121

Hex

Unit of setting

Register 0122

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

100

Changes during operation

Default setting

Note If n034 is set to a value less than the minimum output frequency (FMIN), the

Inverter will have no output when a frequency reference less than the minimum output frequency input is ON.

5-6-3 Frequency Referencing by Analog Input

This section explains the methods for referencing frequencies by analog input, adjusting input characteristics, and detecting input command errors.

Either the frequency reference control terminal (voltage/current) or multifunction analog voltage/current input can be used for analog inputs. The gain, bias, and filter time parameters can be used for adjustments, or, alternatively, the adjustments can be made by external analog voltage (current), using the multi-function analog inputs.

Setting Frequency References by Analog Input

Analog inputs can be set only in remote mode. Set parameter n004 (frequency reference selection) to any of the following: 2 to 4 (frequency reference control terminal), 7

(multi-function analog voltage input), or 8 (multi-function analog current input).

Note

If the frequency reference control terminal is to be used for current inputs, the SW2 setting must be changed from V to I. Please, also refer to page 2-17.

FR Terminal Adjustments for Frequency Reference Input

Gain and Bias Settings (n060 and n061)

·Set the input characteristics of analog frequency references in n060 (for the frequency reference gain) and n061 (for the frequency reference bias).

·Set the frequency of maximum analog input (10 V or 20 mA) in n41 as percentage based on the maximum frequency as 100%.

Example: In order to obtain the maximum frequency at 5 V, set the value to 200% because 10-V input is 200% maximum frequency.

5-14

Basic Operation

Chapter 5

·Set the frequency of minimum analog input (0 V, 0 mA, or 4 mA) in n42 as percentage based on the maximum frequency as 100%.

Example: In order to obtain 50% maximum frequency output with 0 V input, set the value to 50%.

n060

Frequency Reference Gain

Setting range

0% to 255%

(Max. frequency = 100%)

Register 013C

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Yes

Default setting

100 n061

Frequency Reference Bias

Setting range

--99% to 99%

(Max. frequency = 100%)

Register 013D

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Yes

Default setting

Filter Time Constant Settings (n062)

·A primary delay digital filter can be set for analog frequency references to be input.

·This setting is ideal if the analog input signal changes rapidly or the signal is subject to noise interference.

·The larger the set value is, the slower the response speed will be.

n062

Analog Frequency Reference

Filter Time

Setting range

0.00 to 2.00 (s)

Register 013E

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

0.01 s Default setting 0.10

Multi-function Analog Input

An auxiliary analog input can be set for the Digital Operator’s multi-function analog voltage/current input. Select from the following functions.

n077

Multi-function Analog Input

Terminal Function Selection

Setting range

0 to 4

Register 014D

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

0 n078

Multi-function Analog Input

Terminal Selection

Setting range

0, 1 n079

Multi-function Analog Input

Frequency Bias

Setting range

0 to 50

Register 014E

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

Register 014F

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

1 %

Default setting

Note Please also refer to page 2-20.

5-15

Basic Operation

Chapter 5

For n077, select from the following five functions allocated to the multi-function analog input terminal.

n077 Set Values

Value Name

Multi-function

Analog Input

Function Disable

Auxiliary

Frequency

Reference

Frequency Gain

(See note 1.)

Frequency Bias

(See note 1.)

Output Voltage

Bias

Description

Disables multi-function analog inputs.

Set “0” when setting multi-function inputs with n004

(Frequency Reference Selection) or n164 (PID Feedback

Input Block Selection). If this function is allocated for both, an error (err or oP6) will be generated.

Sets the terminal to be used as a second analog frequence reference terminal. The analog input from the multi-function analog input becomes the frequency reference in place of

Frequency Reference 2. Toggle the two analog inputs with the multi-function input’s multi-step speed references.

When this function is set, Frequency Reference 2 (n025) is ignored.

Adjusts the gain for frequency references that are input to the frequency reference input (analog) terminal.

0 to 10 V (4 mA, or 0 mA to 20 mA): 0x to 2x (See note 2.)

Adjusts the bias for frequency references that are input to the frequency reference input (analog) terminal.

0 to 10 V (4 mA, or 0 mA to 20 mA): --n079 SV to +n079 SV

(See note 2.)

Adjusts the Inverter’s output voltage bias. The bias value that is input is added to the output voltage value for the normal

V/f setting.

0 to 10 V (4 mA, or 0 mA to 20 mA): 0 V to +100 V

(See note 2.)

Note 1.

The frequency reference gain (n060) and frequency reference bias (n061) parameter settings are enabled. If “frequency gain” is set for the multi-function analog input, it is multiplied by n060; if “frequency bias” is set, it is added to n061.

Note 2.

The relationship between the multi-function analog input’s input voltage and control variable is shown for when the frequency reference and multi-function analog input gain are 100%, and when the bias setting is 0%.

For n078, select whether select whether voltage inputs or current inputs are to be used.

Value Description

Enable multi-function analog voltage inputs. (Disable current inputs.)

Enable multi-function analog current inputs. (Disable voltage inputs.)

5-16

Basic Operation

Chapter 5

When setting “3” (frequency bias) for the multi-function analog input terminal function selection (n077), set the standard value for the bias in n079. Make the setting as a percentage, with the maximum frequency (n011) as100%.

Adjusting Multi-function Analog Input

Setting the Gain and Bias of Multi-function Analog Voltage/Current

Input (n068 to n072)

·Set the multi-function analog voltage input characteristics in n068 (multi-function analog voltage input gain) and n069 (multi-function analog voltage input bias). Set the multi-function analog current input characteristics in n071 (multi-function analog current input gain) and n072 (multi-function analog current input bias).

·For the gain, set the maximum analog input (10 V or 20 mA) frequency as a percentage with the maximum frequency as 100%.

·For the bias, set the minimum analog input (0 V or 4 mA) frequency as a percentage with the maximum frequency as 100%.

n068

Multi-function Analog Voltage

Input Gain

Setting range

--255(%) to 255(%)

(Max. frequency: 100%)

Register 0144

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Yes

Default setting

100

Changes during operation

Yes

Default setting

0 n069

Multi-function Analog Voltage

Input Bias

Setting range

--100(%) to 100(%)

(Max. frequency: 100%) n071

Multi-function Analog Current

Input Gain

Setting range

--255(%) to 255(%)

(Max. frequency: 100%) n072

Multi-function Analog Current

Input Bias

Setting range

--100(%) to 100(%)

(Max. frequency: 100%)

Register 0145

Hex

Unit of setting

Register 0147

Hex

Unit of setting

Register 0148

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Yes

Default setting

100

Changes during operation

Yes

Default setting

Setting the Filter Time Constant of Multi-function Analog

Voltage/Current Input (n070 and n073)

·These parameters can be used to set a primary-delay digital filter for multi-function analog voltage input. For voltage inputs, set the multi-function analog voltage input filter time constant (n070). For current inputs, set the multi-function analog current input filter time constant (n073).

5-17

Basic Operation

Chapter 5

·These parameter settings are effective for smooth operation of the Inverter if the analog input signal changes too rapidly or the signal is interfered with by noise.

·The larger the set value is, the slower the response will be.

n070

Multi-function Analog Voltage

Input Filter Time Constant

Setting range

0.00 to 2.00 (s)

Register 0146

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Yes

0.01 s Default setting 0.10

n073

Multi-function Analog Current

Input Filter Time Constant

Setting range

0.00 to 2.00 (s)

Register 0149

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Yes

0.01 s Default setting 0.10

Frequency Reference Loss Detection (n064)

This function is provided for 5.5- and 7.5-kW Inverters only. If the frequency reference from the control circuit drops by more than 90% within 400 ms, this function detects it and determines that the reference has been lost (e.g., from some cause such as disconnected wiring).

When operating in remote mode, the setting for the frequency reference loss detection function is enabled when either an analog reference or a pulse train reference is selected for n004 (frequency reference selection).

Note 1.

If “frequence reference agree” (set value: 2) is preset for multi-function outputs 1 to 3

(n057 to n059), the frequency reference loss status can be checked. When using this output, implement external error processing.

Note 2.

When the frequency reference loss detection is enabled and a loss is detected, operation will continue at 80% of the frequency reference prior to the loss.

Note 3.

If the frequency reference is restored during a frequency reference loss, and the frequency returned to at least the level of the continuing operation, the frequency reference loss detection will be cleared and the Inverter will return to normal operation

Note 4.

Frequency reference loss detection does not operate for multi-function analog inputs.

n064

Frequency Reference Loss

Detection

Setting range

0, 1

Register Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0140

Hex

Default setting

Value

Description

Loss detection disabled. (Operation according to frequency reference; frequency reference loss detection disabled.)

Loss detection enabled. (After loss detection, operation continues at 80% of the frequency reference prior to the loss; frequency reference loss detection enabled.)

5-18

Basic Operation

Chapter 5

5-6-4 Setting Frequency References through Key

Sequences

The following description provides information on parameters related to frequency reference settings through key sequences on the Digital Operator

Frequency Reference Setting/Decimal Place Selection (n035)

·Set the unit of frequency reference and frequency-related values to be set or monitored in n035 through the Digital Operator.

·The frequency reference value will be set in 0.01-Hz increments if the frequency is less than 100 Hz and 0.1-Hz increments if the frequency is 100 Hz or over.

n035

Frequency Reference Setting/

Decimal Place Selection

Setting range

0 to 3,999

Register 0123

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

Set Values

Value

2 to 39

40 to

3,999

Description

Less than 100 Hz: 0.01-Hz increments

100 Hz or over: 0.1-Hz increments

0.1% increments (Max. frequency: 100%)

1-rpm increments (number of motor poles)

Unit setting

The value to be set or monitored at max. frequency jjjj

Three digits

Decimal place

Note To display 50.0 for example, set the value to 1500. (see note)

Note The unit of setting of each parameter and monitor item below varies with the decimal place.

Parameters

n024 to n032: Frequency references 1 through 8 and inching frequency command n120 through n127: Frequency references 9 through 16

Monitor Items

U-01: Frequency reference monitor

U-02: Output frequency monitor

5-19

Basic Operation

Chapter 5

Setting Frequency References 1 through 16 and the Inching

Frequency Command (n024 through n031, n120 through n127)

Frequency references 1 through 16 and an inching frequency command can be set together in the Inverter (using registers n024 through n31, n120 through n127).

Setting Frequency References 1 through 16 (n024 through n31, n120 through n127)

n024

Frequency Reference 1

Setting range

0.00 to max. frequency

Register 0118

Hex

Unit of setting

0.01 Hz

(see note 1)

Changes during operation

Yes

Default setting

6.0

n025

Frequency Reference 2

Setting range

0.00 to max. frequency n026

Frequency Reference 3

Setting range

0.00 to max. frequency n027

Frequency Reference 4

Setting range

0.00 to max. frequency n028

Frequency Reference 5

Setting range

0.00 to max. frequency n029

Frequency Reference 6

Setting range

0.00 to max. frequency

Register 0119

Hex

Unit of setting

0.01 Hz

(see note 1)

Changes during operation

Yes

Default setting

0.00

Register 011A

Hex

Unit of setting

0.01 Hz

(see note 1)

Changes during operation

Yes

Default setting

0.00

Register 011B

Hex

Unit of setting

0.01 Hz

(see note 1)

Changes during operation

Yes

Default setting

0.00

Register 011C

Hex

Unit of setting

0.01 Hz

(see note 1)

Changes during operation

Yes

Default setting

0.00

Register 011D

Hex

Unit of setting

0.01 Hz

(see note 1)

Changes during operation

Yes

Default setting

0.00

5-20

Basic Operation

n030

Frequency Reference 7

Setting range

0.00 to max. frequency n031

Frequency Reference 8

Setting range

0.00 to max. frequency n120

Frequency Reference 9

Setting range

0.00 to max. frequency n121

Frequency Reference 10

Setting range

0.00 to max. frequency n122

Frequency Reference 11

Setting range

0.00 to max. frequency n123

Frequency Reference 12

Setting range

0.00 to max. frequency n124

Frequency Reference 13

Setting range

0.00 to max. frequency n125

Frequency Reference 14

Setting range

0.00 to max. frequency

Chapter 5

Register 011E

Hex

Unit of setting

0.01 Hz

(see note 1)

Register 011F

Hex

Unit of setting

0.01 Hz

(see note 1)

Register 0178

Hex

Unit of setting

0.01 Hz

(see note 1)

Register 0179

Hex

Unit of setting

0.01 Hz

(see note 1)

Register 017A

Hex

Unit of setting

0.01 Hz

(see note 1)

Register 017B

Hex

Unit of setting

0.01 Hz

(see note 1)

Register 017C

Hex

Unit of setting

0.01 Hz

(see note 1)

Register 017D

Hex

Unit of setting

0.01 Hz

(see note 1)

Changes during operation

Yes

Default setting

0.00

Changes during operation

Yes

Default setting

0.00

Changes during operation

Yes

Default setting

0.00

Changes during operation

Yes

Default setting

0.00

Changes during operation

Yes

Default setting

0.00

Changes during operation

Yes

Default setting

0.00

Changes during operation

Yes

Default setting

0.00

Changes during operation

Yes

Default setting

0.00

5-21

Basic Operation

Chapter 5

n126

Frequency Reference 15

Setting range

0.00 to max. frequency

Register 017E

Hex

Unit of setting

0.01 Hz

(see note 1)

Changes during operation

Yes

Default setting

0.00

n127

Frequency Reference 16

Setting range

0.00 to max. frequency

Register 017F

Hex

Unit of setting

0.01 Hz

(see note 1)

Changes during operation

Yes

Default setting

0.00

Note 1. The setting unit of frequency references 1 through 16 is changed with the set value in n035 for frequency reference setting and decimal place selection. Values will be set in 0.01-Hz increments if the frequency is less than 100 Hz and

0.1-Hz increments if the frequency is 100 Hz or over.

Note 2. Frequency reference 1 is enabled with n004 for frequency reference selection set to 1.

Note 3. Frequency references 2 through 16 are enabled by setting multi-step speed references 1 through 4 in n050 through n056 for multi-function input. Refer to the following table for the relationship between multi-step speed references 1 through 4 and frequency references 1 through 16.

Frequency reference Multi-step speed reference 1

(Set value: 6)

Frequency reference 1 OFF

Frequency reference 2 ON

Frequency reference 3 OFF

Frequency reference 4 ON

Frequency reference 5 OFF

Frequency reference 6 ON

Frequency reference 7 OFF

Frequency reference 8 ON

Frequency reference 9 OFF

Frequency reference 10 ON

Frequency reference 11 OFF

Frequency reference 12 ON

Frequency reference 13 OFF

Frequency reference 14 ON

Frequency reference 15 OFF

Frequency reference 16 ON

Multi-step speed reference 2

(Set value: 7)

OFF

Multi-step speed reference 3

(Set value: 8)

OFF

Multi-step speed reference 4

(Set value: 9)

OFF

5-22

Basic Operation

Chapter 5

To change the frequency of frequency reference 2, for example, turn ON only the multifunction input terminal where multi-step speed reference 2 is set, and turn OFF any other multi-function input terminal.

For example, no settings for multi-step speed reference 3 or 4 will be required if only frequency references 1 through 4 are used. Any multi-step speed reference not set is regarded as turned-OFF input.

Setting the Inching Frequency Command (n032)

·The inching frequency command must be set as multi-function input in order to use the inching frequency command.

n032

Inching Frequency Command

Register 0120

Hex

Setting range

0.00 to max. frequency

Unit of setting

0.01 Hz

(see note 1)

Changes during operation

Yes

Default setting

6.0

Note 1. The setting unit of the inching frequency command is changed with the set value in n035 for frequency reference setting and decimal place selection. The value will be set in 0.01-Hz increments if the frequency is less than 100 Hz and

0.1-Hz increments if the frequency is 100 Hz or over.

Note 2. In order to use the inching frequency command, one of the n050 through n056 parameters for multi-function digital input must be set to 10 as an inching frequency command. Parameter n032 is selectable by turning ON the multi-function input set with the inching frequency command. The inching frequency command takes preference over the multi-step speed reference (i.e., when the inching frequency command is ON, all multi-step speed reference input will be ignored).

Setting the Frequency Reference with the FREF Indicator Lit

·The frequency reference can be set while the FREF indicator of the Digital Operator is lit in the following cases.

Parameter n004 for frequency reference selection is set to 1, which enables frequency reference 1, and the Inverter is in remote mode.

Parameter n008 for frequency selection in local mode is set to 1, which enables key sequences on the Digital Operator, and the Inverter is in local mode.

Frequency references 2 through 16 are set with multi-step speed reference input.

·The frequency reference can be changed, even during operation.

5-23

Basic Operation

Chapter 5

·When the frequency reference is changed while the FREF indicator is lit, the corresponding parameter is changed simultaneously. For example, if frequency reference 2 has been selected with multi-function input (a multi-step speed reference), the set value in n025 (for frequency reference 2) will be changed simultaneously when the frequency reference is changed while the FREF indicator is lit.

·Take the following default steps, for example, to change the frequency reference with the FREF indicator lit.

Key sequence

Indicator Display example

Explanation

Power On

Note If the FREF indicator has not been lit, press the

Mode Key repeatedly until the FREF indicator is lit.

Use the Increment or Decrement Key to set the frequency reference.

The data display will flash while the frequency reference is set.

Press the Enter Key so that the set value will be entered and the data display will be lit.

Setting the Key Sequential Frequency (n009)

·The Enter Key need not be pressed when changing the setting in n009. In that case, the frequency reference will change when the set value is changed with the Increment or Decrement Key while the data display is continuously lit.

n009

Key Sequential Frequency

Setting

Setting range

0, 1

Register

Unit of setting

0109

Hex

Changes during operation

Default setting

Set Values

Value

Description

Enter Key enabled (The set value is entered with the Enter Key pressed.)

Enter Key disabled (The set value set is entered immediately.)

5-24

Basic Operation

Chapter 5

5-6-5 Setting Frequency References by Pulse Train

Input

By setting n004 for frequency reference selection to 5 for enabling the pulse train reference control terminal, frequency references can be executed by pulse train input through the PR terminal.

The following description provides information on the n149 parameter

(pulse train input scale), which is used to execute frequency references by pulse train input.

Setting the Pulse Train Input Scale (n149)

·Set this parameter to the pulse train input scale so that frequency references can be executed by pulse train input.

·Set the maximum pulse train frequency in 10-Hz increments based on 10 Hz as 1. A proportional relationship is applied to frequencies less than the maximum frequency.

n149

Pulse Train Input Scale

Setting range

100 to 3,300

Register 0195

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

1 (10 Hz) Default setting 2,500

Note 1. For example, to set the maximum frequency reference with pulse train frequency input at 10 kHz, set the parameter to 1000 from the following formula.

10,000 (Hz)/10 (Hz) = 1,000

Note 2. Input the pulse train into the frequency reference common (FC) and pulse train input (RP) terminals under the following conditions.

High level: 3.5 to 13.2 V

Low level: 0.8 V max.

The response frequency is within a range from 0 to 33 kHz (30% to 70% ED).

ED = Operating Duty Cycle.

Setting the Pulse Train Frequency Reference Gain/Bias

(n074/n075)

·Set the input characteristics of pulse train input.

·Gain: Set the gain in percentage based on the maximum frequency of the pulse train input scale in n149 as 100%.

·Bias: Set the bias in percentage for frequency reference input at 0-Hz pulse train input based oh the maximum frequency as 100%.

5-25

Basic Operation

n074

Pulse Train Frequency

Reference Gain

Setting range

--255 to 255 n075

Pulse Train Frequency

Reference Bias

Setting range

--100 to 100

Frequency reference (Hz)

Register 014A

Hex

Unit of setting

Register 014B

Hex

Unit of setting

Chapter 5

Changes during operation

Yes

Default setting

100

Changes during operation

Yes

Default setting

Pulse train input frequency (Hz) n011: Maximum frequency

Pulse Train Frequency Reference Input Filter Constant (n076)

This parameter can be used to set a primary-delay digital filter for pulse train frequency reference input.

This parameter setting is effective for smooth operation of the Inverter if the pulse train input signal changes too rapidly or the signal is interfered with by noise.

The larger the set value is, the lower the response will be.

n076

Pulse Train Frequency

Reference Input Filter

Constant

Setting range

0.00 to 2.00

Register 014C

Hex

Unit of setting

0.01 s

Changes during operation

Default setting

0.10

5-26

Basic Operation

5-7 Setting the Acceleration/Deceleration Time

Chapter 5

The following description provides information on parameters related to acceleration and deceleration time settings.

Trapezoidal and S-shape acceleration and deceleration are available.

Using the S-shape characteristic function for acceleration and deceleration can reduce shock to the machinery when stopping or starting.

Acceleration/Deceleration Time Unit (n018)

·The acceleration and deceleration time of the Inverter can be set within a range from

0.0 to 6,000 s without changing the default setting. If a more precise unit of setting is required, this parameter can be set for 0.01-s increments. In this case, the setting range will be from 0.00 to 600.0 s.

n018

Acceleration/Deceleration

Time Setting

Setting range

0, 1

Register 0112

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

Set Values

Value

Description

Less than 1,000 s: 0.1-s increments

1,000 s or over: 1-s increments

Less than 100 s: 0.01-s increments

100 s or over: 0.1-s increments

Setting the Acceleration/Deceleration Time (n019 through n022)

·Two acceleration times and two deceleration times can be set.

·The acceleration time is the time required to go from 0% to 100% of the maximum frequency and the deceleration time is the time required to go from 100% to 0% of the maximum frequency. The actual acceleration or deceleration time is obtained from the following formula.

Acceleration/Deceleration time = (Acceleration/Deceleration time set value)

´ (Frequency reference value) ¸ (Max. frequency)

Acceleration time 2 and deceleration time 2 are enabled by setting 11 for acceleration/ deceleration time selection in any of the n050 through n056 parameters for multi-function input.

Deceleration time 2 is also enabled by emergency-stop settings 19, 20, 21, and 22 in any of the parameters for parameters n050 through n056 for multi-function input with n005 for interruption mode selection set to 0 (i.e., deceleration stop).

5-27

Basic Operation

Chapter 5

n019

Acceleration Time 1

Setting range

0.0 to 6,000 (s) (see note 1) n020

Deceleration Time 1

Setting range

0.0 to 6,000 (s) (see note 1) n021

Acceleration Time 2

Setting range

0.0 to 6,000 (s) (see note 1)

Register 0113

Hex

Unit of setting

0.1 s

(see note 1)

Register 0114

Hex

Unit of setting

0.1 s

(see note 1)

Register 0115

Hex

Unit of setting

0.1 s

(see note 1)

Changes during operation

Yes

Default setting

10.0

Changes during operation

Yes

Default setting

10.0

Changes during operation

Yes

Default setting

10.0

n022

Deceleration Time 2

Setting range

0.0 to 6,000 (s) (see note 1)

Register 0116

Hex

Unit of setting

0.1 s

(see note 1)

Changes during operation

Yes

Default setting

10.0

Note 1. The setting unit of acceleration or deceleration time is determined by the set value in n018 (acceleration/deceleration time unit).

n018 set to 0: Setting range from 0.0 to 6,000 (0.0 through 999.9 s or 1,000 through 6,000 s) n018 set to 1: Setting range from 0.00 to 600.0 (0.0 through 99.99 s or 100.0

through 600.0 s)

Note 2. When n018 is set to 1, the default value of acceleration or deceleration time will be set to 10.00.

S-shape Acceleration/Deceleration Characteristic (n023)

·Trapezoidal and S-shape acceleration and deceleration are available. Using the

S-shape characteristic function for acceleration and deceleration can reduce shock to the machinery when stopping or starting.

·Any one of three S-shape acceleration/deceleration times (0.2, 0.5, and 1.0 s) is selectable.

n023

S-shape Acceleration/

Deceleration Characteristic

Setting range

0 to 3

Register 0117

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

5-28

Basic Operation

Chapter 5

Set Values

Value

Description

No S-shape acceleration/deceleration characteristic (Trapezoidal acceleration/deceleration)

S-shape acceleration/deceleration characteristic time is 0.2 s

S-shape acceleration/deceleration characteristic time is 0.5 s

S-shape acceleration/deceleration characteristic time is 1.0 s

Note When the S-shape acceleration/deceleration characteristic time is set, the acceleration and deceleration times will be lengthened according to the S-shape at the beginning and end of acceleration/deceleration.

5-29

Basic Operation

5-8 Selecting the Reverse Rotation-prohibit

Chapter 5

This parameter is used to specify whether to enable or disable the reverse rotation command sent to the Inverter from the control circuit terminals or

Digital Operator.

The parameter should be set to “not accept” when the Inverter is applied to systems that prohibit the reverse rotation of the Inverter.

Selecting the Reverse Rotation-prohibit (n006)

n006

Reverse Rotation-prohibit

Selection

Setting range

0, 1

Register 0106

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

Set Values

Value

Not accept

Description

5-30

Basic Operation

5-9 Selecting the Stopping Mode

Chapter 5

This parameter is used to specify the stopping mode when the STOP command is input.

The Inverter either decelerates or coasts to a stop according to the stopping mode selection.

Selecting the Stopping Mode (n005)

n005

Stopping Mode Selection

Setting range

0, 1

Register 0105

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

Set Values

Value

Description

Frequency deceleration stop (see note)

Free running

Note The Inverter will decelerate to stop according to the setting in n020 for deceleration time 1 if any of the n050 through n056 parameters for multi-function input is not set to 11 for acceleration/deceleration time selection. If any one of the n050 through n056 multi-function input parameters is set to acceleration/deceleration time selection, the Inverter will decelerate to stop according to the selected setting of deceleration time when the STOP command is input.

5-31

Basic Operation

5-10 Multi-function I/O

Chapter 5

5-10-1 Multi-function Input

The 3G3MV incorporates seven multi-function input terminals (S1 through

S7). Inputs into these terminals have a variety of functions according to the application.

Multi-function digital Input (n050 through n056)

n050 Multi-function digital Input 1 (S1) Register 0132

Hex

Setting range

1 to 25 (for 26, see note)

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

1 n051 Multi-function digital Input 2 (S2) Register 0133

Hex

Setting range

1 to 25 (for 26, see note)

Unit of setting

1 n052 Multi-function digital Input 3 (S3) Register 0134

Hex

Setting range

0 to 25 (for 26, see note)

Unit of setting

1 n053

Multi-function digital Input 4 (S4) Register 0135

Hex

Setting range

1 to 25 (for 26, see note)

Unit of setting

1 n054

Multi-function digital Input 5 (S5) Register 0136

Hex

Setting range

1 to 25 (for 26, see note)

Unit of setting

1 n055

Multi-function digital Input 6 (S6) Register 0137

Hex

Setting range

1 to 25 (for 26, see note)

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

7 n056

Multi-function digital Input 7 (S7) Register 0138

Hex

Setting range

1 to 25, 34, and 35

(for 26, see note)

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

Note Set value 26 is available for 5.5kW and 7.5kW Inverters only.

5-32

Basic Operation

Chapter 5

Set Values

Value

Function

Forward/Reverse rotation command

Description

3-wire sequence (to be set in n052 only)

By setting n052 to 0, the set values in n050 and n051 are ignored and the following settings are forcibly made.

S1: RUN input (RUN when ON)

S2: STOP input (STOP when OFF)

S3: Forward/Reverse rotation command

(OFF: Forward; ON: Reverse)

Forward/Stop Forward rotation command in 2-wire sequence

Reverse/Stop Reverse rotation command (2-wire sequence)

External fault (NO) ON: External fault (EFj detection: j is a terminal number)

External fault (NC) OFF: External fault (EFj detection: j is a terminal number)

Fault reset

Multi-step speed reference 1

Multi-step speed reference 2

Multi-step speed reference 3

Multi-step speed reference 4

Inching frequency command

ON: Fault reset (disabled while RUN command is input)

Signals to select frequency references 2 through 16.

Note Refer to 5-6-4 Setting the Frequency References

through Key Sequences for the relationship and frequency references 1 through 16.

as turned-OFF input.

Acceleration/Deceleration time selection

External base block command (NO)

External base block command (NC)

Search command

(Searching starts from maximum frequency)

Search command

(Searching starts from preset frequency)

ON: Inching frequency command (taking preference over the multi-step speed reference)

ON: Acceleration time 2 and deceleration time 2 are selected.

ON: Output turned OFF (while motor coasting to a stop and “bb” flashing)

OFF: Output turned OFF (with motor free running and

“bb” flashing)

ON: Speed search (Searching starts from n011)

ON: Speed search

5-33

Basic Operation

Chapter 5

Value

26 (See note.) reset hold

Function

Acceleration/Deceleration-prohibit command

Local or remote selection

Communications/Remote selection

Emergency stop fault

(NO)

Emergency stop alarm (NC)

Emergency stop fault

(NO)

Emergency stop alarm (NC)

PID control cancel

PID control integral

Inverter overheating warning oH3

ON: Acceleration/Deceleration is on hold (running at parameter frequency)

Description

ON: Local mode (operated with the Digital Operator)

Note After this setting is made, mode selection with the

Digital Operator is not possible.

ON: RS422/485 Communications input is enabled.

Communications RUN command (0001 Hex) is enabled together with frequency reference (0002 Hex).

The Inverter stops according to the setting in n005 for interruption mode selection with the emergency stop input turned ON.

n005 set to 0: Decelerates to stop at deceleration time

2 set in n022. n005 set to 1: Coasts to a stop.

Note NO: Emergency stop with the digital input closed.

NC: Emergency stop with the digital input opened.

Note Fault: Fault output is ON and reset with RESET input.

Alarm: Alarm output is ON and automatically restored when emergency stop input is cleared (no reset required).

Note “STP” is displayed (lit with fault input ON and flashes with alarm input ON)

ON: PID control is disabled.

PID control set is disabled and the Inverter is in normal operation according to the n003 and n004 settings.

ON: Integral value is reset (cleared).

The integral value as a result of PID operation is cleared when the Inverter is in PID control. The input status of the Inverter continues with the integral function disabled.

ON: Integral value is kept on hold (fixed).

The integral value as a result of PID operation is kept on hold with only the integral operation function disabled when the Inverter is in PID control.

ON: oH3 display (at the Operator); Inverter overheating warning output ON (multi-function output).

Operation continues during input. When the input turns

OFF, the Operator display and multi-function output are cleared.

Use for functions such as displaying the status of external thermal relays.

Note

Set value 26 is available for 5.5- and 7.5-kW Inverters only

5-34

Basic Operation

Chapter 5

Value

Function

Up or down command

Description

Up or down command (set in n056 only)

By setting n056 to 34, the set value in n055 is ignored and the following settings are forcibly made.

S6: Up command S7: Down command

Acceleration Deceleration Hold Hold

S6 terminal

(Up command)

S7 terminal

(Down command)

OFF

Note It is impossible to set the up or down command and multi-step speed references 1 through 4 together.

Note To keep the frequency reference that has been adjusted with the Up or Down command after the

Inverter is turned OFF, set n100 (Up/Down frequency memory) to 1.

Self-diagnostic test ON: RS-422/485 communications self-diagnostic test

(set in n056 only)

The communications function is tested by connecting the transmission and reception terminals together and checking that the data received is the same as the transmission data.

Operation in 2-wire Sequence (Set Value: 1, 2)

·The Inverter operates in 2-wire sequence by setting a multi-function input selection to

1 (forward/reverse) or 2 (reverse/stop).

·The following diagram shows a wiring example of the terminals in 2-wire sequence.

Forward-rotation switch

Reverse-rotation switch

Forward/Stop

(Forward rotation with the forward-rotation switch closed)

Reverse/Stop

(Reverse rotation with the reverse-rotation switch closed)

Sequence input common j

: 1 to 7

Operation in 3-wire Sequence (n052 = 0)

·The Inverter operates in 3-wire sequence by setting n052 for multi-function digital input

3 to 0.

·Only n052 can be set to 0 (3-wire sequence). By making this setting, the set values in n050 and n051 are ignored and the following settings are forcibly made.

5-35

Basic Operation

Chapter 5

S1: RUN input (RUN when ON)

S2: STOP input (STOP when OFF)

S3: Forward/Reverse rotation command (OFF: Forward; ON: Reverse)

·The following diagram shows a wiring example of the terminals in 3-wire sequence.

Stop switch

(NC)

RUN switch

(NO)

Direction switch

RUN input (Operates with the RUN switch closed)

Stop input (Stops with the stop switch opened)

Forward/Reverse rotation command (forward with the direction switched opened)

Sequence input common

External Base Block Command (Set Value: 12, 13)

When an SPST-NO (set value: 12) or SPST-NC (set value: 13) input is received, Inverter outputs are shut OFF. Use these inputs in the following cases to stop Inverter outputs.

For switching the motor to free running status when applying an external brake.

For stopping Inverter outputs before disconnecting motor wiring when changing the motor from an Inverter to a commercial power supply.

Note

The external base block only shuts Off the Inverter’s output frequency, and the Inverter’s internal frequency continues to be calculated as usual. Therefore, if the external base block is cleared when the frequency is not zero, the frequency calculated at that point will be output. Because of this, if the baseblock is cleared during deceleration while the motor is free running, a large discrepancy between the motor speed at that moment and the

Inverter output frequency may result in a main circuit overvoltage (OV) or overcurrent

(OC).

5-36

Basic Operation

Chapter 5

Speed Search (Set Value: 14, 15)

The speed search function is provided for smooth restarting without stopping a free running motor. Use it when switching the motor from a commercial power supply operation to Inverter operation, when starting with the Inverter a motor turned by external force, and so on.

The speed search function searches for the present motor speed, from high frequency to low. When the motor’s rotation speed is detected, it is accelerated from that frequency to the frequency reference according to the acceleration/deceleration time setting.

Forward (reverse) RUN command

Speed search command

0.5 s min.

High-speed frequency or set frequency (frequency reference) n101: Deceleration time n102: Speed search operating level

Minimum base block time (0.5 s) Speed search operation

Note

For 5.5- and 7.5-kW Inverters only, the speed search function can be adjusted by setting parameters n101 (speed search deceleration time) and n102 (speed search operating level). If the speed search cannot be executed properly using the default setting, lengthen the deceleration time or lower the operating level. To reduce the speed search time, check with the application while either shortening the deceleration time or raising the operating level.

n101

Speed Search Deceleration

Time

Setting range

0.0 to 10.0

Register 0165

Hex

Unit of setting

0.1 s

Changes during operation

Default setting

2.0

n102

Speed Search Operating

Level

Setting range

0 to 200

Register 0166

Hex

Unit of setting

1 %

Changes during operation

Default setting

150

5-37

Basic Operation

Chapter 5

For n101, set the origin search deceleration time to the time required to go from 100% to 0% of the maximum frequency.

If 0 is set for the origin search deceleration time, operation will be carried out at the default setting of 2.0 seconds.

For n102, set the operating level as a percentage, with the Inverter’s rated input taken as 100%. If the Inverter’s output current drops below the level of the Inverter’s output current, the speed search will be completed and acceleration will be resumed.

5-10-2 Multi-function digital Output

The 3G3MV incorporates three multi-function digital output terminals: one multi-function contact outputs (MA-MC) and two multi-function photocoupler outputs (P1 and P2).

Output from these terminals has a variety of functions according to the application.

Selecting the Multi-function digital Output (n050 through n056)

n057

Multi-function digital Output 1

(MA/MB and MC)

Setting range

1 to 7, 10 to 21 (see note)

Register 0139

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

0 n058

Multi-function digital Output 2

(P1 and PC)

Setting range

1 to 7, 10 to 21 (see note)

Register 013A

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

1 n059

Multi-function digital Output 3

(P2 and PC)

Setting range

1 to 7, 10 to 21 (see note)

Register 013B

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

Note

Set values 20 and 21 are available for 5.5- and 7.5-kW Inverters only.

Set Values

Value

Function

Fault output

Description

ON: Fault output (with protective function working)

Operation in progress ON: Operation in progress (with RUN command input or inverter output)

Frequency detection ON: Frequency detection (with frequency reference coinciding with output frequency)

5-38

Basic Operation

Chapter 5

Value

Function

Zero-speed

Description

ON: Idling (at less than min. output frequency)

Frequency detection 1 ON: Output frequency frequency detection level

(n095)

Frequency detection 2 ON: Output frequency frequency detection level

(n095)

Overtorque being monitored

(NO-contact output)

Output if any of the following parameter conditions is satisfied.

· Overtorque detection function selection 1 (n096)

Overtorque being monitored

(NC-contact output)

· Overtorque detection function selection 2 (n097)

· Overtorque detection level (n098)

· Overtorque detection time (n099)

Note NO contact: ON with overtorque being detected;

NC contact: OFF with overtorque being detected

Closed if undertorque is detected Undertorque detection

(NO)

Undertorque detection

(NC)

Alarm output

Open if undertorque is detected

Base block in progress

RUN mode

Inverter ready

Fault retry

UV in progress

Rotating in reverse direction

Speed search in progress

Communications output

PID feedback loss

ON: Alarm being detected (Nonfatal error being detected)

ON: Base block in progress (in operation with power output turned OFF)

ON: Local mode (with the Digital Operator)

ON: Inverter ready to operate (with no fault detected)

ON: Fault retry (Inverter resetting with fault retry (n082) not set to 0)

ON: Undervoltage being monitored (main circuit undervoltage UV1 detected)

ON: Rotating in reverse direction

ON: Speed search in progress

ON: Communications output (turns ON/OFF according to 0009 Hex set from communications. Communications setting = ON)

ON: PID feedback being lost (set detection method in n136, n137, n138)

Closed if frequency reference is missing.

Frequency reference is missing

Inverter overheating pre-alarm OH3

Closed if inverter overheating pre-alarm is input. Digital operator display is “OH3” (blinking)

5-39

Basic Operation

Chapter 5

Note 1.

Use “during RUN” (set value: 1) or “zero speed“ (set value: 3) for the timing for stopping the motor using a brake. To specify a precise stop timing, set “frequency detection 1” (set value: 4) or “frequency detection 2” (set value: 5), and set the frequency detection level (n095).

Note 2.

Set values 20 (frequency reference loss) and 21 (Inverter overheating warning oH3) are available for 5.5- and 7.5-kW Inverters only.

5-40

Basic Operation

Chapter 5

5-11 Multi-function Analog Output and Pulse Monitor

Output

The 3G3MV Inverter incorporates a multi-function analog output terminal

(AM-AC). A parameter setting makes it possible to output pulse monitor signals from these terminals. Make the necessary settings in these terminals according to the application.

5-11-1 Setting the Multi-function Analog Output (n065 through n067)

·By setting n065 for multi-function analog output type selection to 0 for analog voltage output, analog monitoring is possible through the multi-function analog output terminal.

·A monitoring item is set in n066 (multi-function analog output selection). Six items including the output frequency and current are available.

·Set the analog output characteristics in n067 (multi-function analog output gain).

n065

Multi-function Analog Output

Type Selection

Setting range

0, 1

Register 0141

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

Set Values

Value

Description

Analog voltage output (with monitoring item set in n066)

Pulse train output (according to output frequency set in n150) n066

Multi-function Analog Output

Setting range

0 to 5

Register 0142

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

Set Values

Value

Description

Output frequency (Reference: 10-V output at max. frequency)

Output current (Reference: 10-V output at rated inverter output current)

Main circuit DC voltage (Reference: 10-V output at 400 VDC for 200-V models and 800 VDC for 400-V models)

Vector operation torque monitor (Reference: 10-V output at rated motor torque)

5-41

Basic Operation

Chapter 5

Value

Description

Output power (Reference: 10-V output at power equivalent to max. applicable motor capacity and 0-V output during regenerative operation).

Output voltage (Reference: 10-V output at 200 VAC for 200-V models and

400 VAC for 400-V models)

Note Output power cannot be monitored in vector control mode n067

Multi-function Analog Output Gain

Setting range

0.00 to 2.00

Register 0143

Hex

Unit of setting

0.01

Changes during operation

Yes

Default setting

1.00

Note 1. Refer to the above information on the set values in n066 and set the multiplication rate based on the reference value. For example, if 5-V output is desired at maximum output frequency (with n066 set to 0), set n067 to 0.50.

Note 2. The multi-function analog output terminals (AM and AC) have a maximum output of 10 V.

5-11-2 Setting the Pulse Monitor Output (n065 and n150)

·By setting n065 for multi-function analog output type selection to 1 for pulse train output, monitoring pulse output frequency signals is possible through the multi-function analog output terminals.

·The relationship between the output frequency and pulse train output frequency is set in n150 for multi-function analog output, pulse train frequency selection.

n065

Multi-function Analog Output Type Selection

Setting range

0, 1

Register 0141

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

Set Values

Value

Description

Analog voltage output (with monitoring item set in n066)

Pulse train output (according to output frequency set in n150) n150

Multi-function Analog

Output, Pulse Train

Frequency Selection

Setting range

0, 1, 6, 12, 24, and 36

Register 0197

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

5-42

Basic Operation

Chapter 5

Set Values

Value

Description

1440 Hz at max. frequency (A proportional relationship is applied to frequencies less than the maximum frequency)

1x output frequency

6x output frequency

12x output frequency

24x output frequency

36x output frequency

Note The pulse train voltage is 10 V at high level and 0 V at low level at a duty rate of

50%.

Please, also refer to page 2-16.

5-43

Chapter 6 Advanced Operation

6-1 Precise Vector Control Settings and

Adjustments

6-2 Energy-saving Control

6-3 PID Control

6-4 Setting the Carrier Frequency

6-5 DC Injection Braking Function

6-6 Stall Prevention Function

6-7 Overtorque Detection Function

6-8 Torque Compensation Function

6-9 Slip Compensation Function

6-10 Other Functions

Advanced Operation

Chapter 6

This chapter provides information on the use of advanced functions of the

Inverter for operation.

Refer to this chapter to use the various advanced functions, such as precise vector control setting, energy-saving control, PID control, carrier frequency setting, DC injection braking, stall prevention, overtorque detection, torque compensation, and slip compensation.

6-1 Precise Vector Control Settings and Adjustments

6-1-1 Precise Vector Control Settings

·In addition to the settings described in 5-2 Operation in Vector Control, check the motor test report and precise motor constants and make the following settings in order to make full use of the Inverter in vector control.

Setting the Motor Phase to neutral Resistance (n107)

·Set this parameter to 1/2 of the phase-to-phase resistance of the motor, or phase to neutral resistance at 50°C.

·Obtain from the manufacturer of each motor the test report of the motor or equivalent datasheet including precise specifications of the motor. Use the the applicable formula from those listed in the following and calculate the phase to neutral resistance at 50°C from the insulation class and phase-to-phase resistance of the motor described in the test report.

Insulation class E: Phase-to-phase resistance at 75°C (W) x 0.92 x 1/2

Insulation class B: Phase-to-phase resistance at 75°C (W) x 0.92 x 1/2

Insulation class F: Phase-to-phase resistance at 115°C (W) x 0.87 x 1/2 n107

Motor Phase to neutral

Resistance

Setting range

0.000 to 65.50 (W)

Register 016B

Hex

Unit of setting

See note

Changes during operation

Default setting

See note 2

Note 1. The value will be set in 0.001-W increments if the resistance is less than 10 W and 0.01-W increments if the resistance is 10 W or over.

Note 2. The default setting for this parameter is the standard phase to neutral resistance of the maximum applicable motor.

Setting the Motor Leakage Inductance (n108)

·Set the motor leakage inductance in 1-mH increments.

·Motor leakage inductance is a magnetic field that is leaking externally or consumed as core loss, and is not used for torque generation.

6-2

Advanced Operation

Chapter 6

·To insert an AC reactor for surge suppression into the output side of the Inverter, set this parameter to the motor leakage inductance added with the inductance of the AC reactor.

·The Inverter fully functions in vector control with the default setting for motor leakage inductance. Therefore, set this parameter only if the motor leakage inductance is known.

n108

Motor Leakage Inductance

Register 016C

Hex

Setting range

0.000 to 655.0 (mH)

Unit of setting

See note

Changes during operation

Default setting

See note 2

Note 1. The value will be set in 0.01-mH increments if the inductance is less than

100 mH and 0.1-mH increments if the inductance is 100 mH or over.

Note 2. The default setting for this parameter is the standard leakage inductance of the maximum applicable motor.

6-1-2 Adjusting Output Torque in Vector Control

·The Inverter controls the output torque of the motor according to the required load torque in vector control. Normally, no special adjustments are required. Adjust the output torque if the maximum torque of the motor is unavailable or improvements are required in the output torque and response in a low-speed range.

Adjusting the Torque Compensation Limit (n109)

·Adjust the set value in n109 (torque compensation limit) if the maximum torque of the motor is insufficient or to limit the output torque to a certain degree while the motor is driven by the Inverter in vector control.

·Set the torque compensation limit in percentage based on the rated output current of the Inverter as 100%.

Compensating Torque Insufficiency

·Set n109 to a larger value if the maximum torque of the motor is insufficient.

·Set the value in 5% increments while checking the operation of the Inverter and motor.

·Check that no overload (OL1 or OL2) is detected. If an overload is detected, decrease the set values or consider the use of an Inverter model or motor with a higher capacity.

Limiting Output Torque

·Set n109 to a smaller value if the fluctuation of the output torque is large and heavy shock is imposed on the load, or excessive output torque is not required.

·Set the value according to the condition of the load.

6-3

Advanced Operation

Chapter 6

n109 Torque Compensation Limit Register 016D

Hex

Setting range

0 to 250 (%)

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

150

Note 1. The Inverter in torque compensation control limits the torque at a current 1.5

times larger than the set value.

Note 2. This parameter is enabled only when the Inverter is in vector control.

Adjusting the Torque and Response through the V/f Pattern

(n011 through n017)

·The Inverter in vector control uses the V/f pattern as the reference value of the output voltage. Therefore, by adjusting the V/f pattern the output torque and response are adjusted.

·If the application requires high torque, adjust the V/f pattern so that the output voltage at the required frequency will be high. Furthermore, energy-saving effects can be expected by decreasing the output voltage values in the frequency ranges where high torque is not required.

n011

Maximum Frequency

(FMAX)

Setting range

50.0 to 400.0 (Hz)

Register 010B

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

0.1 Hz

Default setting

60.0

n012

Setting range

Maximum Voltage (VMAX)

Register 010C

Hex

0.1 to 255.0 (0.1 to 510.0) (V) Unit of

setting

0.1 V

Changes during operation

Default setting

200.0

(400.0) n013

Maximum Voltage

Frequency (FA)

Setting range

0.2 to 400.0 (Hz)

Register 010D

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

0.1 Hz

Default setting

60.0

n014

Middle Output Frequency

(FB)

Setting range

0.1 to 399.9 (Hz)

Register 010E

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

0.1 Hz

Default setting

1.5

n015

Setting range

Middle Output Frequency

Voltage (VC)

Register 010F

Hex

0.1 to 255.0 (0.1 to 510.0) (V) Unit of

setting

0.1 V

Changes during operation

Default setting

11.0

(22.0)

6-4

Advanced Operation

Chapter 6

n016

Minimum Output Frequency

(FMIN)

Setting range

0.1 to 10.0 (Hz)

Register 0110

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

0.1 Hz

Default setting

1.5

n017

Setting range

Minimum Output Frequency

Voltage (VMIN)

0.1 to 50.0 (0.1 to 100.0) (V)

Register 0111 Hex Changes during

operation

Unit of setting

0.1 V

Default setting

4.3

(8.6)

Note Figures in brackets are for 400-V Inverter models.

Output voltage (V)

Note

1. Set the parameters so that the following condition will be satisfied.

n016 n014 < n013 n011

Note

2. The value set in n015 will be ignored if parameters n016 and n014 are the same in value.

Frequency (Hz)

6-5

Advanced Operation

6-2 Energy-saving Control

Chapter 6

The energy-saving control function automatically saves unnecessary power that is uselessly consumed while the load is light.

The Inverter in energy-saving control estimates the capacity of the load from the motor current and controls the output voltage of the Inverter when the load is light so that only the power required is provided to the motor.

Energy saving control is suitable for loads with little fluctuation. It is not suitable for control where responses of less than 50ms are required.

The longer the operation time of the Inverter in energy-saving control of a light load is, the more energy is saved. If the load exceeds 70% of the rated motor torque, only some energy may be saved.

This control is available to general-purpose Inverters and Inverter-dedicated motors but not applicable to special motors such as spindle motors or underwater motors.

Energy-saving control is possible in V/f control mode only and does not operate in vector control mode.

The following description provides details of the operation and adjustment of the Inverter in energy-saving control.

6-2-1 Energy-saving Control Operation

·The Inverter operates in energy-saving control as described below.

Acceleration

The Inverter accelerates normally and is not in energy-saving control.

Constant Speed

1. When the Inverter reaches the reference frequency, the Inverter operates in energysaving control.

2. An ideal output voltage is calculated from the internal status of the Inverter and energy-saving control coefficient K2 in n140.

3. The Inverter changes the output voltage to the calculated voltage.

4. The Inverter goes into probe operation to find the point where output power is at the minimum.

Probe operation: A control method to find the point where the power is at the minimum while changing the voltage according to the probe operation control voltage step set in n145 and n146.

6-6

Advanced Operation

Deceleration

The Inverter decelerates normally and is not in energy-saving control.

Chapter 6

Power consumption

Load rate: 100%

As shown in the graph, the voltage to operate the motor most efficiently varies with the motor load condition.

The Inverter in energy-saving control adjusts the output voltage by using the ideal calculated value so that the actual output power will be minimum.

Load rate: 50%

Motor voltage

6-2-2 Performing Energy-saving Settings

n139

Energy-saving Control

Selection

Setting range

0, 1

Register 018B

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

Set Values

Value

Energy-saving control disabled

Energy-saving control enabled

Description

Note 1. Set n139 to 1 to enable energy-saving control.

Note 2. Energy-saving control is enabled within a frequency range from 15 to 120 Hz and disabled if the frequency exceeds 120 Hz.

n158

Motor Code

Setting range

0 to 70

Register 019E

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

See note

Note The default setting varies with the capacity of the Inverter model.

Set Values

·The motor code is used for automatically setting the energy-saving constant in n140.

·By setting the motor code, the value in n140 (energy-saving control coefficient K2) will change automatically. To adjust energy-saving control coefficient K2, set the motor code in advance.

6-7

Advanced Operation

Chapter 6

·Select the motor code from the following table based on the power supply voltage of the Inverter and the capacity of the motor.

Motor code Power supply voltage Motor capacity

0.1 kW

0.2 kW

0.4 kW

0.75 kW

1.5 kW

2.2 kW

3.0 kW

4.0 kW

5.5 kW

7.5 kW

0.2 kW

0.4 kW

0.75 kW

1.5 kW

2.2 kW

3.0 kW

4.0 kW

5.5 kW

7.5 kW

156.8

122.9

94.8

72.7

713.8

576.4

447.4

Energy-saving control coefficient K2

(n140)

481.7

356.9

288.2

223.7

169.4

338.8

313.6

245.8

189.5

145.4

n140

Energy-saving Control

Coefficient K2

Setting range

0.0 to 6,550

Register 018C

Hex

Unit of setting

0.1

Changes during operation

Default setting

See note 1

Note 1. The default setting varies with the capacity of the Inverter model.

Note 2. The constant automatically changes according to the motor code in n158. For the fine-tuning of this parameter, set the motor code in advance.

Set Values

·When the output frequency is constant for a certain period while the Inverter is in effective energy-saving control, the Inverter is set to the primary level of energy-saving control by this parameter.

·Motor constants vary with the motor manufacturer. Therefore, the fine-tuning of the parameter is required to find the ideal value. Fine-tune the parameter while the Inverter is operating at constant frequency so that the output power will be minimum.

6-8

Advanced Operation

n143

Power Averaging Time

Setting range

1 to 200

Chapter 6

Register 018F

Hex

Unit of setting

(24 ms)

Changes during operation

Default setting

Set Values

·Set n143 to the time required to calculate the average of power used in energy-saving control.

Power averaging time (ms) = Set value in n143 x 24 (ms)

·Normally, the default setting does not need to be changed.

·The Inverter averages the power for the set time for energy-saving control.

·The value set in n143 is used for probe operation. The Inverter in probe operation changes the voltage at intervals set in this parameter.

·Increase the set value if the power fluctuates frequently and the Inverter cannot perform stable energy control.

n141

Energy-saving Voltage

Lower Limit at 60-Hz Output

Setting range

0 to 120 (%)

Register 018D

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

50 n142

Energy-saving Voltage

Upper Limit at 6-Hz Output

Setting range

0 to 25 (%)

Register 018E

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

Set Values

Inverter from dropping excessively so that the motor will not stall or stop at that time.

·Set the lower limit of output voltage in percentage at each frequency based on the rated motor voltage as 100%.

6-9

Advanced Operation

Chapter 6

·Normally, the default settings do not need to be changed. If the motor stalls or stops because the internal constants of the motor are special, increase the set values by approximately 5% to 10%.

Output voltage lower limit (%)

Output frequency (Hz) n159

Energy-saving Voltage

Upper Limit at 60-Hz Output

Setting range

0 to 120 (%)

Register 019F

Hex

Unit of setting

1% n160

Energy-saving Lower Limit

Voltage at 6-Hz Output

Setting range

0 to 25 (%)

Register 01A0

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

120

Changes during operation

Default setting

Set Values

·These parameters prevent the motor from over excitation due to voltage changes during energy-saving control.

·Set the upper limit of output voltage in percentage at each frequency based on the rated motor voltage as 100%.

·Normally, the default settings do not need to be changed.

Output voltage upper limit (%) n144

Probe Operation Voltage

Limit

Setting range

0 to 100 (%)

6-10

Output frequency (Hz)

Register 0190

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

Advanced Operation

Chapter 6

Set Values

·When the output frequency is constant for a certain period while the Inverter is in effective energy-saving control, the Inverter will be set to the primary level of energy-saving control by n140 (energy-saving constant K2). Then the Inverter will be set to the secondary level (i.e., probe operation) for more efficient, energy-saving control. Set the control voltage range of the Inverter in probe operation in parameter n144.

·Set the upper limit of probe operation voltage in percentage based on the rated motor voltage as 100%. Normally set the value to approximately 10%.

·No probe operation will be available if the value is set to 0.

n145

Probe Operation Control

Voltage Step at 100%

Setting range

0.1 to 10.0 (%)

Register 0191

Hex

Unit of setting

0.1%

Changes during operation

Default setting

0.5

n146

Probe Operation Control

Voltage Step at 5%

Setting range

0.1 to 10.0 (%)

Register 0192

Hex

Unit of setting

0.1%

Changes during operation

Default setting

0.2

Set Values

·Set the range of probe operation voltage in percentage based on the rated motor voltage as 100%.

·Normally, the default setting does not need to be changed.

·If the fluctuation of speed in probe operation is large, decrease the set value. If the response of the Inverter in probe operation is slow, increase the set value.

Control voltage step (%)

Inverter output voltage (%) n161

Power Detection Width for

Probe Operation Switching

Setting range

0 to 100 (%)

Register 01A1

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

Set Values

·Set this parameter to the detection width of power that sets the Inverter to probe operation. When the fluctuation of power is within the detection width, the Inverter will be in probe operation.

6-11

Advanced Operation

Chapter 6

·Set the width in percentage based on the power to be detected as 100%.

·Normally, the default setting does not need to be changed.

·The Inverter will operate with a power detection width of 10% if the value is set to 0.

n162

Power Detection Filter

Constant

Setting range

0 to 255

Register 01A2

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

1 (4 ms) Default setting 5

Set Values

·Set this parameter to the filter time constant of the power detection block of the Inverter operating in probe operation.

Filter time constant (ms) = Set value in n162 x 4 (ms)

·Normally, the default setting does not need to be changed.

·The Inverter will operate with a time constant of 20 ms if the value is set to 0.

6-12

Advanced Operation

6-3 PID Control

Chapter 6

Detected values of the Inverter in proportional, integral, and derivative

(PID) control are fed back so that the values will coincide with preset target values.

Proportional control, integral control, and derivative control in combination are available to machinery systems involving redundancy time in control operation. The PID control function of the 3G3MV Inverter is not suitable to the control of systems that require a response of 50 ms or quicker, however.

The following description provides the applications and operation of PID control together with required parameter settings and adjustments.

6-3-1 PID Control Applications

·The following table provides application examples of the Inverter in PID control.

Application Control Sensor used

(example)

Tacho generator Speed control The speed data of the machinery system is fed back so that the operating speed of the machinery system will coincide with the target value.

The speed data of another machinery system is input as a target value and the actual operating speed of the machinery is fed back for synchronous control.

Pressure control

Flow rate control

Data on pressure is fed back for constant pressure control.

Data on the flow rate of liquid is fed back for precise flow control.

Temperature control Data on temperature is fed back for temperature control using fan operation.

Pressure sensor

Flow sensor

Thermocouple

Thermistor

6-13

Advanced Operation

Chapter 6

6-3-2 PID Control Operation

·To simply explain the operation of proportional control, integral control, and derivative control, the following graph is used to show that the output frequency changes while the deviation (i.e., the difference between the target value and feedback value) is constant.

Deviation

Time

Control value

Derivative

(D) control

PID control

Integral

(I) control

Proportional (P) control

Time

·Proportional (P) Control: The output is in proportion to the deviation. The deviation cannot be set to 0 with proportional control only.

·Integral (I) Control: The output is the integral value of the deviation. This control method makes the feedback value coincide with the target value effectively but cannot catch up with a rapid change in deviation.

·Derivative (D) Control: The output is the derivative value of the deviation. This control method quickly responds to a rapid change in deviation.

·PID Control: By combining the merits of the above control functions, ideal control is possible.

6-3-3 Types of PID Control

·Two types of PID control are available to the 3G3MV Inverter. Normally, feedbackvalue integral PID control is used.

6-14

Advanced Operation

Chapter 6

·Feedback-value Integral PID Control

In this control, the feedback integral value is used. The Inverter normally uses this control method. The response will be comparatively slow if the target value changes because the feedback integral value is used. The stable control of the target is, however, possible.

Target value

Target of control

Detected value (Feedback value)

·Basic PID Control

This is the basic control method. The response will be quick if the target value changes because the deviation integral value is used. If the target value changes rapidly, however, the control value of the derivative control block will be large. As a result, overshooting or undershooting may result.

Target value

Target of control

Detected value (Feedback value)

·Furthermore, 3G3MV Inverter can add the frequency reference to the operation result of the PID control block.

If the target of control is motor speed, by adding the frequency reference, motor speed control with high-speed response will be possible.

Do not add the frequency reference if the target of control is temperature or pressure.

6-15

Advanced Operation

Chapter 6

6-3-4 Block Diagram of PID Control

·The following diagram shows the PID control block of the 3G3MV Inverter.

Target value

Proportional (P) gain

Integral time (I)

Integral (I) upper limit

Multi-function input

Derivative hold input

Limit

Max. frequency: 100%

0 (zero)

Multi-function input

Derivative reset input

Derivative time (D)

Derivative hold value

PID primary delay time constant

0 (zero)

Feedback value

Feedback value adjustment gain

Limit

Derivative time (D)

PID offset adjustment

PID output gain

Limit

Max. frequency: 100%

Limit

PID control selection

Inverter output frequency

6-16

Advanced Operation

Chapter 6

6-3-5 Input Selection of PID Control Target Value and

Detection Value

·The target value and detected value (feedback value) of PID control are set according to n004 for frequency reference selection, n008 for local mode frequency reference selection, and n164 PID feedback input block selection as shown in the following diagram.

Make sure that the target value input and feedback value input do not overlap with each other. Setting details are provided from the next page onward.

Input Selection of PID Control Target Value

Local/Remote

Multi-step speed reference

FREQUENCY adjuster of the

Digital Operator

Frequency reference 1 (n024)

External terminal (0 to 10 V)

External terminal (4 to 20 mA)

External terminal (0 to 20 mA)

Pulse train input

Communications frequency reference

Multi-function analog input (0 to 10 V)

Multi-function analog input (4 to 20 mA)

Frequency reference 2 (n025)

Frequency reference 3 (n026)

Frequency reference 4 (n027)

Frequency reference 16 (n127)

Inching frequency (n032)

Target value

FREQUENCY adjuster of the

Digital Operator

Frequency reference 1 (n024)

Input Selection of PID Control Detection Value

External terminal (0 to 10 V)

External terminal (4 to 20 mA)

External terminal (0 to 20 mA)

Multi-function analog input (0 to 10 V)

Multi-function analog input (4 to 20 mA)

Pulse train input

Feedback value

6-17

Advanced Operation

Chapter 6

6-3-6 PID Control Settings

n128

PID Control Selection

Setting range

0 to 8

Register 0180

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

Set Values

PID control

Disabled

Enabled

Description

Derivative control method

Addition of frequency reference

---

Deviation integrated

Feedback value integrated

Deviation integrated

Feedback value integrated

Deviation integrated

Feedback value integrated

Deviation integrated

Feedback value integrated

---

Yes

---

Positive or negative characteristics

Positive

Negative

Note 1. Normally select feedback-value integral PID control as the derivative control method.

Note 2. Add the frequency reference if the target of control is motor speed and do not add the frequency reference if the target of control is temperature or pressure.

Note 3. Set positive or negative characteristics according to the characteristics of the detector. If the feedback value is decreased with the output frequency increased, set negative characteristics.

n129

Feedback Value Adjustment

Gain

Setting range

0.00 to 10.00

Register 0181

Hex

Unit of setting

0.01

Changes during operation

Yes

Default setting

1.00

Set Values

·Set the multiplication rate of the feedback value.

6-18

Advanced Operation

Chapter 6

·This parameter adjusts the feedback value so that the input level of the input device, such as a sensor, will coincide with the input level of the target value.

For example, if the target value of 1,000 rpm is input as 10 V and the Feedback Value

Adjustment Gain should be set to 2.

n130

Proportional (P) Gain

Setting range

0.0 to 25.0

Register 0182

Hex

Unit of setting

0.1

Changes during operation

Yes

Default setting

1.0

n131

Integral (I) Time

Setting range

0.0 to 360.0 (s) n132

Derivative (D) Time

Setting range

0.0 to 2.50 (s)

Register 0182

Hex

Unit of setting

0.1 s

Register 0182

Hex

Unit of setting

0.01 s

Changes during operation

Yes

Default setting

1.0

Changes during operation

Yes

Default setting

0.00

Set Values

·While the mechanical load is in actual operation, adjust the values so that the best response will be returned from the load. Refer to 6-3-7 PID Adjustments.

·If n130 (proportional gain) is set to 0.0, PID control will be disabled. Not only proportional control but also all PID control will be disabled.

·If n131 (integral time) is set to 0.0, integral control will be disabled.

·If n132 (derivative time) is set to 0.0, derivative control will be disabled.

n133

PID Offset Adjustment

Setting range

--100 to 100 (%)

Register 0185

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Yes

Default setting

Set Values

·This parameter is for the offset adjustment of all PID control.

·Adjust the parameter so that the output frequency of the Inverter will be 0 when the target value and feedback value are both set to 0.

n134

Integral (I) Upper Limit

Setting range

0 to 100 (%)

Register 0186

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Yes

Default setting

100

Set Values

·Set this parameter to the upper limit of integral control output.

6-19

Advanced Operation

Chapter 6

·Set the value in percentage based on the maximum frequency as 100%.

·The integral upper limit is set so that the output frequency will not be excessively high when the deviation is large.

n135

PID Primary Delay Time

Setting range

0.0 to 10.0 (s)

Register 0187

Hex

Unit of setting

0.1 s

Changes during operation

Yes

Default setting

0.0

Set Values

·Set this parameter to the primary delay time constant for the frequency reference after

PID control.

·Normally, the default setting does not need to be changed.

·If load is a mechanical one with high viscous friction or low rigidity, the load may resonate. If that happens, set a value larger than the resonant frequency of the load so that the load will not resonate, even though the response will be slower.

n136

Feedback Loss Detection

Selection

Setting range

0 to 2

Register 0188

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

Set Values

Value Description

Feedback loss detection disabled

Feedback loss detection enabled (Nonfatal error: FbL warning)

Feedback loss detection enabled (Fatal error: FbL error)

Note 1. Set the method of detecting loss of the feedback as a detected value for PID control.

Note 2. If the detection level set in n137 or lower is detected for the set time in n138, the result will be determined as feedback loss.

n137

Feedback Loss Detection

Level

Setting range

0 to 100 (%)

Register 0189

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

0 n138

Feedback Loss Detection

Time

Setting range

0.0 to 25.5 (s)

Register 018A

Hex

Unit of setting

0.1 s

Changes during operation

Default setting

1.0

Set Values

·These parameters are reference values for detecting loss of feedback for PID control.

6-20

Advanced Operation

Chapter 6

·Set n137 to the feedback level in percentage based on the feedback level at maximum frequency as 100%.

·Set n138 in 0.1-s increments for the permissible continuous period of t he feedback signal level that is the same as or less than the feedback level set in n137.

n163

PID Output Gain

Setting range

0.0 to 25.0

Register 01A3

Hex

Unit of setting

0.1

Changes during operation

Default setting

1.0

Set Values

·Set this parameter to a rate by which PID control value is multiplied for PID control.

·Normally, the default setting does not need to be changed.

·This parameter is used for the adjustment of the PID control value to be added with the frequency reference.

n164

PID Feedback Input Block

Selection

Setting range

0 to 5

Register 01A4

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

Set Values

Value

Description

Frequency reference control terminal for 0- to 10-V voltage input is enabled.

(see note 1)

Frequency reference control terminal for 4- to 20-mA current input is enabled.

(see note 2)

Frequency reference control terminal for 0- to 20-mA current input is enabled.

(see note 2)

Multi-function analog voltage (0- to 10-V) input is enabled.

Used only if two analog inputs are required in PID control.

Multi-function analog current (4- to 20-mA) input is enabled.

Used only if two analog inputs are required in PID control.

Pulse train reference control terminal is enabled. (see note 3)

Note 1. The maximum frequency (FMAX) is reached with 10-V input.

Note 2. The maximum frequency (FMAX) is reached with 20-mA input, if the SW2 on the control PCB was changed from V (voltage) to I (current).

Note 3. Set n149 for the pulse train input scale to the pulse train frequency that is equivalent to the maximum frequency (FMAX).

Note 4. Make sure that the target value input and feedback value input do not overlap with each other.

6-21

Advanced Operation

6-3-7 PID Adjustments

Chapter 6

PID Adjustments with Step Response Method

·The following describes how to adjust each parameter of PID control by monitoring the step response of the target of control.

1. Measurement of Step Response Waveform

Take the following steps to measure the step response waveform of the target of control.

a) Connect the load in the same way as the connection of the load to the Inverter in normal operation.

b) Set n128 to 0 so that the Inverter will not perform PID control.

c) Minimize the acceleration time and input the step frequency reference.

d) Measure the response waveform of the feedback.

NoteMeasure the response waveform so that the timing of the step input will be known.

2. Calculation of PID Parameters

Draw a tangent line that comes into contact with the steepest inclination point of the response waveform.

Measurement of R

Measure the gradient of the tangent line provided that the set point is 1.

Measurement of L

Measure the required time (seconds) between the origin and the point of intersection of the tangent line and time axis.

Measurement of T

Measure the required time (seconds) between the point of intersection of the tan-

6-22

Advanced Operation

Chapter 6

gent line and time axis and the point of intersection of the tangent line and set point line.

Response

Target value

Time

PID Parameter

The following PID parameters are calculated from the R, L, and T of intersection of the tangent line and set point line as general rules.

Control Proportional (P) gain

(n130)

P control 0.3/RL

PI control 0.35/RL

PID control 0.6/RL

---

1.2T

Integral (I) time

(n131)

---

Derivative (D) time

(n132)

0.5L

Note 1. Obtain PID parameter values from the above method, set the PID parameters, and tune in the PID parameter values precisely.

Note 2. PID parameter values obtained from the above method may not be optimum if the friction factor of the mechanical system is large or the rigidity of the mechanical system is low.

Manual PID Adjustments

·Perform the following procedure to adjust the PID parameter values of the Inverter performing PID control by monitoring the response waveform.

1. Connect the load in the same way as the connection of the load to the Inverter in normal operation.

2. Set n128 so that the Inverter will perform PID control.

3. Increase the proportional (P) gain in n130 within a range causing no vibration.

6-23

Advanced Operation

Chapter 6

4. Increase the integral (I) time in n131 within a range causing no vibration.

5. Increase the derivative (D) time in n132 within a range causing no vibration.

6-3-8 PID Fine Tuning

·Refer to the following to tune in PID parameters exactly.

·Suppression of Overshooting

Set the derivative (D) time to a smaller value and the integral (I) time to a larger value if overshooting results.

Response

Before fine tuning

After fine tuning

Time

·Prompt Stability

Set the integral (I) time to a smaller value and the derivative (D) time to a large value for prompt stability control, even though overshooting results.

Response

After fine tuning

Before fine tuning

Time

·Suppression of Long-cycle Vibration

Vibration with a wavelength longer than the integral (I) time results from excessive integral control. The vibration can be suppressed by setting the integral (I) time to a larger value.

Response

Before fine tuning

After fine tuning

Time

6-24

Advanced Operation

Chapter 6

·Suppression of Short-cycle Vibration

Vibration with a wavelength almost as long as the differential time results from excessive derivative (D) control. The vibration can be suppressed by setting the derivative

(D) time to a smaller value.

If the vibration cannot be suppressed after the differential time is set to 0.00, set the proportional gain to a smaller value or the PID primary delay time constant to a larger value.

Response

Before fine tuning

After fine tuning

Time

6-25

Advanced Operation

6-4 Setting the Carrier Frequency

Chapter 6

The carrier frequency of the 3G3MV can be fixed or varied in proportion to the output frequency.

n080

Carrier Frequency Selection Register 0150

Hex

Setting range

1 to 4, 7 to 9

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

(see note)

Note The default setting varies with the capacity of the Inverter model.

Set Values

Value Description

2.5 kHz

5.0 kHz

7.5 kHz

10.0 kHz

2.5 kHz (12´): 12 times as high as output frequency (from 1.0 to 2.5 kHz)

2.5 kHz (24´): 24 times as high as output frequency (from 1.0 to 2.5 kHz)

2.5 kHz (36´): 36 times as high as output frequency (from 1.0 to 2.5 kHz)

·The default setting does not need any changes in normal operation.

·Change the default setting in the following cases.

The wiring distance between the Inverter and motor is long:

Set the Inverter to a lower carrier frequency.

Reference carrier frequency: Wiring distance £ 50 m:

50 m < Wiring distance £ 100 m:

Wiring distance > 100 m:

10 kHz

5 kHz

2.5 kHz

6-26

Advanced Operation

Chapter 6

Note The carrier frequency changes as shown in the following graph with 7 through 9 set in n46.

Carrier Frequency (n080: 7 through 9)

Carrier

Frequency

Output frequency

83.3 Hz (Set value: 7)

41.6 Hz (Set value: 8)

27.7 Hz (Set value: 9)

208.3 Hz (Set value: 7)

104.1 Hz (Set value: 8)

69.4 Hz (Set value: 9)

·The Inverter cannot maintain rated output current with the carrier frequency set to a value higher than the default one.

The following table shows the default settings and the reduced rated inverter output currents resulting from a higher setting for the carrier frequency for each Inverter model.

When the carrier frequency is set to a higher value than the default setting, use the

Inverter at a current less than the reduced rated output current.

Voltage Model

3G3MV-

Default setting

Rated output current (A)

3-phase

200 V

A2001

A2002

A2004

A2007

A2015

A2022

A2040

A2055

A2075

4 (10 kHz)

0.8

1.6

3.0

5.0

3 (7.5 kHz) 8.0

3 (7.5 kHz) 11.0

3 (7.5 kHz) 17.5

3 (7.5 kHz) 25

3 (7.5 kHz) 33

Set to 3

Reduced rated output current (A)

Set to 4

Reduced rated output current (A)

7.0

10.0

16.5

6-27

Advanced Operation

Chapter 6

Voltage Model

3G3MV-

Default setting

Rated output current (A)

Single-phase

200 V

3-phase

400 V

A4004

A4007

A4015

A4022

A4030

A4040

A4055

A4075

AB001

AB002

AB004

AB007

AB015

AB022

AB040

A4002 n175

Low Carrier Frequency at

Low Speed

Setting range

0, 1

4 (10 kHz)

0.8

1.6

3.0

5.0

3 (7.5 kHz) 8.0

3 (7.5 kHz) 11.0

3 (7.5 kHz) 17.5

3 (7.5 kHz) 1.2

3 (7.5 kHz) 1.8

3 (7.5 kHz) 3.4

3 (7.5 kHz) 4.8

3 (7.5 kHz) 5.5

3 (7.5 kHz) 7.2

3 (7.5 kHz) 9.2

3 (7.5 kHz) 14.8

3 (7.5 kHz) 18

Register 01AF

Unit of setting

Hex

Note

For 5.5- and 7.5-kW Inverters, the default setting is “1” (enable).

Set to 3

Reduced rated output current (A)

Set to 4

Reduced rated output current (A)

4.0

4.8

6.3

8.1

7.0

10.0

16.5

1.0

1.6

3.0

Changes during operation

Default setting

Set Values

Value

Description

Low carrier frequency at low speed disabled.

Low carrier frequency at low speed enabled.

·Normally set n175 to 0 (except for 5.5 and 7.5kW Inverters).

·When the output frequency is 5 Hz or less and the output current rate is 110% or more, the carrier frequency will be automatically reduced to 2.5 kHz with n175 set to 1. If the load is heavy at low speed, the Inverter will withstand higher overcurrent by suppressing the heat radiation of the Inverter caused by the carrier frequency.

·This function is enabled with 2, 3, or 4 set in n080 for carrier frequency.

6-28

Advanced Operation

6-5 DC Injection Braking Function

Chapter 6

The DC injection braking function applies DC on the induction motor for braking control.

Startup DC Injection Braking:

This braking is used for stopping and starting the motor rotating by inertia with no regenerative processing.

DC Injection Braking to Stop:

Adjust the stop DC injection braking time if the motor rotating does not decelerate to a stop in normal operation due to inertia from a heavy load.

By increasing the DC injection braking time or DC injection braking current, the time required for stopping the motor is reduced.

n089

DC Injection Braking

Current

Setting range

0 to 100 (%)

Register 0159

Hex

Unit of setting

1% n090

DC Injection Braking-to-stop

Time

Setting range

0.0 to 25.5 (s)

Register 015A

Hex

Unit of setting

0.1 s

Changes during operation

Default setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

0.5

n091

Startup DC Injection Braking

Time

Setting range

0.0 to 25.5 (s)

Register 015B

Hex

Unit of setting

0.1 s

Changes during operation

Default setting

0.0

·Set the DC injection braking current as percentage based on the rated current of the

Inverter as 100%.

·After the startup DC injection braking time is set, the Inverter starts up at minimum frequency on completion of the startup DC injection braking control of the Inverter.

6-29

Advanced Operation

Chapter 6

·After the speed is reduced, the Inverter is switched to DC injection braking at minimum output frequency.

DC Injection Braking Control

Output frequency

Minimum output frequency

(n016) n091

Startup DC injection braking time

Time n090

DC injection braking-to-stop time

6-30

Advanced Operation

6-6 Stall Prevention Function

Chapter 6

A stall will occur if the motor cannot keep up with the rotating magnetic field on the motor stator side when a large load is applied to the motor or a sudden acceleration/deceleration is performed.

In the 3G3MV, stall prevention functions can be set independently for accelerating, running, and decelerating conditions.

n092

Stall Prevention during

Deceleration

Setting range

0, 1

Register 015C

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

Set Values

Value

Description

Stall prevention during deceleration

No stall prevention during deceleration

·If 1 is set, the motor will be decelerated according to the set deceleration time. If the deceleration time is too short, the main circuit may result in overvoltage.

·If 0 is set, the deceleration time will be automatically lengthened to prevent overvoltage.

·Be sure to set n092 to 1 to disable stall prevention during acceleration if the braking resistor or Braking Resistor Unit is in use. If n092 is set to 0, no deceleration time reduction will be possible because the braking resistor or Braking Resistor Unit connected is not used.

Stall Prevention during Deceleration with n092 Set to 0

Output frequency

Deceleration time is controlled to prevent overvoltage.

Time

Deceleration time (Set value)

6-31

Advanced Operation

n093

Stall Prevention Level during Acceleration

Setting range

30 to 200 (%)

Register 015D

Hex

Unit of setting

Chapter 6

Changes during operation

Set Values

170

Set Values

·This function is used to stop accelerating the load if the output current exceeds the set current value so that the Inverter will continue operating without stalling. The Inverter accelerates the load while the output current is the same as or less than the set value.

·Set the parameter as percentage based on the rated Inverter current as 100%.

·The default setting does not need any changes in normal operation.

·Decrease the set value if the capacity of the motor is smaller than that of the Inverter or the motor stalls with the default value.

The set value is normally 2 or 3 times higher than the rated current of the motor. Set this current as percentage based on the rated inverter current as 100%.

Stall Prevention during Acceleration

Output current n093 (stall prevention level during acceleration)

Time

Output frequency

The output frequency is controlled so that the Inverter will not stall.

Time n094

Stall Prevention Level during Operation

Setting range

30 to 200 (%)

Register 015E

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

160

Set Values

·This function will decrease the output frequency if the output current exceeds the set current value by a minimum of approximately 100 ms so that the Inverter will continue operating without stalling. The Inverter will increase the output frequency to return to the set frequency reference level when the output current is less than the set value.

6-32

Advanced Operation

Chapter 6

·The Inverter accelerates or decelerates the output frequency according to the preset acceleration or deceleration time set in n116 (stall prevention acceleration/deceleration time setting).

·Set the parameter as percentage based on the rated Inverter current as 100%.

·The default setting does not need any changes in normal operation.

·Decrease the set value if the capacity of the motor is smaller than that of the Inverter or the motor stalls with the default value.

The set value is normally 2 or 3 times higher than the rated current of the motor. Set this current in percentage based on the rated Inverter current as 100%.

Stall Prevention during Acceleration

Output current n094 (Stall prevention level during acceleration)

Time

Output frequency

The output frequency is controlled so that the Inverter will not stall.

Time n115

Stall Prevention Level

Automatic Suppression

Selection

Setting range

0, 1

Register 0173

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Set Values

Set Values

Value

Description

Disabled. The set value in n094 for stall prevention during operation is enabled in all the frequency range.

Enabled. The set value in n094 for stall prevention during operation is automatically decreased when the output frequency exceeds the maximum voltage frequency (n013).

6-33

Advanced Operation

Chapter 6

·If n115 is set to 1, the stall prevention level will be suppressed as shown below. When using frequencies exceeding the maximum voltage frequency, set n 115 to 1.

Automatic Suppression of Stall Prevention Level (n115 Set to 1)

Operation level

Constant output range

Operating level: n094 x

(Max. voltage frequency/output frequency)

40% of n094

Output frequency

Setting range

Time Setting

0, 1

Max. voltage frequency (FA) n116

Stall Prevention

Acceleration/Deceleration

Register 0174

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Set Values

Set Values

Value

Description

Accelerates or decelerates at acceleration/deceleration time 1 or 2 presently selected.

Accelerates or decelerates at acceleration/deceleration time 2 set in n021 and n022.

·Select the acceleration/deceleration time with the stall prevention function operating function enabled.

·To accelerate or decelerate quicker or slower than normal, set 1 in n116 and the acceleration time in n021 (acceleration time 2) and deceleration time in n022 (deceleration time 2) for stall prevention use.

6-34

Advanced Operation

6-7 Overtorque Detection Function

Chapter 6

When an excessive load is applied to the equipment, the Inverter detects the overtorque condition through an increase in the output current.

n096

Overtorque Detection

Function Selection 1

Setting range

0 to 4

Register 0160

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

Set Values

Value

Description

Inverter does not monitor overtorque.

Inverter monitors overtorque only when speed is matched. It continues operation (issues warning) even after overtorque is detected.

Inverter monitors overtorque only when speed is matched. It discontinues operation (through protective function) when overtorque is detected.

Inverter always monitors overtorque during operation. It continues operation

(issues warning) even after overtorque is detected.

Inverter always monitors overtorque during operation. It discontinues operation (through protective function) when overtorque is detected.

·Set n097 (overtorque detection function selection 2), n098 (overtorque detection level) and n099 (overtorque detection time) to enable the overtorque detection function. The

Inverter will detect overtorque when the current is the same as or higher than the detection level is output for the preset detection time.

·Set a multi-function output (n057 to n059) to either of the following so that external overtorque detection output will be ON.

Set Value: 6 for overtorque detection (NO)

Set Value: 7 for overtorque detection (NC)

Overtorque Detection

Output current

(or output torque)

See note.

n098 (Overtorque detection level)

Time

Overtorque detection (NO) n099

Overtorque detection time

Time

Note

Overtorque detection will be canceled if the output current decreases from the detection level by approximately 5% of the Inverter rated current.

6-35

Advanced Operation

n097

Overtorque Detection

Function Selection 2

Setting range

0, 1

Register 0161

Hex

Unit of setting

Chapter 6

Changes during operation

Default setting

Set Values

Value

Description

Detects overtorque from output torque.

Detects overtorque from output current.

·Set n097 to the item used for overtorque detection.

·In V/f control mode, overtorque is detected through the output current of the Inverter regardless of the set value.

n098

Overtorque Detection Level

Register 0162

Hex

Setting range

30 to 200 (%)

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

160

Set Values

·Set n098 to the type of overtorque detection level.

To detect the level through the output torque, set the torque in percentage based on the rated motor torque as 100%.

To detect the level through the output current, set the current in percentage based on the rated current of the Inverter as 100%.

n099

Overtorque Detection Time

Register 0163

Hex

Setting range

0.1 to 10.0 (s)

Unit of setting

0.1 s

Changes during operation

Default setting

0.1

Set Values

·Set the overtorque detection time.

·The Inverter will detect overtorque when the current (or torque) the same as or higher than the detection level is output for the preset detection time.

6-36

Advanced Operation

6-8 Torque Compensation Function

Chapter 6

This function increases the output torque of the Inverter by detecting an increase in the motor load.

n103

Torque Compensation Gain

Register 0167

Hex

Setting range

0.0 to 2.5

Unit of setting

0.1

Changes during operation

Yes

Default setting

1.0

Set Values

·The default setting does not need any changes in normal operation.

·Change the default setting in the following cases.

The wiring distance between the Inverter and motor is long:

Set the gain to a larger value.

The capacity of the motor is lower than the maximum applicable motor capacity of the Inverter:

Set the gain to a larger value.

The motor vibrates:

Set the gain to a smaller value.

·The torque compensation gain must be adjusted so that the output current at low speed will not exceed 50% of the rated output current of the Inverter, otherwise the

Inverter may be damaged.

n104

Torque Compensation

Primary Delay Time

Constant

Setting range

0.0 to 25.5 (s)

Register 0168

Hex

Unit of setting

0.1 s

Changes during operation

Default setting

0.3

(see note)

Note The default value is 0.2 (s) with the Inverter set to vector control mode.

Set Values

·This parameter is used for adjusting the response of torque compensation.

·Normally, the default setting does not need to be changed.

·Adjust the parameter in the following cases.

The motor vibrates: Increase the set value.

The response of the motor is slow: Decrease the set value.

6-37

Advanced Operation

Chapter 6

n105

Torque Compensation Core

Loss

Setting range

0.0 to 6,550 (W)

Register 0168

Hex

Unit of setting

0.1 W

(see note 1)

Changes during operation

Default setting

See note 2

Note 1. The value will be set in 0.1-W increments if the loss is less than 1,000 W and

1-W increments if the loss is 1,000 W or over.

Note 2. The default setting varies with the capacity of the Inverter model.

Set Values

·Set this value to the core loss of the motor in used.

·This parameter is valid in V/f control mode only.

·Normally, the default setting does not need to be changed.

·Set the value if the capacity of the motor does not coincide with the maximum applicable motor capacity of the Inverter.

6-38

Advanced Operation

6-9 Slip Compensation Function

Chapter 6

The slip compensation function calculates the motor torque according to the output current, and sets gain to compensate for output frequency.

This function is used to improve speed accuracy when operating with a load. It is mainly valid for V/f gain.

n106

Rated Motor Slip

Setting range

0.0 to 20.0 (Hz)

Register 016A

Hex

Unit of setting

0.1 Hz

Changes during operation

Default setting

Yes

(see note)

Note The default setting varies with the capacity of the Inverter model.

Set Values

·Set the rated slip value of the motor in use.

·This parameter is used as a slip compensation constant.

·Calculate the rated motor slip value from the rated frequency (Hz) and rpm on the motor nameplate by using the following formula.

Rated slit value (Hz) = Rated frequency (Hz) –

Rated rpm × Number of poles

120 n111

Slip Compensation Gain

Setting range

0.0 to 2.5

Register 016F

Hex

Unit of setting

0.1

Changes during operation

Yes

Default setting

0.0

(see note 1)

Note 1. If set to vector control mode, the default value will be 1.0.

Note 2. This parameter is disabled with the value set to 0.0.

Set Values

·Set the parameter to 1.0 first and check the operation of the Inverter. Then fine-tune the gain with 0.1-gain increments or decrements.

If the speed is lower than the target value, increase the set value.

If the speed is higher than the target value, decrease the set value.

n112

Slip Compensation Primary

Delay Time

Setting range

0.0 to 25.5 (s)

Register 0170

Hex

Unit of setting

0.1 s

Changes during operation

Default setting

2.0

(see note)

6-39

Advanced Operation

Note If set to vector control mode, the default value will be 0.2.

Chapter 6

Set Values

·This parameter is used for the response adjustment of the slip compensation function.

·The default setting does not need any changes in normal operation.

·Change the default setting in the following cases.

The motor vibrates: Set the value to a larger value.

The motor response is low: Set the value to a smaller value.

n113

Slip Compensation During

Regeneration

Setting range

0, 1

Register 0171

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

Set Values

Value

Description

Slip compensation function disabled during regeneration

Slip compensation function enabled during regeneration

·Select whether the slip compensation function is enabled or not, even during regeneration (i.e.: when regeneration energy is returning during deceleration, etc.).

·This parameter is only enabled in vector control mode. (In V/f control mode, the slip compensation function will be disabled during regeneration, regardless of the setting for this parameter.)

6-40

Advanced Operation

6-10 Other Functions

Chapter 6

The following description provides information on the other functions and parameter settings of the Inverter.

Refer to Section 7 Communications for parameters used for communications.

6-10-1 Digital Operator Disconnection Error Detection

·This parameter setting is to select whether or not to detect Digital Operator connection errors.

n010

Operation Selection at

Digital Operator Interruption

Setting range

0, 1

Register 010A

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

Set Values

Value

Description

The Digital Operator connection error is not detected (Nonfatal error)

The Digital Operator connection error is detected (Error output and the

Inverter coasts to a stop)

6-10-2 Motor Protection Functions (n037 and n038)

·This parameter setting is for motor overload detection (OL1).

n037

Motor Protection

Characteristics

Setting range

0 to 2

Register 0125

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

Set Values

Value

Description

Protection characteristics for general-purpose induction motors

Protection characteristics for Inverter-dedicated motors

No protection

·This parameter is used to set the electric thermal characteristics of the motor to be connected.

·Set the parameter according to the motor.

·If a single Inverter is connected to more than one motor, set the parameter to 2 for no protection. The parameter is also disabled by setting n036 for rated motor current to

0.0. However, this is not recommended.

6-41

Advanced Operation

n038

Motor Protection Time

Setting range

1 to 60 (min)

Register 0126

Hex

Unit of setting

1 min

Chapter 6

Changes during operation

Default setting

Set Values

·This parameter is used to set the electronic thermal protection constant of motor overload detection OL1.

·The default setting does not need any changes in normal operation.

·To set the parameter according to the characteristics of the motor, confirm the thermal time constant with the motor manufacturer and set the parameter with some margin. In other words, set the value a little shorter than the thermal time constant.

·To detect motor overloading more quickly, reduce the set value, provided that it does not cause any application problems.

6-10-3 Cooling Fan Operation Function (n039)

·This parameter is used to operate the cooling fan of the Inverter while the Inverter is turned ON or only while the Inverter is in operation.

n039

Cooling Fan Operation

Setting range

0, 1

Register 0127

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

Set Values

Value

Description

The fan rotates only while the RUN command is input and for 1 minute after the Inverter stops operating.

The fan rotates while the Inverter is turned ON.

·This parameter is available only if the Inverter incorporates a cooling fan.

·If the operation frequency of the Inverter is low, the life of the fan can be prolonged by setting the parameter to 0.

6-10-4 Momentary Power Interruption Compensation

(n081)

·The parameter specifies the processing that will be performed when a momentary power interruption occurs.

6-42

Advanced Operation

Chapter 6

n081

Momentary Power

Interruption Compensation

Setting range

0 to 2

Register 0151

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

Set Values

Value

Description

Disabled. (An undervoltage fault will be detected when there is momentary power interruption for 15 ms or more.)

The Inverter will continue operating if power is restored within 0.5 s.

(see note 1)

The Inverter will restart when power is restored. (see note 2)

Note 1. By setting n081 to 1, the Inverter will detect UV warning, turn OFF the output, and wait for power restoration for 0.5 s if a momentary power interruption occurs. If the power recovers within 0.5 s, the Inverter will restart after speed searching. If the momentary power interruption continues more than 0.5 s, the

Inverter will detect UV1.

Note 2. By setting n081 to 2, the Inverter will detect UV warning, turn OFF the output, and wait for power restoration if a momentary power interruption occurs. When the power recovers, the Inverter will restart after speed searching.

6-10-5 Fault Retry (n082)

Caution

The Inverter may break if the fault retry function is used.

If the Inverter breaks, take the following measures:

Be sure to install a no-fuse breaker (NFB).

Provide the Inverter and peripheral machines with a sequence so that the machines will stop operating when the Inverter has an operational fault.

·The fault retry function automatically resets and restarts the Inverter in the case the

Inverter has an overvoltage fault or an overcurrent fault during operation.

·In the case of any other fault, the protective function operates instantly and the fault retry function does not operate.

·This function is to be used only if the user does not want to interrupt the mechanical system, even if this function may damage the Inverter.

·Set a multi-function output (n057 to n059) to the following so that the fault retry signal will be output.

Set value: 14 for fault retries

6-43

Advanced Operation

n082

Number of Fault Retries

Setting range

0 to 10

Register 0152

Hex

Unit of setting

Chapter 6

Changes during operation

Default setting

Set Values

·Set the number of fault retries required.

·The count of fault retries will be cleared in any of the following cases.

The Inverter is normal for 10 minutes continuously after the latest fault retry was made.

Power supply to the Inverter is interrupted.

A fault reset is input.

6-10-6 Frequency Jump Function (n083 to n086)

·The frequency jump function prevents the Inverter from generating frequencies that make the mechanical system resonate.

·The frequency jump function can be used effectively to set three dead bands of a frequency reference.

n083

Jump Frequency 1

Setting range

0.00 to 400.0 (Hz)

Register 0153

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

0.01 Hz

Default setting

0.00

n084

Jump Frequency 2

Setting range

0.00 to 400.0 (Hz)

Register 0154

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

0.01 Hz

Default setting

0.00

n085

Jump Frequency 3

Setting range

0.00 to 400.0 (Hz) n086

Jump Width

Setting range

0.00 to 25.50 (Hz)

Register 0155

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

0.01 Hz

Default setting

0.00

Register 0156

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

0.01 Hz

Default setting

0.00

Set Values

·Set n083 through n085 for jump frequencies 1 through 3 to the central values of jumping frequencies.

6-44

Advanced Operation

Chapter 6

·Values will be set in 0.01-Hz increments if the frequency is less than 100 Hz and 0.1-Hz increments if the frequency is 100 Hz or over.

·These values must satisfy the following condition.

n083 n084 n085

·The value in n086 must be set for the jump width.

·This function is disabled with n086 set to 0.0.

·The operation of the Inverter within the dead bands is prohibited. While the Inverter is in acceleration or deceleration control, however, the Inverter does not jump the bands but changes the frequency smoothly.

Frequency Jump Function

Output frequency

Reference frequency

6-10-7

Accumulated Operating Time (n087, n088)

The accumulated operating time function is provided for 5.5- and 7.5-kW Inverters only.

This function calculates and stores in memory the Inverter’s accumulated operating time. The accumulated operating time that is saved can be checked (unit: 10h) by the

“accumulated operating time” (U--13) of the multi-function monitor (MNTR indicator).

Use this function in determining the maintenance schedule.

n087

Accumulated Operating

Time

Setting range

0, 1

Register 0157

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

6-45

Advanced Operation

Chapter 6

Set Values

Select the operation status to be accumulated

Value Description

Accumulate the Inverter’s power-ON time (the time from when the power is turned ON until it is shut OFF).

Accumulate the Inverter’s RUN time (the time that the RUN command is being input).

n088

Accumulated Operating

Time Selection

Setting range

0 to 6,550

Register 0158

Unit of setting

Hex

10 H

Changes during operation

Default setting

Set the initial value for the accumulated operating time with 10 hours set as 1. The accumulation will begin from the time that is set.

Note

To clear (i.e., set to 0) the monitor value (U--13) for the accumulated operating time, set n088 to 0. The monitor value cannot be cleared by setting n001 (parameter write-prohibit selection/parameter initialization) to 8 or 9 (initialize).

6-10-8 Frequency Detection Function

·The 3G3MV has the following frequency detection functions.

Frequency Detection:

Detects that the frequency reference coincides with the output frequency.

Frequency Detection Levels 1 and 2:

Detects that the output frequency is the same as or higher or lower than the set value

(frequency detection level) in n095.

·The multi-function outputs (n057 to n059) must be set for the frequency detection function.

6-46

Advanced Operation

Chapter 6

Frequency Detection

·The multi-function outputs (n057 to n059) must be set to the following in order to issue an output indicating that the frequency reference and the output frequency agree.

Set value: 2 for frequency agree

Frequency Detection Operation

Output frequency

Detection width ±2 Hz Reset width ±4 Hz

Frequency reference

Frequency detection

Time

Frequency Detection Levels 1 and 2

·The parameters in n057 to n059 for multi-function output must be set for frequency detection output.

Set value: 4 for frequency detection level 1 (Output frequency n095)

Set value: 5 for frequency detection level 2 (Output frequency n095)

·Set the frequency detection level in n095.

n095

Frequency Detection Level

Register 015F

Hex

Setting range

0.00 to 400.0 (Hz)

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

0.01 Hz

Default setting

0.00

Set Values

·Set the frequency to be detected.

6-47

Advanced Operation

Chapter 6

·The value will be set in 0.01-Hz increments if the frequency is less than 100 Hz and

0.1-Hz increments if the frequency is 100 Hz or over.

Frequency Detection Level 1

Output frequency

Reset width --2 Hz n095 (Frequency detection level)

Time

Frequency detection level 1

Time

Frequency Detection Level 2

Output frequency

Reset width +2 Hz n095 (Frequency detection level)

Time

Frequency detection level 2

Time

6-10-9 UP/DOWN Command Frequency Memory (n100)

·This function changes the reference frequency by turning the UP and DOWN commands ON and OFF.

·In order to use this function, set n056 for multi-function input 7 to 34. Then the multifunction input 6 (S6) and multi-function input 7 (S7) terminals are set as described below.

Multi-function input 6 (S6): UP command

Multi-function input 7 (S7): DOWN command

·The output frequency held by the UP/DOWN function will be stored in the memory if n100 for UP/DOWN frequency storage is set to 1.

·By setting n100 to 1, the frequency reference kept on hold for 5 s or more will be retained even after a power interruption, and operation will be restarted at this frequency the next time the RUN command is input.

6-48

Advanced Operation

Chapter 6

·The stored output frequency will be cleared from the memory if n100 is set to 0. The retained frequency is initialized if n001 for parameter initialization is set to 8 or 9.

Note While this function is used, frequency references can only be used in remote mode with the UP/DOWN command or inching frequency command. All multistep speed references are disabled.

n100

UP/DOWN Frequency

Selection

Setting range

0, 1

Register 0164

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

Set Values

Value

Description

The frequency on hold is not retained.

The frequency on hold for 5 s or more is retained.

Operation of UP/DOWN Function

RUN command

(Forward rotation)

UP command

(S5)

DOWN command

(S6)

Output frequency

Upper limit

Time

Lower limit

Status

Frequency detection

Note

Status U: UP (acceleration)

D: DOWN (deceleration)

H: Hold

U1: Frequency acceleration restricted by upper limit.

D1: Frequency deceleration restricted by lower limit.

Time

6-49

Advanced Operation

Chapter 6

·The following ON/OFF combinations of UP and DOWN commands are possible.

Command

S6 (UP command)

Acceleration

S7 (DOWN command) OFF

Deceleration

OFF

Hold

·With the UP/DOWN function used, the output frequency has the following restrictions for upper and lower limits.

Upper limit: The maximum frequency in n011 or the frequency reference upper limit in n033, whichever is smaller.

Lower limit: The minimum output frequency in n016 or frequency reference lower limit in n034, whichever is smaller.

·When the RUN command for forward or reverse rotation is input, the Inverter will start operating at the lower limit regardless of whether the UP/DOWN command is input or not.

·When the UP/DOWN function and inching frequency command are both assigned to multi-function inputs, an inching frequency command input will have the highest priority.

·If n100 for UP/DOWN frequency storage is set to 1, the output frequency held by the

UP/DOWN function for 5 s or more will be stored in the memory. The output frequency will be held by the UP/DOWN function when both UP and DOWN commands are ON or

OFF together.

6-10-10

Input Open-phase Detection (n166, n167)

The input open-phase detection function is provided for 5.5- and 7.5-kW Inverters only.

This function detects the occurrence of an input power supply open phase. The open phase is detected by means of fluctuations in the main circuit DC voltage, enabling detection of power supply voltage fluctuations and imbalances, decreasing values due to ageing of the main circuit capacitor, and so on, in the same way.

If the fluctuations in the main circuit DC voltage exceed the input open-phase detection level (n166), and persist at this level for longer than the input open-phase detection time (n167), a main-circuit voltage fault (PF) will be detected.

n166

Input Open-phase Detection

Level

Setting range

0 to 100 n167

Input Open-phase Detection

Time

Setting range

0 to 255

Register 01A6

Hex

Unit of setting

1 %

Register 01A7

Hex

Unit of setting

1 s

Changes during operation

Default setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

6-50

Advanced Operation

Chapter 6

Set Values

For the input open-phase detection level (n166), set the main-circuit DC voltage fluctuation level for detecting an input open phase. Set the level as a percentage, as follows:

200-V-class Inverters: Take 400 V as 100%.

400-V-class Inverters: Take 800 V as 100%.

For the input open-phase detection time (n167), set the time (in seconds) for detecting an input open phase.

Note 1.

The following values are recommended for detecting an input open phase: n166 = 7 (%); n167 = 10 (s)

Note 2.

If either n166 or n167 is set to 0, the input open-phase detection function will be disabled.

6-10-11

Output Open-phase Detection (n168, n169)

The output open-phase detection function is provided for 5.5-kW and 7.5-kW Inverters only.

This function detects the occurrence of an output terminal open phase. The detection is performed at the current flowing at each output phase.

If the current in any of the Inverter output phases becomes less than the output openphase detection level (n168) and persists at this level for longer than the output openphase detection time (n169), an output open-phase fault (LF) will be detected

n168

Output Open-phase

Detection Level

Setting range

0 to 100 n169

Output Open-phase

Detection Time

Setting range

0.0 to 2.0

Register 01A8

Hex

Unit of setting

1 %

Register 01A9

Hex

Unit of setting

0.1 s

Changes during operation

Default setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

0.0

Set Values

For the output open-phase detection level (n168), set the current for detecting an output open phase. Make the setting as a percentage, taking the Inverter’s rated output current as 100%.

For the output open-phase detection time (n169), set the time in seconds for detecting an output open phase.

Note 1.

The following values are recommended for detecting an output open phase: n168 = 5 (%); n169 = 0.2 (s)

6-51

Advanced Operation

Chapter 6

Note 2.

If either n168 or n169 is set to 0, the output open-phase detection function will be disabled.

Note 3.

If the applicable motor capacity is small in relation to the Inverter capacity, it may cause errors in the output open-phase detection. To prevent this from occurring, lower the output open-phase detection level to match the motor capacity.

6-10-12 Fault Log (n178)

·The 3G3MV stores information on the four most recent faults.

·The latest record is displayed. By pressing the Increment Key, the previous record is displayed. A maximum of four records can be checked.

·The details of the information are the same as that obtained from the multi-function monitor U-09.

n178

Fault Log

Setting range

---

Note The information is read only.

Register 01B2

Hex

Unit of setting

---

Changes during operation

---

Default setting

---

Display Example

Fault display

No fault stored

Fault generation item

Fault code

·To clear the faultlog, set n001 for parameter write-prohibit selection/parameter initialization to 6.

6-52

Chapter 7 Communications

7-1 Inverter Settings

7-2 Message Communications Basic Formats

7-3 DSR Message and Response

7-4 Enter Command

7-5 Setting the Communications Data

7-6 Register Number Allocations in Detail

7-7 Communications Error Codes

7-8 Self-diagnostic Test

7-9 Communications with Programmable

Controller

Communications

Chapter 7

The 3G3MV Inverter has standard RS-422/485 and optional CompoBus/D communications functions. This section provides information on how to communicate over RS-422/485. For CompoBus/D communications in detail, refer to the 3G3MV-PDRT1-SINV CompoBus/D Communications

Unit User’s Manual (I529).

It is possible to control the Inverter, give frequency references, monitor the

Inverter status, and read and write parameters through communications.

A maximum of 32 Inverter Units can be connected and used as a simple network system.

NoteThe RS-422/485 communications of the 3G3MV Inverter conform to the

MODBUS Communications Protocol and this protocol cannot be used together with CompoBus/D communications protocol or any other communications protocol. Only 3G3MV-Series products can be connected as Slaves.

(The MODBUS Communications Protocol is a trademark of AEG

Schneider Automation.)

7-1 Inverter Settings

7-1-1 Setting the Communications Conditions

Communications Time-over Detection Selection (n151)

·This parameter is used for monitoring the communications system.

·The set value in the parameter determines whether communications time-over detection will be performed with “CE” displayed if there is an interval of more than 2 s between normal communications. The method to process the detected communications time-over is also determined according to the set value in the parameter.

·When a control signal (the RUN command, forward/reverse rotation command, or an external fault signal) is input into the Inverter through communications, be sure to set n151 to 0, 1, or 2. Then the system will stop in the case of a time-over detection.

If there is a communications failure, no control input will be operable. It will be, however, impossible to stop the Inverter if n151 is to 4 or 3.

Use a host program that monitors how the Inverter handles all control input signals, for example, so that there will be no interval of more than 2 s between communications.

7-2

Communications

n151

RS-422/485 Communications Time-over Detection

Selection

Setting range

0 to 4

Register 0197

Hex

Unit of setting

Chapter 7

Changes during operation

Default setting

Set Values

Value

Description

Detects a time-over and fatal error and coasts to a stop (see note 1)

Detects a time-over and fatal error and decelerates to a stop in deceleration time 1 (see note 1)

Detects a time-over and fatal error and decelerates to a stop in deceleration time 2 (see note 1)

Detects a time-over and nonfatal error warning and continues operating. The warning is canceled when the communications return to normal. (see note 2)

No time-over is detected.

Note 1. The fatal error is canceled with error reset input.

Note 2. The nonfatal error warning is canceled when the communications returns to normal.

Communications Frequency Reference/Display Unit Selection

(n152)

·Set this parameter to the unit of frequency reference and frequency-related values to be set or monitored through communications.

·This unit is for communications use only and independent from the units of setting made through the Digital Operator.

n152

RS-422/485 Communications Frequency Reference/

Display Unit Selection

Setting range

0 to 3

Register 0198

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

Set Values

Value Description

0.1 Hz

0.01 Hz

Converted value based on 30,000 as max. frequency

0.1% (Max. frequency: 100%)

7-3

Communications

Chapter 7

Note Communications data after the above conversion is hexadecimal.

For example, if the frequency is 60 Hz and the unit of setting is 0.01 Hz, the converted value is obtained as follows:

60/0.01 = 6000 = 1770 Hex

Slave Address (n153)

·Set this parameter to the Slave address (Slave unit number) for communications.

·If more than one Inverter is connected as a Slave, make sure that there will be no Slave address duplication.

n153

RS-422/485 Communications Slave Address

Setting range

00 to 32

Register 0199

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

Set Values

Value

01 to 32 Slave address

Description

Only receives broadcast messages from the Master (see note)

Note Address 00 is for broadcast purposes only. Do not set the Slave to this address, otherwise the Slave will not communicate.

Communications Baud Rate and Parity Selection (n154 and n155)

·Set the baud rate and parity according to the communications conditions of the Master.

n154

RS-422/485 Baud Rate

Selection

Setting range

0 to 3

Register 019A

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

Set Values

Value

2,400 bps

4,800 bps

9,600 bps

19,200 bps

7-4

Description

Communications

n155

RS-422/485 Parity Selection

Register 019B

Hex

Setting range

0 to 2

Unit of setting

Chapter 7

Changes during operation

Default setting

Set Values

Value

Even

Odd

No parity

Description

In normal serial communications, data is configured in single bytes, and messages are created by stringing together multiple bytes of data. The parity check described here sets the check for each byte of data. Set the parity check method that is required by the

Master.

Note

The entire message is checked by a separate check code called “CRC-16,” so the communications data will be checked even if no special parity check is performed.

Send Wait Time Setting (n156)

·Set this parameter to an awaiting period for returning a response after the DSR (datasend-request) message is received from the Master.

n156

RS-422/485 Send Wait Time

Register 019C

Hex

Setting range

10 to 65 (ms)

Unit of setting

1 ms

Changes during operation

Default setting

Set Values

·When the DSR message is received from the Master, the Inverter must wait for a communications time of 24-bit length plus the set value in n156 before returning a response.

Set this value according to the response time of the Master.

RTS Control Selection (n157)

·Select whether or not to enable the RTS (request-to-send) communications control function.

7-5

Communications

Chapter 7

This function can be disabled (i.e., set to “1”) only when a 1-to-1 Master/Slave configuration is used in RS-422 communications. When multiple Slaves are used for RS-422, or whenever RS-485 communications are used, it is necessary to set “0” (enable RTS control).

n157

RS-422/485 RTS Control

Selection

Setting range

0, 1

Register 019D

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

Set Values

Value

Description

RTS control disabled

RTS control enabled (available to 1-to-1 RS-422 communications only)

7-1-2 RUN Command Selection (n003)

·Select the method to input the RUN or STOP command into the Inverter.

·This parameter is enabled in remote mode only. The Inverter in local mode accepts the

RUN command only through key sequences on the Digital Operator.

n003

Operation Command Selection

Setting range

0 to 3

Register 0103

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

Set Values

Value Description

The RUN Key and STOP/RESET Key on the Digital Operator are enabled.

Multi-function input terminals are enabled in 2- or 3-wire sequence.

RS-422/485 communications are enabled.

Input from the optional CompoBus/D Communications Unit is enabled.

Note 1. To input the RUN command through RS-422/485 communications, set this parameter to 2. Then the RUN command only through RS-422/485 communications will be enabled.

Note 2. The RUN command can be input through RS-422/485 with multi-function input settings as well. For details, refer to 7-1-4 Setting the Multi-function Inputs.

7-1-3 Frequency Reference Input Selection (n004)

·Select the method to input the frequency reference into the Inverter in remote mode.

7-6

Communications

Chapter 7

·Ten methods can be used to input the frequency reference in remote mode. Select the ideal method according to the application.

n004

Frequency Reference Selection

Setting range

0 to 8

Register 0104

Hex

Unit of setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

Set Values

Value

Description

The FREQUENCY adjuster on the Digital Operator is enabled.

Frequency reference 1 (024) is enabled.

Frequency reference control terminal for 0- to 10-V voltage input is enabled.

Frequency reference control terminal for 4- to 20-mA current input is enabled.

Frequency reference control terminal for 0- to 20-mA current input is enabled.

Pulse train reference control terminal is enabled.

Frequency reference through communications is enabled.

Multi-function analog voltage for 0- to 10-V input is enabled.

Used only if two analog inputs are required in PID control.

Multi-function analog current for 4- to 20-mA) input is enabled.

Used only if two analog inputs are required in PID control.

Frequency reference through option (CompoBus/D communications) is enabled.

Note 1. To input the frequency reference through RS-422/485 communications, set this parameter to 6. Then the frequency reference only through RS-422/485 communications will be enabled.

Note 2. The frequency reference can be input through RS-422/485 with multi-function input settings as well. For details, refer to 7-1-4 Setting the Multi-function

Inputs.

7-1-4 Setting the Multi-function Inputs (n050 to n056)

·In addition to the methods described above, the RUN command and frequency reference can be input through RS-422/485 communications by setting the value 18 in any one of the parameters from n050 to n056 (multi-function input).

·Subsequently, the following operations are selectable in remote mode.

When the function-set input terminal is OFF, the RUN command will be executed according to the setting in n003 (RUN command selection) and the frequency reference will be executed according to the setting in n004 (frequency reference selection).

When the function-set input terminal is ON, the Inverter will operate according to the

RUN command and frequency reference through RS-422/485 communications.

7-7

Communications

n050

Multi-function input 1 (S1)

Setting range

1 to 25 n051

Multi-function input 2 (S2)

Setting range

1 to 25 n052

Multi-function input 3 (S3)

Setting range

1 to 25 n053

Multi-function input 4 (S4)

Setting range

1 to 25 n054

Multi-function input 5 (S5)

Setting range

1 to 25 n055

Multi-function input 6 (S6)

Setting range

1 to 25 n056

Multi-function input 7 (S7)

Setting range

1 to 25, 34, and 35

Using input signals (n050 to n056)

Multi-function input terminals

Register 0132

Hex

Unit of setting

Register 0133

Hex

Unit of setting

Register 0134

Hex

Unit of setting

Register 0135

Hex

Unit of setting

Register 0136

Hex

Unit of setting

Register 0137

Hex

Unit of setting

Register 0138

Hex

Unit of setting

Chapter 7

Changes during operation

Default setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

Changes during operation

Default setting

7-8

Communications

Setting

Chapter 7

Name

Communication/control circuit terminal selection

(Comm/Terminal change over)

Description

Run command from communication -

from serial comm. card if it is connected

), otherwise MEMOBUS comm. - and frequency reference

(n004= 0 to 8) are effective if multi-function inout terminal for this setting is “1” (register no. 0001H,

0002H).

Run command in LOCAL/REMOTE mode (n003=0,1) and frequency reference (n004=0 to 8) are effective if “0”.

) new from s/w 010024

Inverter overheating pre-alarm OH3 “OH3” is displayed (blinking) on the digital operator by signal input.

Accel/Decel time select 2 2 Multi-func. inputs (two from n050 to n056) are to set as “11” (Accel./Decel time select 1) and “27” to switch among 4 accel./decel. times. (n019 to n022; n041 to n044)

7-9

Communications

7-2 Message Communications Basic Formats

Chapter 7

The following description provides information on the format of message data (DSR and response data).

Message communications of the Inverter conform to the MODBUS Communications Protocol, which does not require message start and end processing.

(The MODBUS Communications Protocol is a trademark of AEG

Schneider Automation.)

Communications Format

·The following format is used for message data communications.

·Message data consists of a Slave address, function code, communications data, and error check block.

Message data (DSR message and response)

Slave address

1 byte

Function code

1 byte

Communications data

Error check block

2 bytes

Message Interval

·When the Inverter receives a DSR message from the Master, the Inverter waits for a period that is equivalent to 24 bits in length and a Send Wait Time set in n156. Then the

Inverter will return a response. Set n156 according to the Master’s processing time or the timing adjustment.

·When the Master issues the next message after receiving the response from the

Inverter, the Master must wait for a 24-bit period plus another period of at least 10 ms.

DSR message from Master

Response from Inverter

DSR message from Master

24-bit (or 3-byte) standby period

Standby period set in n156

24-bit (3-byte) standby period

Set a standby period of

10 ms or more for the

Master.

7-10

Communications

Chapter 7

Message Data Configuration

The communications message is configured entirely of hexadecimal data. (ASCII and

FINS are not used.)

Communications data is divided into the four areas shown in the following table.

Data name

Slave address

Function code

Description

Set the Slave address (the set value in n153) of the Inverter, to which the DSR message is sent. The Slave address must be within a range from 00 to 32 (00 to 20 Hex).

A command giving instructions of the details of processing to the Inverter.

Example: Data read (03 Hex) and data write (10 Hex)

Communications data Data attached to the command.

Example: The register number of read start data and the number of registers of read data

Error check CRC-16 check code for checking the reliability of the message data.

Note In the above communications, the default is --1 (65535) and the LSB (least-significant byte) is converted as MSB (most-significant byte) (in the opposite direction).

The CRC-16 check is automatically performed by using the protocol macro function of OMRON’s SYSMAC CS1-series or C200HX/HG/HE Programmable Controllers.

Slave Address

·The Master can communicate with a maximum of 32 Slaves over RS-422/485. A unique Slave address is allocated to each Slave (Inverter) for communications.

·Slave addresses are within a range from 00 to 32 (00 through 20 Hex). If a DSR message is issued to Slave address 00, the message will be a broadcast message.

Note The broadcast message is addressed to all Slaves. Only the RUN command

(register 0001 Hex) and frequency command (register 0002 Hex) can be written to the message. The Inverter receiving this message does not return a response regardless of whether or not the message is received properly. Therefore, for measures against communications errors, the monitor function of the Inverter should be used for checking the reception of broadcast messages.

Function Code

·The function code is a command giving instructions of the details of processing to the

Inverter.

7-11

Communications

Chapter 7

·The following three functions codes are available.

Function code Command name

03 Hex Data read

08 Hex

10 Hex

Loop-back test

Data write

Description

Reads the data of the specified register number.

Consecutive data of a maximum of 16 words (32 bytes) can be read.

The DSR message is returned as a response.

This command is used for checking the status of communications.

The attached data in the format is written to the specified register number. Consecutive data of a maximum of 16 words (32 bytes) can be written.

Note 1. Do not use any code other than the above, otherwise the Inverter will detect a communications error and return an error message.

Note 2. The Inverter uses the same function code for the response. If an error occurs, however, the MSB of the function code will be set to 1. For example, if an error occurs in a DSR message with function code 03, the function code of the response will be 83.

Communications Data

·Communications data is attached to the command. The contents and its arrangement of communications data vary with the function code. For details, refer to 7-3 DSR Mes-

sage and Response.

Error Check

The CRC-16 check code is the remainder (16 bits) when all of the message blocks from the Slave address to the final communications data are connected in series, as shown in the following diagram, and this data is divided by a fixed 17-digit binary number (1 1000 0000 0000 0101).

8 bits

The LSB of the Slave address is handled as the MSB in CRC-16 calculation.

Slave address

Function code

Start of communications data

End of communications data

Note 1.

Normally “0” is used as the initial value for CRC-16 calculations, but “--1” (16 bits all “1”) is used here.

Note 2.

The CRC-16 code is calculated with the LSB of the

Slave address handled as the MSB, and the final

MSB of the communications data handled as the

LSB.

Note 3.

Calculate the CRC-16 code for responses from the

Slave as well, and compare it with the CRC-16 code in the response message.

7-12

Communications

7-3 DSR Message and Response

Chapter 7

The following description provides information on how to set DSR messages and what details are returned as responses. Each DSR message or response is divided into 8-bit blocks. Therefore, data must be set in 8-bit blocks for communications.

7-3-1 Data Read (Function Code: 03 Hex)

Settings and Response

·To read data (such as control I/O status data, monitor item data, or parameter set value data) from the Inverter, issue the following DSR message.

·Data read is a maximum of 16 words in length (i.e., data of 32 bytes from 16 registers) per DSR message.

·The register number is allocated to each function item, such as control I/O, monitor item, and parameter functions. The register number of each parameter is indicated wherever the parameter is explained in this manual and in Section 10 List of Parame-

ters. For register numbers other than those of parameters, refer to 7-6 Register Num-

ber Allocations in Details.

Note 1.

A parameter corresponds to one register (one word), so the “number of registers of read data” indicates the number of parameters to be read (i.e., the number of consecutive registers beginning with the first register number).

Note 2.

The “number of bytes of attached data” indicates the number of bytes of data read from the registers attached from that point onwards. The number of registers must equal the number of bytes divided by two.

DSR Message

Byte No.

Slave address

Function code (03 Hex)

Data

7-13

Communications

Response

Normal

Byte No.

: n--1 n

Slave address

Function code (03 Hex)

No. of bytes of attached data

Data

Chapter 7

Error

Byte No.

Slave address

Function code (83 Hex)

Error code

Data

Note When an error occurs, the MSB of the function code will be set to 1.

MS B

LSB

MSB

LSB

MSB

LSB

Example of Data Read

·In the following example, four-register data (status signal data) is read from register

0020 Hex of the Inverter with a Slave address of 02.

7-14

Communications

DSR Message

Byte No.

Data

Response

Normal

Byte No.

Slave address

Function code

Data

Error

Byte No.

Slave address

Function code

No. of bytes of attached data

Data

Slave address

Function code

Error code

Chapter 7

Data example

(Hex)

MS B

LSB

MSB

LSB

MSB

LSB

MSB

LSB

Data example

(Hex)

Data example

(Hex)

7-15

Communications

Chapter 7

7-3-2 Data Write/Broadcast Data Write (Function Code: 10 Hex)

Settings and Response

·To write data to the Inverter, such as control I/O and parameter set value data, issue the following DSR message.

·Consecutive data of a maximum of 16 words (32 bytes for 16 registers) can be written per DSR message.

·The register number is allocated to each function item, such as control I/O and parameter functions. The register number of each parameter is indicated wherever the parameter is explained in this manual and in Section 10 List of Parameters. For register numbers other than those of parameters, refer to 7-6 Register Number Allocations

in Details.

DSR Message

Byte No.

: n--1 n

Slave address

Function code (10 Hex)

Data of start register

Data

MSB

LSB

MSB

LSB

MSB

LSB

7-16

Communications

Response

Normal

Byte No.

Slave address

Function code (10 Hex)

Data

Chapter 7

MS B

LSB

MSB

LSB

Error

Byte No.

Slave address

Function code (90 Hex)

Error code

Data

Note 1. When an error occurs, the MSB of the function code will be set to 1.

Note 2. A broadcast message uses the same DSR message format. The Slave address is, however, always set to 00 and only register 0001 Hex (the RUN command) and register number 0002 Hex (the frequency reference) can be written.

Example of Data Read

·In the following example, two-register data (the RUN command) is written from register

0002 Hex of the Inverter with a Slave address of 01.

DSR Message

Byte No.

Data

Slave address

Function code

Data example

(Hex)

7-17

Communications

Byte No.

Response

Normal

Byte No.

Data of start register

Data

MSB

LSB

MSB

LSB

Chapter 7

Data example

(Hex)

Error

Byte No.

Slave address

Function code

Data

Data example

(Hex)

Slave address

Function code

Error code

Data

Data example

(Hex)

7-3-3 Loop-back Test (Function Code: 08 Hex)

Settings and Response

·The DSR message from the Master is returned as a response. The Inverter does not retrieve or process this data.

7-18

Communications

Chapter 7

·The DSR message or normal response for loop-back test use is divided into 8-byte blocks as shown below. Any data can be set as test data 1 or 2 provided that the number of data items remains changed.

·This command is used for checking the status of communications or for dummy communications without detecting any communications time-over.

DSR Message

Byte No.

Slave address

Function code (08 Hex)

Data

Response

Normal

Byte No.

Slave address

Function code (08 Hex)

Data

Error

Byte No.

Slave address

Function code (88 Hex)

Error code

Data

Note When an error occurs, the MSB of the function code will be set to 1.

7-19

7-20

Communications

Chapter 7

Example of Loop-back Test

·In the following example, a loop-back test is conducted on the Inverter with a Slave address of 01.

DSR Message

Byte No.

Data

Slave address

Function code

Data example

(Hex)

Response

Normal

Byte No.

Data

Error

Byte No.

Slave address

Function code

Data

Data example

(Hex)

Slave address

Function code

Error code

Data example

(Hex)

Communications

7-4 Enter Command

Chapter 7

The Enter command is used for copying parameter set values that have been written through communications in and after register 0101 Hex of the

RAM area to the EEPROM of the Inverter. This is done so that the

EEPROM can maintain the parameter set values.

By issuing a DSR message to write data, the data is written to the RAM area of the Inverter. This data will be lost when the Inverter is turned OFF.

Issue the Enter command to store in the EEPROM of the Inverter the parameter set value that has been written through communications.

Note The Enter command is not accepted while the Inverter is running. Be sure to issue the Enter command while the Inverter is not running.

DSR Message of Enter Command

·The Enter command is issued in response to the DSR message (with a function code of 10 Hex) to write data.

·By writing data 0000 Hex to be sent to register 0900 Hex, the Inverter copies to the

EEPROM all parameter set values that the Inverter has received.

Note 1. Only the parameter constants (in and after register 0101 Hex) are stored in the

EEPROM with the Enter command.

The RUN command (in register No. 0001 Hex) is in the RAM area. The frequency reference (in register 0002 Hex) or any other data in registers with a number up to 003D Hex is also in the RAM area. Therefore, the EEPROM does not store these parameters.

Note 2. Data can be written to the EEPROM a maximum of approximately 100,000 times. Therefore, be sure to reduce the number of Enter commands sent as much as possible.

7-21

Communications

7-5 Setting the Communications Data

Chapter 7

The following description provides information on how to convert the register data (such as monitor value or parameter set value data) in the communications data block of the message data (such as DSR and response data).

Converting the Register Data

·The data in each register is sent as 2-byte data.

·The data in each register is processed under the following rules and sent in hexadecimal.

The data is converted to a hexadecimal value based on the minimum unit of setting of each register as 1.

If the frequency reference is 60 Hz and the minimum unit of setting will be 0.01 Hz, the data will be converted as follows:

60 (Hz)/0.01 (Hz) = 6000 = 1770 Hex

Note 1. The minimum unit of setting of each parameter is indicated whenever the parameter is explained in this manual and in Section 10 List of Parameters. For registers other than those of parameters, refer to 7-6 Register Number Alloca-

tions in Details.

Note 2. The minimum unit of setting of frequency reference data or frequency monitor data is determined by n152 (register 0198 Hex: RS-422/485 communications frequency reference/monitor unit selection). The unit of setting of each of the three registers below is determined by the set value in n152. For the units of setting of these constants, refer to the List of Parameters. The set value in n152 has nothing to do with frequency data items set as parameter constants (e.g., frequency references 1 through 16, inching frequency reference, maximum frequency, minimum output frequency, jump frequency).

Monitor Items

Communications-dedicated Register

In spite of the set value in n152, however, set the maximum frequency to 3000 when the frequency reference is executed with a broadcast message. In this case, the

Inverter rounds off any value less than 0.01 Hz.

7-22

Communications

Chapter 7

Note 3. There are parameters that make setting unit changes when the values are increased with the Digital Operator. The smaller units are, however, used for communications in such cases. For example, the value in n083 (register 0153

Hex: jump frequency 1) will be set in 0.01-Hz increments if the frequency is less than 100 Hz and 0.1-Hz increments if the frequency is 100 Hz or over. The value

0.01 Hz is always 1 Hex for communications.

If the jump frequency is 100.0 Hz, the minimum unit of setting will be

0.01 Hz and the data will be converted as follows:

100.0 (Hz)/0.01 (Hz) = 10000 = 2710 Hex

Negative Values Expressed in 2’s Complements

If the frequency reference bias in n061 is --100%, the minimum unit of setting will be 1% and the data will be converted as follows:

100 (%)/1 (%) = 100 = 0064 Hex

® 2’s complement: FF9C Hex

Bit reversed.

1 is added.

Note Whether the data is positive or negative is determined by the parameter set value.

The MSB of negative-value data is always set to 1. Data with its MSB set to 1 is not, however, always negative-value data.

For example, the setting range of the n083 parameter (register 0153 Hex: jump frequency 1) is within a range from 0.00 to 400.00 Hz. If the jump frequency is

400.0 Hz, the data is obtained from the following formula and its MSB will be 1.

400.0 (Hz)/0.001 (Hz) = 4000 = 9C40 Hex

Setting All Unused Bits to 0

·Bits 11 through 15 of the RUN command (register 0001 Hex) are unused. When writing the data, be sure to set all of these bits to 0.

These bits when read are set to 0.

No Data Settings in Unused Registers

·Registers described “not used” may be used for internal processing. Do not write any data to such registers.

7-23

Communications

7-6 Register Number Allocations in Detail

Chapter 7

The following description provides information on register numbers allocated to the Inverter and the meanings of the registers. As for the register numbers of the parameters (n001 through n179), refer to Section 10 List of

Parameters and the description of each of these parameters wherever explained in this manual.

7-6-1 I/O Function

Communications with a Single Slave with Addresses 01 to 32

(01 to 20 Hex) Read/Write

Function Description Register No.

(Hex)

0000

0001

0002

0003

Not used

RUN command

Frequency reference

V/f gain

0004 to 0008 Not used

0009 Inverter output

000A to 000F Not used

---

Refer to the table below.

Set the frequency reference in the unit according to the set value in n152.

Set on condition that 100% is 1000 within a range from 2.0 to 200.0% (20 to 2000). (see note 1)

---

Refer to the table below.

---

Note 1. The V/f gain is a rate to be multiplied by the output voltage obtained from V/f operation. If 1000 (03E8 Hex) is set, the multiplication rate will be 1.

Note 2. When the above registers are read, values that are set through communications will be read. For example, when the RUN command (register 0001) is read, the control input in the register that was previously set through communications will be returned. This is not a value monitored through the input signal terminal.

7-24

Communications

Chapter 7

RUN Command (Register 0001 Hex)

Bit No.

11 to 15

Function

RUN command (1: RUN)

Forward/Reverse (1: Reverse)

External fault (External fault EF0)

Fault reset (1: Fault reset)

Multi-function input 1 (1: ON)

Multi-function input 2 (1: ON)

Multi-function input 3 (1: ON)

Multi-function input 4 (1: ON)

Multi-function input 5 (1: ON)

Multi-function input 6 (1: ON)

Multi-function input 7 (1: ON)

Not used

Note There is an OR relationship between input from the control terminals and input through communications. Therefore, if multi-function inputs of this register are set to forward/stop and reverse/stop, it is possible to execute the RUN command through the multi-function inputs. These settings are not, however, recommended because these settings establish two command lines.

Inverter Output (Register 0009 Hex)

3 to 15

Bit No.

Function

Multi-function contact output (1: ON)

Multi-function output 1 (1: ON)

Multi-function output 2 (1: ON)

Not used

Note The settings will be enabled if multi-function outputs 1 through 3 in n057 through n059 are set to 18 for communications output. Then the corresponding output terminal will be turned ON and OFF through communications.

Broadcast Message with Slave Address: 00 (00 Hex)

Register No.

(Hex)

0000

0001

0002

0003 to 000F Not used

Function

Not used

RUN command

Frequency reference

Description

Write

---

Refer to the table below.

Set the frequency reference based on the maximum frequency as 30,000.

---

Note 1. Data can be written to registers 0001 and 0002 only.

7-25

Communications

Chapter 7

Note 2. No data can be written to multi-function input.

Note 3. The unit of setting of the broadcast message is different from that in the DSR message to communicate with a single Slave.

RUN Command (Register 0001 Hex)

4 to 15

Bit No.

Function

RUN command (1: RUN)

Forward/Reverse (1: Reverse)

External fault (1: External fault EF0)

Fault reset (1: Fault reset)

Not used

7-6-2 Monitor Functions

Register No.

(Hex)

0020

0021

0022

0023

Function

Status signal

Fault status 1

Data link status

Frequency reference

0024 Output frequency

0025 to 0026 Not used

Description

Refer to the following corresponding table.

According to the set value in n152.

---

0027

0028

0029

002A

002B

002C

002D

002E

002F to 0030 not used

0031 Main circuit DC voltage

0032

Output current

Output voltage

Read based on 1 A as 10.

Read based on 1 V as 1.

Fault status (see note 2) Refer to the following corresponding table.

Warning (see note 2) Refer to the following corresponding table.

Input terminal status

Inverter status

Output terminal status

Torque reference

Refer to the following corresponding table.

---

Read based on 1 V as 1.

0033 to 0034

0035

0036

0037

0038

Not used

Output power

PID feedback

Read based on ±1% as ±1 and the rated motor torque is 100%.

---

Read based on 1 [h] as 1

---

Read based on ±1 kW as ±100.

Read based on 1% as 10 and a value equivalent to the maximum frequency as

100%.

7-26

Communications

Chapter 7

Register No.

(Hex)

0039

003A

Function

PID input

PID output

003B to 003C Not used

003D Communications error

003E to 00FF Not used

Description

Read based on ±1% as ±10 and a value equivalent to the maximum frequency as

100%.

Read based on ±1% as ±10 and a value equivalent to the maximum frequency as

100%.

---

Refer to the following corresponding table.

---

Note

The fault status 2, warning status, Inverter status 2, and accumulated operating time functions are provided for 5.5kW and 7.5kW Inverters only.

Status Signal (Register 0020 Hex)

8 to 15

Bit No.

Function

During RUN (1: During RUN)

Forward/reverse operation (1: Reverse operation)

Inverter ready (1: Ready)

Fault (1: Fault)

Data setting error (1: Error)

Multi-function output 1 (1: ON)

Multi-function output 2 (1: ON)

Multi-function output 3 (1: ON)

Not used

Fault Status 1 (Register 0021 Hex)

Bit No.

OL2

Not used

FBL

EFj, STP

Function

Bit No.

OL1

OL3

Not used

UV1

UV2

OPR

Function

Note When a fault results, the corresponding bit will be set to 1.

7-27

Communications

Chapter 7

Data Link Status (Register 0022 Hex)

1 to 2

5 to 15

Bit No.

Function

Data writing (1: Writing)

Not used

Upper and lower limit error (1: Error): Outside set range

Verify fault (1: Error): Same as OPEj.

Not used

Fault Status 2 (Register 0029 Hex)

6 to 15

Bit No.

Not used.

Function

Warning Status (Register 002A Hex)

9 to 11

Bit No.

STP (Emergency stop)

SER

OL3

FAN

Not used.

OH3

FBL

STP (Emergency stop)

Not used.

Function

7-28

Communications

Input Terminal Status (Register 002B Hex)

7 to 15

Bit No.

Function

Multi-function input terminal 1 (S1) (1: ON)

Multi-function input terminal 2 (S2) (1: ON)

Multi-function input terminal 3 (S3) (1: ON)

Multi-function input terminal 4 (S1) (4: ON)

Multi-function input terminal 5 (S5) (1: ON)

Multi-function input terminal 6 (S6) (1: ON)

Multi-function input terminal 7 (S7) (1: ON)

Not used

Chapter 7

Inverter Status 1 (Register 002C Hex)

Bit No.

Function

During RUN (1: During RUN)

Zero speed (1: Zero speed)

Frequency agree (1: Frequency agree)

Alarm (Nonfatal error) (1: Warning)

Frequency detection 1 (1: Output frequency n095)

Frequency detection 2 (1: Output frequency n095)

Inverter ready (1: Ready)

UV (1: UV)

Base block (1: Base block)

Frequency reference mode (1: Other than communications)

RUN command mode (1: Other than communications)

Overtorque detection (1: Overtorque detection)

Not used

Fault retry (1: Fault retry)

Fault (1: Fault)

Communications time-over: No normal communications for 2 s or more

(1: Communications time-over detecting)

Output Terminal Status (Register 002D Hex)

3 to 15

Bit No.

Function

Multi-function contact output terminal MA (1: ON)

Multi-function photocoupler output terminal 1 (P1) (1: ON)

Multi-function photocoupler output terminal 2 (P2) (1: ON)

Not used

7-29

Communications

Inverter Status 2 (Register 002E Hex)

1 to 15

Bit No.

Frequency reference loss

Not used.

Function

Communications Error (Register 003D Hex)

7 to 15

Bit No.

Function

CRC error (1: Error)

Data length error (1: Error)

Not used

Parity error (1: Error)

Overrun error (1: Error)

Framing error (1: Error)

Communications time-over (1: Error)

Not used

Chapter 7

7-30

Communications

7-7 Communications Error Codes

Chapter 7

The Inverter will detect a communications error if normal communications fail or a message data error occurs.

The Inverter returns a response that consists of the Slave address, function code with the MSB set to 1, error code, and CRC-16 check block when the communications error is detected.

When the Master receives an error code, refer to the following table for troubleshooting and remedying the error.

Errors and Remedies

Error code

Name

01 Hex Function code error

Probable cause

The function code is set to a code other than 03, 08, or 10 Hex.

02 Hex

03 Hex

Data number error

The specified register number has not been registered.

An attempt was made to read the register of the Enter command.

The number of write or read registers is not within a range from 1 to 16 (0001 and 0010 Hex).

The number of registers of the DSR message multiplied by two does not coincide with the number of bytes of the attached data.

21 Hex Data setting error The write data is not within the permissible range.

The data set is illegal and causes an

OPE (OPE1 through OPE9) error.

Remedy

Check and correct the function code.

Check and correct the register number.

Check and correct the number of registers or the number of bytes.

Check the display on the

Digital Operator and correct the data.

7-31

Communications

Chapter 7

Error code

Name Probable cause

22 Hex Write mode error The Inverter in operation received a DSR message to write data to a parameter that prohibits any data to be written while the Inverter is running.

The Enter command was received while the Inverter is running.

The Inverter detecting UV received a

DSR message to write data.

Remedy

Write the data after stopping the

Inverter.

The Inverter detecting UV received the

Enter command.

The Inverter detecting F04 for an initialization memory fault received a

DSR message other than that for parameter initialization (with n001 set to

8 or 9).

The Inverter processing data written received a DSR message to write data.

A DSR message to a read-only register was received.

Write the data after restoring the UV (main circuit undervoltage) status.

Turn the Inverter

OFF and ON after parameter initialization with n001 set to 8 or

Wait for an elapse period equivalent to 24 bits plus a minimum of

10 ms to issue the message after a response is received from the Inverter.

Check and correct the register number.

7-32

Communications

7-8 Self-diagnostic Test

Chapter 7

The Inverter incorporates a self-diagnostic test function that checks whether RS-422/485 communications are functioning.

If the Inverter has a communications failure, take the steps provided below to check whether the communications function of the Inverter is normal.

Self-diagnostic Test Steps

1. Set the Parameter

Set n056 for multi-function input 7 (S7) to 35 through the Digital Operator.

2. Turn OFF the Inverter and Wire the Terminal

Turn OFF the Inverter and wire the following control terminals. At this time, make sure that all other circuit terminals are open.

Set SW1 to NPN.

Connect S7 and SC.

Connect R+ and S+.

Connect R-- and S--.

3. Turn ON the Inverter and Check the Display

Turn ON the Inverter.

Check the display on the Digital Operator.

Normal

The display is normal with no error code displayed.

Fault

The display shows “CE” (communications time-over) or “CAL” (communications standby). In either case, the communications circuit of the Inverter is broken.

Replace the Inverter.

7-33

Communications

Chapter 7

7-9 Communications with Programmable Controller

The Communications Board can be mounted to OMRON’s SYSMAC

CS1-series or C200HX/HG/HE CPU Unit. The Inverter can then be controlled by the Communications Board through its RS-422/485 port.

The communications protocol can be set by using the protocol macro function. Therefore, there is no need to write a ladder program for the communications protocol when the function is used.

The following description provides information on how to control the

Inverter through communications with the SYSMAC CS1-series or

C200HX/HG/HE Communications Board by using the protocol macro function.

The RS-422/485 communications of the 3G3MV Inverter conform to the

MODBUS Communications Protocol and this protocol cannot be used together with CompoBus/D communications protocol or any other communications protocol. Only 3G3MV-series Units can be connected as Slaves.

(The MODBUS Communications Protocol is a trademark of AEG

Schneider Automation.)

7-9-1 Available Programmable Controller and Peripheral

Device

OMRON’s SYSMAC CS1-series or C200HX/HG/HE

Programmable Controller

·The Communications Board can be mounted to the following SYSMAC CS1-series or

C200HX/HG/HE CPU Unit.

Series

SYSMAC CS1

Series

SYSMAC

C200HX/HG/HE

CPU model

High-speed models: CS1H-CPU67-E, CS1H-CPU66-E,

CS1H-CPU65-E, CS1H-CPU64-E, and CS1H-CPU63-E

Low-speed models: CS1G-CPU45-E, CS1G-CPU44-E,

CS1G-CPU43-E, and CS1G-CPU42-E

C200HX-CPU34-E/44-E/54-E/64-E/34-ZE/44-ZE/54-ZE/64-ZE/

65-ZE/85-ZE

C200HG-CPU33-E/43-E/53-E/63-E/33-ZE/43-ZE/53-ZE/63-ZE

C200HE-CPU32-E/42-E/32-ZE/42-ZE

7-34

Communications

Chapter 7

Communications Board

·The following Communications Boards are available.

Note The RS-232C port can be used if an RS-422/485 conversion adapter is installed.

For ease of wiring, however, it is recommended that the RS-422/485 port be used. The following information is for the RS-422/485 port.

Series

SYSMAC CS1

Series

SYSMAC

C200HX/HG/HE

Communications Board model

CS1W-SCB41

C200HW-COM06-EV1

Note Make sure that the model number has the suffix “EV1,” otherwise the

CRC-16 check code cannot be used.

Mounting method

As an inner board of the CPU Unit

Mounted to an optional slot of the

CPU Unit

Specifications

· One RS-232C port

· One RS-422/485 port

· Protocol macro function

· One RS-232C port

· One RS-422/485 port

· Protocol macro function

Peripheral Devices

·The following peripheral devices are required to use the protocol macro function.

Name Model Specification

CX-Protocol WS02-PSTC1-E The following peripheral devices support the protocol macro function of the SYSMAC CS1 Series.

Personal computer environment

Personal computer

CPU

IBM PC/AT or compatible computer

Minimum requirement: Pentium 90 MHz

Recommended: Pentium 166 MHz or faster

Microsoft Windows 95 or Windows 98

Memory Minimum: 16 MB

Recommended: 24 MB min.

Hard disk Minimum: Available space of 24 MB

Recommended: Available space of 50 MB

Monitor

Drive

SVGA or better

FDD: 1 or more

CD-ROM drive: 1 or more

7-35

Communications

Chapter 7

Name

Protocol

Support Tool

Model Specification

WS01-PSTF1-E The following peripheral devices support the protocol macro function of the SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE.

Personal computer

CPU

Personal computer environment

IBM PC/AT or compatible computer

Memory

Minimum requirement: Pentium 90 MHz

Recommended: Pentium 166 MHz or faster

Microsoft Windows 95 or Windows 98

Minimum: 16 MB

Recommended: 24 MB min.

Hard disk Minimum: Available space of 24 MB

Recommended: Available space of 50 MB

Monitor

Drive

SVGA or better

FDD: 1 or more

CD-ROM drive: 1 or more

Manuals

·Refer to the following manuals for the peripheral devices and support software in detail.

Product Catalog No.

SYSMAC CS1-series Programmable Controllers Operation Manual: W339

Programming Manual: W340

SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE Programmable

Controllers

Installation Manual: W302

Operation Manual: W303

CS1W-SCB41 Serial Communications Board

C200HW-COM06-EV1 Communications Board

WS02-PSTC1-E CX-Protocol

WS01-PSTF1-E Protocol Support Tool

W336

W304

W344

W319

7-36

Communications

7-9-2 Wiring the Communications Line

Chapter 7

Connector Pin Arrangements of CS1W-SCB41 and

C200HW-COM06-EV1

Pin No.

Code

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

9 NC

Frame FG

Signal name

Send data (--)

Send data (+)

---

Recv data (--)

---

Recv data (+)

---

Output

---

Input

---

Input

---

I/O

Standard Connection Diagram

RS-485 (2-wire)

Communications Board

Code Pin No.

RS-422

/485

Interface

Frame

9-pin, D-sub connector

(Cable side: Male)

Shielded line

3G3MV

Code

Control circuit terminal block

(communications terminals)

3G3MV

Code

Control circuit terminal block

(communications terminals)

Note Be sure to set the terminal resistance of only the Inverter at each end to ON and that any other Inverter to OFF. Refer to page 2-18, Selecting RS-422/485 Ter-

mination Resistance for details.

7-37

Communications

Chapter 7

RS-422 (4-wire)

Communications Board

Code Pin No.

Shielded line

RS-422/485

Interface

B500-AL001 Link Adapter

Pin No. Code

Code Pin No.

RS-422

Interface

Shielded line

3G3MV

Code

Control circuit terminal block

(communications terminals)

Frame

9-pin, D-sub connector

(Cable side: Male) Code

Pin No.

Shielded line

3G3MV

Code

Control circuit terminal block

(communications terminals)

Note Turn the terminal resistance of all the Inverters to ON for RS-422 communications. Refer to page 2-18, Selecting RS-422/485 Termination Resistance for details.

7-9-3 Outline of Protocol Macro Function

Protocol Macro Function

·The protocol macro function makes it possible to customize a communications protocol in order to create a macro according to the specifications of the serial communications port of the general-purpose peripheral device.

·The protocol macro function is mainly used for the following jobs.

Creation of message communications frame.

Creation of Send & Recv procedures for message communications frame.

Note This manual uses the terms “message, DSR message, and response” to express the communications data exchanged.

Message: A DSR message or response.

DSR Message: A message sent by the Master for instructions to the Inverter.

Response: A message that the Inverter returns in compliance with a DSR message from the Master.

Creating a Message

·The message can be created according to the communications specifications of the general-purpose peripheral device (Inverter) as a counterpart.

7-38

Communications

Chapter 7

·A DSR message can include variables to set data in the I/O memory (such as data memory) of the CPU Unit or write response data to the I/O memory.

·Each component of a message is in the memory of the Communications Board. Therefore, the CPU Unit can just execute the PMCR instruction to send or receive the data.

Therefore, there is no need to write ladder programs for the communications protocol.

CPU Unit

Communications

Board

3G3MV

DSR message

PMCR instruction

Send

Reception

Response

Step to Send and Receive Messages

·Sending and receiving messages as a single step includes step-type commands, such as Send, Recv, Send & Recv, and Wait commands.

·The step can be finished or switched to another step according to the result of the step.

CPU Unit

Communications

Board

3G3MV

PMCR instruction

Step 0

Next process according to the result.

To step n according to the result.

Configuration of Protocol Macro Function

·The protocol consists of one or more sequences.

A sequence is an independent set of actions to perform together with a general-purpose peripheral device, such as an Inverter. The RUN command and the frequency reference are given to the Inverter and the status of the Inverter is read in a single sequence, for example.

·A sequence consists of one or more steps.

7-39

Communications

Chapter 7

Sequence

·When repeating actions to give the RUN command and frequency reference to the

Inverter and read the status of the Inverter, for example, the actions can be registered as one sequence, or more than one if necessary. In 7-9-4 Creating a Project File, an example is shown with all actions registered as a single sequence.

·A sequence may include the following parameters.

Parameter

Transmission control parameter

Link word

Monitor time

Response notify method

Description

Set the method of control, such as flow control.

Note Select only model control for communications with the 3G3MV.

Set the area for sharing the data between the Programmable

Controller and Communications Board.

Note In 7-9-4 Creating a Project File, an example is shown without such an area set.

Set the periods to monitor the transmission and reception steps with timers Tr, Tfr, and Tfs.

Note Set a period of approximately 0.5 s each for communications with the 3G3MV.

A method to write reception data to the I/O memory of the

Programmable Controller.

Note Select “notify by scan” for communications with the 3G3MV.

CPU Unit

PMCR instruction

Communications

Board

Step 00

DSR message

(Write the RUN command and frequency reference.)

3G3MV

Response

Step 01

DSR message

Inverter status read

Sequence 000

Response

(Inverter status)

Step

·In a single step, a DSR message is sent and a response for the DSR message is received. A step may not include a response if it is a broadcast message.

7-40

Communications

Chapter 7

·In the case of repetitive actions to issue the RUN command and frequency reference to the Inverter and read the status of the Inverter, for example, the actions to give the RUN command and frequency reference is one step. The reason is that these register numbers are consecutive and can be sent with a single DSR message. The action to read the status of the Inverter is another step.

·A step includes a command and a maximum of two messages.

The above example uses the Send & Recv command. The DSR message and response are both messages.

·A step may include the following parameters.

Command

Parameter

Repeat counter

No. of retries

Send message

Recv message

Send & Recv message

Recv matrix

Send Wait Time

Response Write (with operand specified)

Description

The Send, Send & Recv, Wait, Flush, Open (ER-ON), or Close (ER-OFF) command is set.

Note In 7-9-4 Creating a Project File, an example is shown with the Send & Recv command used.

The Send command is used for a broadcast message.

A DSR message is set for the Send command used.

A response is set for the Recv command.

A DSR message and response are set for the Send &

Recv command.

If there are two or more responses for the Send or

Send & Recv command, the next process is selected per response.

The number (N) of times to repeat the step is set within a range from 0 to 255.

It is possible to change messages by making use of the number (N).

Note In 7-9-4 Creating a Project File, an example is shown with this function used for enabling three

Slaves to repeat the same process.

The number of times to retry the command can be set within a range from 0 to 9 only when the Send & Recv command is used.

Note It is recommended that the number be set to 3 or larger.

The waiting time until data is sent with the Send or

Send & Recv command executed.

Determines whether or not to write the reception data in the response.

Note In 7-9-4 Creating a Project File, an example is shown with this function used for writing the

Inverter status to the memory.

7-41

Communications

Parameter

Next process

Error processing

Chapter 7

Description

Determines which step is to be processed next or finishes the operation after the step is finished normally.

Determines which step is to be processed next or finishes the operation, if the step has an error.

Data Created by Protocol Support Tool

·A project file is used by the Protocol Support Tool to create and control data.

A project file consists of the following data.

Single project file

Protocol name

(Single protocol)

Protocol list Protocol name

Protocol name

A maximum of 20 protocols (A maximum of

1,000 sequences per project)

Protocol name

Trace list

Sequence 000/Sequence name

Sequence 001/Sequence name

Sequence 999/Sequence name

Send message list

A maximum of 60 sequences/protocol

The first sequence number and last sequence number are specified by each protocol.

Message name

Recv message list

Message name

A maximum of 300 messages

Recv matrix

Message name

Matrix name

A maximum of 100 matrixes

Sequence #jjj

Step 00

Step 01

A maximum of 16 steps

Step 15

Note The standard system protocol incorporated by the Communications Board cannot be edited or transferred. To make use of the standard system protocol, copy it to the project file and edit it.

In 7-9-4 Creating a Project File, an example to create a new project file is shown without making use of the standard system protocol.

7-42

Communications

Chapter 7

7-9-4 Creating a Project File

·The following description provides information about how to create a project file to issue the RUN command and frequency reference and read the Inverter status.

Design

·Select from I/O items, monitor items, and parameters the data to be exchanged according to the application. Then consider what sequence is required by using the protocol macro function.

Example: Writes control input items (such as the RUN command and multi-function input) of the Inverter and frequency reference, monitors the control output (such as error output and RUN output) of the Inverter, and monitors the Inverter status.

Three Inverters with Slave addresses from 01 to 03 are installed for communications.

Checking the Register Numbers

·In the above example, the following three registers are required.

Control Input: Register 0001 Hex for RUN command

Frequency Reference: Register 0002 Hex

Control Output: Register 002C Hex for Inverter status

Memory Allocations

·The PMCR instruction sends each Slave the data in consecutive words specified by the operand and beginning with the first word (S), and writes in the memory area beginning with the first word (D) the data received.

7-43

Communications

Chapter 7

·The following memory allocations are made in the above example.

SYSMAC CS1-series or C200HX/HG/HE

Programmable Controllers

C: Control data (see note)

Communications

Board

3G3MV

Note

Control data on the SYSMAC

C200HX/HG/HE is indicated.

The SYSMAC CS1 Series uses different control data.

Communications port

1: Port A

2: Port B

Data

Sequence No.

000 to 999 (BCD)

No. of data items send in accordance with PMCR instruction (000A)

No. of Slaves (0003)

First Slave address (0001)

RUN command to Slave 1

Frequency reference to Slave 1

Second Slave address (0002)

RUN command to Slave 2

Frequency reference to Slave 2

Third Slave address (0003)

RUN command to Slave 3

Frequency reference to Slave 3

No. of data items received in accordance with

PMCR instruction (0003)

Slave 1 Inverter status

Slave 2 Inverter status

Slave 3 Inverter status

Creating a New Project and Protocol

1. Select New from the File in the Menu Bar or click on the New icon with the left button of the mouse to create a new project.

2. If CX-Protocol is used, set the PC name, PC model, and network type according to the actual conditions.

Note 1. The network type refers to the type of the network connected to the Support

Software and it does not refer to the communications configuration between the

Programmable Controller and the 3G3MV Inverter.

Note 2. The above settings will not be displayed if the Protocol Support Tool is used.

3. Double-click on New Project with the left button of the mouse to display List of Pro-

tocols.

4. Click on List of Protocols with the left button of the mouse and click on a blank space with the right button of the mouse.

5. Select New Protocol.

7-44

Communications

Chapter 7

Creating a Sequence

1. Click on New Protocol with the left button of the mouse. Then click on a blank space with the right button of the mouse.

2. Select New Send & Recv Sequence.

The following table will appear. Set the parameters related to the sequence in the table.

* # Send & Recv sequence

000 Inverter I/O

Send & Recv

---

Link word Transmission control parameter

Set (Setting required)

Response Timer Tr

Scan 0.5

Timer

Tfr

0.5

Timer

Tfs

0.5

#

Sequence number. The sequence number is automatically set.

Send & Recv Sequence

The label (name) of the sequence. Input an appropriate, easy-to-distinguish name.

Link Word

Set the area for sharing the data between the Programmable Controller and Communications Board.

Note In this example, the link word is specified by the operand of the PMCR instruction.

Therefore, no link word is set here.

Transmission Control Parameter

Set the control method, such as flow control.

Note Select only model control for communications with the 3G3MV.

Response

A method to write reception data to the I/O memory of the Programmable Controller.

Note Select “notify by scan” for communications with the 3G3MV.

7-45

Communications

Chapter 7

Timer Tr

Timer Tfr

Timer Tfs

Set the periods to monitor the transmission and reception steps with timers Tr, Tfr, and

Tfs. The following timing chart shows the meaning of each monitor.

Be sure to set the periods according to the application.

The step will be retried if the step is not completed within the monitor periods. An error will occur if the step is not completed within the monitor time again.

Note Set a period of approximately 0.5 s each for communications with the 3G3MV.

Send & Recv

Monitored for Tfs period.

Monitored for Tr period.

Monitored for Tfr period.

Ts: Send wait time set per step. Nothing is sent during this period.

Tfs: Monitors the completion of the data sent. If the data transmission is not finished within this period, the data will be re-transmitted.

Tr: Monitors the response to be received. If the response is not returned within this period, the response will be re-transmitted.

Tfr: Monitors the reception completion of the response. If the response transmission is not finished within this period, the response will be re-transmitted.

NoteIf the Tr period is too long, the time required to detect a communications error will be longer, during which the Inverter cannot be controlled. Therefore, be sure to set an appropriate period.

Creating a Step

1. Double-click on Protocol with the left button of the mouse.

2. Click on Sequence with the left button of the mouse and click on a blank space with the right button of the mouse.

3. Select New Step.

The following table will appear. Set the parameters related to the step in the table.

* Step Repeat counter

00 j

Reset/R

(1)

Reset/R

(1)

Command

Send &

Recv

Send &

Recv

No. of retries

---

Send wait time

---

Send message

Input send

Status

Recv message

Input response

Read response

Response write

Yes

Next process

End

Error process

Abort

Abort j

7-46

Communications

Step

Step number. The step number is automatically set.

Chapter 7

Repeat Counter

The number (N) of times to repeat the step is set within a range from 0 to 255.

It is possible to change messages by making use of the number (N).

Note In this example, the same message is sent to three Slaves with addresses different to each other. Therefore, the number is set to 3 in word S + 1. The number of

Slaves is specified by the operand. Therefore, select Word, use the Edit command to set Data Address to Operand, and set 0N + 1 in order to select word S +

In the above table, “Reset” means that the repeat counter must be reset first in the step.

Command

Set the commands, such as Send, Recv, and Send & Recv.

Note Only the Send & Recv command is used for communications with the 3G3MV except for sending broadcast messages, in which case the Send & Recv command is used.

No. of Retries

Set the number of times to retry the command within a range from 0 to 9.

Note It is recommended that the number be set to 3 or larger. If a transmission error occurs due to noise, the transmission of the command will be retried. If the number is set to 3, an error will be detected if the transmission fails three times.

Send Wait Time

The waiting time until the data is sent.

Note For communications with the 3G3MV, if data is repeatedly transmitted to the same Slave, set the waiting time to 10 ms or more.

In this example, the DSR message is sent to Slaves 1, 2, and 3 one by one. Therefore, no send wait time is set.

Send Message and Recv Message

Set the labels of the DSR message and response to be used.

Note Make these settings after deciding the labels in Send Message Detail Settings and Recv Message Detail Settings.

7-47

Communications

Chapter 7

Response Write

Determine whether or not to write the reception data in the response.

Note Always set this parameter to Yes for communications with 3G3MV.

Next Process

Determine which step is to be processed next or finish the operation after the step finishes normally.

Note In this example, step 00 is set to Next and step 01 is set to END because the sequence completes by executing steps 00 and 01.

Error Processing

If the step has an error, determine which step is to be processed next or finish the operation.

Note In this example, the parameter will be set to Abort to interrupt the sequence if an error occurs.

* Message Header

(h)

®j Input send

Terminator

®j Status

Check code (c)

*CRC-16

(65535)

(2Byte

BIN)

*CRC-16

(65535)

(2Byte

BIN)

Length (l) Address (a)

(0) (1Byte

BIN)

Data

(R (3N+2), 1) <a> + [10] + [00] +

[01] + [00] + [02] +

(R (3N + 3), 4) +

<c>

(R (3N+2), 1) <a> + [03] + [00] +

[2C] + [00] + [01] +

<c>

®j

Message

The label (name) of the sequence. Input an appropriate, easy-to-distinguish name.

Note Set the label in the send message box in the table shown under Creating a Step.

Header (h)

Terminator (t)

Set the header and terminator.

Note No header or terminator is used for communications with the 3G3MV. Therefore, set both to No.

Check Code (c)

Set the check code.

7-48

Communications

Chapter 7

Note The CRC-16 check code is used for communications with the 3G3MV. Select the

CRC-16 check code and set the initial value to 65535.

Select Reverse for the conversion method. Then select BIN.

Length (l)

Set the length of the data.

Note All communications with the 3G3MV are performed in byte units. Select 1 Byte and BIN. Select No for reading data because there is no data to be read.

Address (a)

Set the addresses of the Slaves.

Note In this example, the Slave addresses are set in S + 2, S + 5, and S + 8. Therefore, retrieve the data from those locations.

The address is set in the LSB of each word. To read the byte, select Variable

(Reverse), otherwise the data is read from the LSB. Then click on Execute

Address with the left button of the mouse.

Select Read R () and set Data/Address to the operand (3N + 2) using the number

(N) of times to repeat the step.

Set Data Size to 1 byte as a default. If the default value has been changed, set it to

0N + 1.

Data

Set the DSR message in details.

·DSR Message Requesting that the RUN Command and Frequency Reference be

Written

The DSR message to write data to two registers from register 0001 Hex (the RUN command) consists of the following items.

CRC-16 check (Set with <c>)

Next register data

Start register data

Set with variables

Number of bytes of attached data (set with <l>)

Number of write data registers: 2

Write start register number (RUN command: 0001)

Function code (Write 10)

Slave address (Set with <a>)

Set data: <a> + [10] + [00] + [01] + [00] + [02] + + (R (3N + 3), 4) + <c>

<a>

The Slave address is set in the address box. Insert the address with the Insert icon.

7-49

Communications

Chapter 7

[10] + [00] + [01] + [00] + [02]

Set the constants contained in the DSR message.

Use Set Constant and set the constants in Hex.

The length is set in the length box. Insert the length by using the Insert icon. The length is the number of bytes of the succeeding data (R(3N + 3), 4). The length is automatically set by the CX-Protocol.

(R(3N+3), 4)

The Inverter’s actual data to be sent. This example selects Variable and Read R() and sets the operand. Set Data to 3N + 3 because the RUN command data uses four bytes each from S + 3, S + 6, and S + 9.

Set Data Size to 0N + 4 so that it will be set to four bytes.

<c>

The check code is set in the check code box. Insert the check code by using the

Insert icon. All the data including the address data before the check code is operated. Mark all the items if the Protocol Support Tool is used. The check code is automatically set by the CX-Protocol.

·DSR Message to Read the Inverter Status

The DSR message to read the Inverter status from register 002C Hex consists of the following items.

CRC-16 check (Set with <c>)

Number of read data registers: 1

Read start register number (Inverter status: 002C)

Function code (Read 03)

Slave address (Set with <a>)

Set data: <a> + [03] + [00] + [2C] + [00] + [01] + <c>

Set the address data, constant data, and check code data.

Recv Message Detail Settings

1. With the left button of the mouse, click on List of Recv Messages. Then click on a blank space with the right button of the mouse.

2. Select New and Recv Message.

The following table will appear. Set the send message in the table.

7-50

Communications

Chapter 7

* Message Header

(h)

®j Input response

®j Read response

Terminator Check code

(c)

*CRC-16

(65535)

(2Byte BIN)

*CRC-16

(65535)

(2Byte BIN)

Length (l) Address (a)

(0) (1Byte

BIN)

(R (3N+2),

Data

<a> + [10] + [00] +

[01] + [00] + [02] +

<c>

<a> + [03] + + (W

(1N + 1), 2) + <c>

®j

Message

The label (name) of the response. Input an appropriate, easy-to-distinguish name.

Note Set the label in the Recv message box in the table shown under Creating a Step.

Header (h)

Terminator (t)

Set the header and terminator.

Note No header or terminator is used for communications with the 3G3MV. Therefore, set both to No.

Check Code (c)

Set the check code.

Note The CRC-16 check code is used for communications with the 3G3MV. Select the

CRC-16 check code and set the initial value to 65535.

Select Reverse for the conversion method. Then select BIN.

Length (l)

Set the length of the data.

Note All communications with the 3G3MV are performed in byte units. Select 1 Byte and BIN. Select No for reading data because there is no data to be read.

Address (a)

Set the addresses of the Slaves.

Note In this example, the Slave addresses are set in S + 2, S + 5, and S + 8. Therefore, retrieve the data from those locations.

The address is set in the LSB of each word. To read the byte, select Variable

(Reverse), otherwise the data will be read from the LSB. Then click on Execute

Address with the left button of the mouse.

Select Read R () and set Data/Address to the operand (3N + 2) using the number

7-51

Communications

Chapter 7

(N) of times to repeat the step.

Set Data Size to 1 byte as a default. If the default value has been changed, set it to

0N + 1.

Data

Set the expected response in details.

·Response to the RUN Command and Frequency Reference

The response to the DSR message written consists of the following items.

CRC-16 check (Set with <c>)

Number of write data registers: 2

Write start register number (RUN command: 0001)

Function code (Write 10)

Slave address (Set with <a>)

Set data: <a> + [10] + [00] + [01] + [00] + [02] + <c>

<a>

The Slave address is set in the address box. Insert the address with the Insert icon.

[10] + [00] + [01] + [00] + [02]

Set the constants contained in the response.

Use Set Constant and set the constants in Hex.

<c>

The check code is set in the check code box. Insert the check code by using the

Insert icon. All the data including the address data before the check code is used.

Mark all the items if the Protocol Support Tool is used. The check code is automatically set by the CX-Protocol.

·Response to the Inverter Status Read

The response to the DSR message to request the Inverter status in register 002C Hex consists of the following items.

CRC-16 check (Set with <c>)

Inverter status data (Set with variable)

Number of bytes of attached data (set with <l>)

Function code (Write 10)

Slave address (Set with <a>)

Set data: <a> + [03] + + (W (1N + 1), 2) + <c>

<a., [03], <c>

The address data, constant data, and check code data are the same as the above.

<l>

The length is set in the length box. Insert the length by using the Insert icon. The length

7-52

Communications

Chapter 7

is the number of bytes of the succeeding data (W(1N + 1), 2). The length is automatically set by the CX-Protocol.

(W(1N + 1), 2)

The Inverter’s actual data is to be sent. This example selects Variable and Read R() and sets the operand. Set Data to 1N + 1 because the RUN command data uses four bytes each from D + 3, D + 6, and D + 9.

Set Data Size to 0N + 2 so that it will be set to two bytes.

7-9-5 Ladder Program

·Transfer the created protocol to the Communications Board.

·The following example describes how to control the Inverter with this protocol.

·Before using this program in your system, be sure to check the word and data memory allocations and change them if necessary so that there will be no word or data memory duplication.

·This program will stop all communications if a communications error or fault occurs. Be sure to set n151 for communications time-over detection selection to 0 through 2 so that the system will stop with time-over detection.

Memory Allocations

Starting Communications and Status Signals

00000

00001

00002

Word Functions common to all Slaves

Inverter control communications (continued when set to ON)

Communications error output (on hold when a communications error or fault occurs)

Communications fault reset

7-53

Communications

Chapter 7

Inverter Control Input (Register 0001 RUN Command)

Word Slave 1 function Word Slave 2 function Word Slave 3 function

00100 RUN command 00200 RUN command 00300 RUN command

00101 Forward/Reverse

00102 External fault

00201 Forward/Reverse

00202 External fault

00301 Forward/Reverse

00302 External fault

00103 Fault reset

00104 Multi-function input

00105 Multi-function input

00106 Multi-function input

00203 Fault reset 00303 Fault reset

00204 Multi-function input 1 00304 Multi-function input

00205 Multi-function input 2 00305 Multi-function input

00206 Multi-function input 3 00306 Multi-function input

00107 Multi-function input

00108 Multi-function input

00109 Multi-function input

00110 Multi-function input

00111 Always set to 0.

00112 Always set to 0.

00113 Always set to 0.

00114 Always set to 0.

00115 Always set to 0.

00207 Multi-function input 4 00307 Multi-function input

00211 Always set to 0.

00212 Always set to 0.

00213 Always set to 0.

00214 Always set to 0.

00215 Always set to 0.

00208 Multi-function input 5 00308 Multi-function input

00209 Multi-function input 6 00309 Multi-function input

00210 Multi-function input 7 00310 Multi-function input

00311 Always set to 0.

00312 Always set to 0.

00313 Always set to 0.

00314 Always set to 0.

00315 Always set to 0.

Frequency Reference of Inverter (Register 0002 Frequency Reference)

D0001

D0002

D0003

DM Function

Slave 1 frequency reference

Slave 2 frequency reference

Slave 3 frequency reference

7-54

Communications

Chapter 7

Inverter Control Output (Register 002C Inverter Status)

Word Slave 1 function Word Slave 2 function Word Slave 3 function

01100 RUN 01200 RUN 01300 RUN

01101 Stop 01201 Stop 01301 Stop

01102 Frequency coincide 01202 Frequency coincide 01302 Frequency coincide

01103 Alarm (Nonfatal error)

01104 Frequency detection

01105 Frequency detection

01106 Inverter ready

01107 UV

01108 Base block

01203 Alarm (Nonfatal error)

01204 Frequency detection

01205 Frequency detection

01206 Inverter ready

01207 UV

01208 Base block

01303 Alarm (Nonfatal error)

01304 Frequency detection

01305 Frequency detection

01306 Inverter ready

01307 UV

01308 Base block

01109 Frequency reference mode

01110 RUN command mode

01111 Overtorque detection

01112 0 (Not used)

01113 Fault retry

01114 Fault

01115 Communications time-over

01209 Frequency reference mode

01210 RUN command mode

01211 Overtorque detection

01212 0 (Not used)

01213 Fault retry

01214 Fault

01215 Communications time-over

01309 Frequency reference mode

01310 RUN command mode

01311 Overtorque detection

01312 0 (Not used)

01313 Fault retry

01314 Fault

01315 Communications time-over

Area Used by Operand of PMCR Instruction

·Control Data: C

Area

Communications port A selected

Sequence 000 set

Note Control data on the SYSMAC

C200HX/HG/HE is indicated. The

SYSMAC CS1 Series uses different control data.

7-55

Communications

Chapter 7

·Send Data: S

D1000

D1001

D1002

D1003

D1004

D1005

D1006

D1007

D1008

D1009

D1010

Area

000A (No. of send data items: 10) (see note 1)

0003 (No. of Slaves)

0001 (Slave 1 address)

RUN command to Slave 1

Frequency reference to Slave 1

0002 (Slave 2 address)

RUN command to Slave 2

Frequency reference to Slave 2

0003 (Slave 3 address)

RUN command to Slave 3

Frequency reference to Slave 3

·Recv data: D

D2000

D2001

D2002

D2003

DM Area

0003 (No. of Recv data items: 3) (see note 2)

Slave 1 Inverter status

Slave 2 Inverter status

Slave 3 Inverter status

Note 1. Set the number of send data items in Hex to the number of words of D10001 through D1010 (10).

Note 2. The number of words of D2001 through D2003 (3) is written in Hex the number of Recv data items.

7-56

Communications

Ladder Program

Chapter 7

Protocol

Macro

Execution

Flag

Communications

Port Enabled

Flag

Note

The Communications Port Enabled

Flag will be required if the SYSMAC

CS1 Series is used.

Communications

Port Abort Flag

7-57

Communications

Chapter 7

7-9-6 Communications Response Time

The communications response times for communications with an Inverter via the

RS-422/485 port of an OMRON-made Communications Board are detailed below. Use this information as a reference when deciding the number of Slaves to be connected to one network, and when considering the timing of input and output signals.

Communications Time for One Message

·A wide variety of programs for RS-422/485 communications can be created using the protocol macro function. The communications times will vary according to the contents of the program.

·In general, the communications time for one message can be calculated using the following formula.

Communications time = [No. of bytes in DSR message ´ 10 (see note 1) ´ (1/baud rate) ´ 1,000 (ms)] + [No. of bytes in response ´ 10 ´ (1/baud rate) ´ 1,000 (ms)] + [24

´ (1/baud rate) ´ 1,000 (ms)] + send wait time setting n156 (ms) + protocol macro waiting time (see note 2) (ms)

Note 1. The reason that the number of bytes in the DSR message and response is multiplied by 10 is because both the start bit and the stop bit require one bit each.

(1 byte = 8 bits) + (start bit: 1 bit) + (stop bit: 1 bit) = 10 bits

Note 2. With RS-422/485 communications, set at least 20 ms as the protocol macro waiting time.

Calculation Example

The communications time required for one Slave in the protocol macro created in 7-9-7

Creating a Project File, can be calculated according to the following formula. (Baud rate

= 19,200 bps.)

Communications time = [(DSR message to write data (13 bytes) + DSR message to read (8 bytes)) ´ 10 ´ (1/19,200) ´ 1,000 (ms)] + [(write response (8 bytes) + read response (7 bytes)) ´ 10 ´ (1/19,200) ´ 1,000 (ms)] + [24 ´ (1/19,200) ´ 1,000 (ms) ´

2] + [10 (ms) ´ 2] + [20 (ms) ´ 2] = 81.2 (ms)

Note If there are N Slaves, the total communications time will be N ´ 81.2 ms. Consequently, the more Slaves that are used, the longer the communications time will be. If the number of Slaves is too high, it is possible that the detection time of 2 s for communications time-over will be exceeded. In this case, either disable the time-over detection function and use a different sequence to detect communications errors, or increase the number of Masters thereby decreasing the number of

Slaves per Master.

7-58

Communications

Chapter 7

I/O Response Time

·The communications processing times for the Inverter are as follows.

Inverter communications input scan: 8 ms

Inverter communications output scan: 8 ms

Internal processing time for the Inverter: Approx. 20 ms

·The I/O response times for the Inverter are illustrated in the following diagram.

Ladder program cycle time

Communications time ´ 2

Inverter I/O scan

Internal processing for the Inverter

Max. input response time

Max. output response time

7-59

Chapter 8 Maintenance

Operations

8-1 Protective and Diagnostic Functions

8-2 Troubleshooting

8-3 Maintenance and Inspection

Maintenance Operations

8-1 Protective and Diagnostic Functions

Chapter 8

8-1-1 Fault Detection (Fatal Error)

The Inverter will detect the following faults if the Inverter or motor burns or the internal circuitry of the Inverter malfunctions. When the Inverter detects a fault, the fault code will be displayed on the Digital Operator, the fault contact output will operate, and the Inverter output will be shut off causing the motor to coast to a stop. The stopping method can be selected for some faults, and the selected stopping method will be used with these faults. If a fault has occurred, refer to the following table to identify and correct the cause of the fault. Use one of the following methods to reset the fault after restarting the Inverter.

Turn ON the fault reset signal. A multi-function input (n050 to n056) must be set to 5 (Fault Reset).

Press the STOP/RESET Key on the Digital Operator.

Turn the main circuit power supply OFF and then ON again.

Fault Displays and Processing

Fault display

Fault name and meaning

Overcurrent (OC)

The Inverter output current is as high as or higher than 250% of the rated output current.

Probable cause and remedy

· A short-circuit or ground fault has occurred and at the Inverter output.

® Check and correct the motor power cable.

· The V/f setting is incorrect.

® Reduce the V/f set voltage.

· The motor capacity is too large for the Inverter.

® Reduce the motor capacity to the maximum permissible motor capacity.

· The magnetic contactor on the output side of the

Inverter has been opened and closed.

® Rearrange the sequence so that the magnetic contactor will not open or close while the

Inverter has current output.

· The output circuit of the Inverter is damaged.

® Replace the Inverter.

8-2

Maintenance Operations

Chapter 8

Fault display

OU uU1

Fault name and meaning

Overvoltage (OV)

The main circuit DC voltage has reached the overvoltage detection level (410 VDC for 200-V

Inverters, 820 VDC for

400-V Inverters)

Main circuit undervoltage (UV1)

The main circuit DC voltage has reached the undervoltage detection level (200 VDC for the

3G3MV-A2j, 160 VDC for the 3G3MV-ABj, and

400 VDC for the

3G3MV-A4j).

Probable cause and remedy

· There is excessive regenerative energy with no braking resistor or Braking Resistor Unit connected.

® Connect the Braking Resistor Unit or a braking resistor.

® Increase the deceleration time.

· The regenerative energy has not been processed though a braking resistor or Braking Resistor Unit.

® Set n092 for stall prevention during deceleration to 1 (disable)

· The braking resistor or Braking Resistor Unit is not wired properly.

® Check and correct the wiring.

· The power supply voltage is too high.

® Decrease the voltage so it will be within specifications.

· There is excessive regenerative energy due to overshooting at the time of acceleration.

® Suppress the overshooting as much as possible.

· The braking transistor is damaged.

® Change the Inverter.

· Power supply to the Inverter has phase loss, power input terminal screws are loose, or the power cable is disconnected.

® Check the above and take necessary countermeasures.

· Incorrect power supply voltage

® Make sure that the power supply voltage is within specifications.

· Momentary power interruption has occurred.

® Use the momentary power interruption compensation (Set n081 so that the Inverter restarts after power is restored)

® Improve the power supply.

· The internal circuitry of the Inverter is damaged.

® Change the Inverter.

8-3

Maintenance Operations

Chapter 8

Fault display

uU2

Fault name and meaning

Control power supply undervoltage (UV2)

The control power supply voltage has reached the undervoltage detection level.

Radiation fin overheated (OH)

The temperature of the radiation fins of the

Inverter has reached

110_C ± 10_C.

Probable cause and remedy

· Internal circuit fault.

® Turn the Inverter OFF and ON.

® Change the Inverter if the same fault occurs again.

· The ambient temperature is too high.

® Ventilate the Inverter or install a cooling unit.

· The load is excessive.

® Reduce the load.

® Decrease the Inverter capacity.

· The V/f setting is incorrect.

® Reduce the V/f set voltage.

· The acceleration/deceleration time is too short.

® Increase the acceleration/deceleration time.

· The ventilation is obstructed.

® Change the location of the Inverter to meet the installation conditions.

· The cooling fan of the Inverter does not work.

® Replace the cooling fan.

8-4

Maintenance Operations

Chapter 8

Fault display

OL1

OL2

Fault name and meaning

Motor overload (OL1)

The electric thermal relay actuated the motor overload protective function.

Calculate the heat radiation of the motor from the output current of the Inverter based on the rated motor current

(n036), motor protection characteristics (n037), and motor protective time setting (n038).

Inverter overload (OL2)

The electronic thermal relay has actuated the

Inverter overload protective function.

Probable cause and remedy

· The load is excessive.

® Reduce the load.

® Increase the motor capacity.

· The V/f setting is incorrect.

® Reduce the V/f set voltage.

· The value in n11 for maximum voltage frequency is low.

® Check the motor nameplate and set n11 to the rated frequency.

· The acceleration/deceleration time is too short.

® Increase the acceleration/deceleration time.

· The value in n036 for rated motor current is incorrect.

® Check the motor nameplate and set n036 to the rated current.

· The Inverter is driving more than one motor.

® Disable the motor overload detection function and install an electronic thermal relay for each of the motors.

The motor overload detection function is disabled by setting n036 to 0.0 or n037 to 2.

· The motor protective time setting in n038 is short.

® Set n038 to 8 (the default value).

· The load is excessive.

® Reduce the load.

· The V/f setting is incorrect.

® Reduce the V/f set voltage.

· The acceleration/deceleration time is too short.

® Increase the acceleration/deceleration time.

· The Inverter capacity is insufficient.

® Use an Inverter model with a higher capacity.

8-5

Maintenance Operations

Chapter 8

Fault display

OL3

Fault name and meaning

Overtorque detection

(OL3)

There has been a current or torque the same as or greater than the setting in n098 for overtorque detection level and that in n099 for overtorque detection time. A fault has been detected with n096 for overtorque detection function selection set to 2 or 4.

Probable cause and remedy

· The mechanical system is locked or has a failure.

® Check the mechanical system and correct the cause of overtorque.

· The parameter settings were incorrect.

® Adjust the n098 and n099 parameters according to the mechanical system.

Increase the set values in n098 and n099.

efj f00 f01

External fault j (EFj)

An external fault has been input from a multi-function input.

A multi-function input 1 to

7 set to 3 or 4 has operated. The EF number indicates the number of the corresponding input (S1 to S7).

· An external fault was input from a multi-function input.

® Remove the cause of the external fault.

· The sequence is incorrect.

® Check and change the external fault input sequence including the input timing and NO or

NC contact.

Digital Operator transmission fault 1

(F00)

No communications were possible with the Digital

Operator for 5 s or more after the Inverter had been turned ON.

· The Digital Operator may not be mounted properly.

® Turn OFF the Inverter, dismount and mount the

Digital Operator, and turn ON the Inverter.

· The Digital Operator has a failure.

® Change the Digital Operator.

· The Inverter has a failure.

® Change the Inverter.

Digital Operator transmission fault 2

(F01)

A transmission fault continued for 5 s or more after communications with the Digital Operator had failed.

· The Digital Operator may not be mounted properly.

® Turn OFF the Inverter, dismount and mount the

Digital Operator, and turn ON the Inverter.

· The Digital Operator has a failure.

® Change the Digital Operator.

· The Inverter has a failure.

® Change the Inverter.

8-6

Maintenance Operations

Chapter 8

Fault display

f04 f05 f06 f07

OPR

Fault name and meaning

Initial memory fault

(F04)

An error in the built-in

EEPROM of the Inverter has been detected.

Analog-to-digital converter fault (F05)

An analog-to-digital converter fault has been detected.

Option Card fault (F06)

An Option Card fault was detected. The Inverter will detect this error if the output or verify signal of the Card has a fault.

Digital Operator fault

(F07)

An error in the built-in control circuit of the

Digital Operator has been detected.

The EEPROM of the

Digital Operator or the analog-to-digital converter has a failure.

Digital Operator connection error (OPR)

The Inverter will detect this error if n010 for

Digital Operator connection error processing selection is set to 1.

Probable cause and remedy

· The internal circuitry of the Inverter has a fault.

® Initialize the Inverter with n001 set to 8 or 9 and turn the Inverter OFF and ON.

® Replace the Inverter if the same fault occurs again.

· The internal circuitry of the Inverter has a fault.

® Turn the Inverter OFF and ON.

® Replace the Inverter if the same fault occurs again.

· The Option Card may not be connected properly.

® Turn OFF the Inverter, dismount and mount the

Option Card or attachment, and turn ON the

Inverter.

· The Option Card has a failure.

® Change the Option Card.

· The attachment has a failure.

® Change the attachment.

· The internal circuitry of the Digital Operator has a fault.

® Turn the Digital Operator OFF and ON.

® Replace the Digital Operator if the same fault occurs again.

· The Digital Operator may not be mounted properly.

® Turn OFF the Inverter, dismount and mount the

Digital Operator, and turn ON the Inverter.

8-7

Maintenance Operations

Chapter 8

Fault display

OFF

Fault name and meaning

Communications time-over (CE)

Normal RS-422/485 communications were not established within

2 s. The Inverter will detect this error if n151 for RS-422/485 communications time over detection selection is set to 0, 1, or 2.

Emergency stop (STP)

An emergency stop alarm is input to a multi-function input. (A multi-function input from

1 to 7 that was set to 19 or 21 has operated.)

Power supply error

Control power supply voltage is insufficient.

Probable cause and remedy

· A short-circuit, ground fault, or disconnection has occurred on the communications line.

® Check and correct the line.

· The termination resistance setting is incorrect.

® In the case of RS-422 communications, set pin

1 of SW2 of all Inverters to ON. In the case of

RS-485 communications, set pin 1 of SW2 of only the Inverter located at each end of the network to ON.

· Noise influence.

® Do not wire the communications line along with power lines in the same conduit.

® Use the twisted-pair shielded wire for the communications line.

· Master’s program error.

® Check and correct the program so that communications will be performed more than once every 2-s period.

· Communications circuit damage.

® If the same error is detected as a result of a self-diagnostic test, change the Inverter.

· An emergency stop alarm is input.

® Remove the cause of the fault.

· The sequence is incorrect.

® Check and change the external fault input sequence including the input timing and NO or

NC contact.

· No power supply is provided.

® Check and correct the power supply wire and voltage.

· Terminal screws are loose.

® Check and tighten the terminal screws.

· Operator connectors are faulty.

® If only the Operator indicator is not lit, (i.e., if the RUN and ALARM indicators are lit), check and correct the

Operator’s connectors.

· The Inverter is damaged.

® Replace the Inverter.

8-8

Maintenance Operations

FbL

PF (See note.)

LF (See note.)

Chapter 8

Feedback loss fault (FbL)

A feedback input was interrupted during PID control execution. (This fault is detected when an input level below the feedback loss detection level set in n137 persists for longer than the feedback loss detection time set in n138.)

Main circuit voltage fault

(PF)

The main circuit DC voltage has oscillated erroneously when regeneration was not being performed.

This fault is detected when a voltage fluctuation greater than the input open-phase detection level set in n166 persists for longer than the input open-phase detection time set in n167.

Output open-phase fault

(LF)

An open phase has occurred at the Inverter’s output.

This fault is detected when a current in any of the Inverter output phases less than the output open-phase detection level set in n168 persists for longer than the output open-phase detection time set in n169.

· Feedback wiring error.

® Check for and correct any cable disconnection or faulty wiring.

· Feedback sensor error

® Check sensor status and replace any defective sensors.

· PID target value input error or feedback loss detection setting error

® Correct the target value input so that it is outside of the feedback loss detection range. Correct the feedback loss detection parameter settings (n137, n138).

· Feedback input circuit error

® Replace the Inverter.

· Momentary power failure.

® Either apply countermeasures against momentary power failures or disable the input open-phase detection.

· Input power supply open phase.

® Check for and correct any main circuit power supply disconnections or faulty wiring.

· Excessive input power supply voltage fluctuation or bad line voltage balance.

® Check the power supply voltage. Apply measures to stabilize the power supply, or disable the input open-phase detection.

· Main circuit capacitor failure.

® If this fault is occurring frequently and there is no error at the power supply, replace the Inverter or disable the input open-phase detection. (Also check the usage time with the accumulated operating time function.)

· Output cable is disconnected.

® Check for and correct any output cable disconnections or faulty wiring.

· Motor winding disconnected.

® Check the motor’s line resistance. If winding is broken, replace the motor.

· Output terminal screws are loose.

® Check and tighten the output terminal screws.

· Inverter output transistor open breakdown.

® Replace the Inverter.

8-9

Maintenance Operations

Chapter 8

GF (See note.)

SC (See note.)

BUS

Ground fault (GF)

The ground current at the

Inverter has exceeded approximately 50% of the

Inverter’s rated output current.

Load short circuit (SC)

The Inverter output or load is short-circuited.

Communications error

(Option Unit)

A communications error occurred at the Option Unit.

· Motor burnout or insulation damage.

® Check the motor’s insulation resistance. If conducting, replace the motor.

· Cable is damaged.

® Check the resistance between the cable and FG. If conducting, replace the cable.

· Cable and FG floating capacity

® If the cable is longer than 100 m, lower the carrier frequency.

® Apply measures to reduce the floating capacity. Don’t use metal ducts, use a separate cable for each phase, include an AC reactor in the output side, etc.

· Motor burnout or insulation damage.

® Check the resistance between the motor phases. If abnormal, replace the Inverter.

· Cable is damaged.

® Check the resistance between the cables. If conducting, replace the cable.

· Communications cable wired incorrectly, short-circuited, or disconnected.

® Check and correct the communications cable wiring.

· Data destroyed by noise.

® Change to a dedicated communications cable or to shielded cable, and mask the shield or ground it at the power supply.

® Use a dedicated communications power supply, and connect a noise filter to the power supply input side.

· Option Unit is damaged.

® If communications errors frequently occur and there is no problem with the wiring, replace the Option Unit.

Note This fault is displayed for 200 and 400-V, 5.5-/7.5-kW Inverters only.

8-10

Maintenance Operations

8-1-2 Warning Detection (Nonfatal Error)

Chapter 8

The warning detection is a type of Inverter protective function that does not operate the fault contact output and returns the Inverter to its original status once the cause of the error has been removed. The Digital Operator flashes and display the detail of the error. If a warning occurs, take appropriate countermeasures according to the table below.

Note Some warnings or some cases stop the operation of the Inverter as described in the table.

Warning Displays and Processing

Fault display

(flashing)

Fault name and Meaning

Main circuit undervoltage

(UV)

The main circuit DC voltage has reached the undervoltage detection level (200 VDC for the

3G3MV-A2j, 160 VDC for the

3G3MV-ABj, and 400 VDC for the 3G3MV-A4j).

(flashing)

Probable cause and remedy

· Power supply to the Inverter has phase loss, power input terminal screws are loose, or the power line is disconnected.

® Check the above and take necessary countermeasures.

· Incorrect power supply voltage

® Make sure that the power supply voltage is within specifications.

· The power supply voltage is too high.

® Decrease the voltage so it will be within specifications.

(flashing)

OH3

(flashing)

Main circuit overvoltage

The main circuit DC voltage has reached the overvoltage detection level (410 VDC for

200-V Inverters, 820 VDC for

400-V Inverters).

Radiation fin overheated (OH)

The temperature of the radiation fins of the Inverter has reached 110_C ± 10_C.

Warning/Fault contacts do not change state.

OH3 (Inverter overheating pre-alarm)

OH3 signal is input.

· The ambient temperature is too high.

® Ventilate the Inverter or install a cooling unit.

· Release the input of inverter overheating pre-alarm signal.

8-11

Maintenance Operations

Fault display

cal

(flashing)

Chapter 8

Fault name and Meaning

Communications standby

(CAL)

No normal DSR message has been received during

RS-422/4895 communications.

The Inverter detects this alarm only when RUN command selection (n003) is set to 2 or frequency reference selection

(n004) is set to 6. Until the alarm is reset, no input other than communications input will be ignored.

Probable cause and remedy

· A short-circuit, ground fault, or disconnection has occurred on the communications line.

® Check and correct the line.

· The termination resistance setting is incorrect.

® In the case of RS-422 communications, set pin 1 of SW2 of all Inverters to ON. In the case of

RS-485 communications, set pin 1 of

SW2 of only the Inverter located at each end of the network to ON.

· Master’s program error.

® Check the start of communications and correct the program.

· Communications circuit damage.

® If the same error is detected as a result of a self-diagnostic test, change the Inverter.

8-12

Maintenance Operations

Fault display

OP1

(flashing)

OP2

(flashing)

OP3

(flashing)

OP4

(flashing)

OP5

(flashing)

OP9

(flashing)

OL3

(flashing)

Chapter 8

Fault name and Meaning Probable cause and remedy

Operation error (OPj)

(Parameter setting error)

Overtorque detection (OL3)

· The values in n050 through n056 for multi-function inputs 1 through 7 have been duplicated.

® Check and correct the values.

· The V/f pattern settings do not satisfy the following condition.

n016 n014 < n013 n011

® Check and correct the set value.

· The rated motor current set in n036 exceeds 150% of the rated output current of the Inverter.

® Check and correct the set value.

· The frequency reference upper limit set in n036 and the frequency reference lower limit set in n034 do not satisfy the following condition.

n033 n034

® Check and correct the set values.

· The jump frequencies set in n083 to n085 do not satisfy the following condition.

n083 n084 n085

® Check and correct the set values.

· The carrier frequency set in n080 is incorrect. An attempt was made to set a value that is not within a permissible range.

® Check and correct the set value.

· The mechanical system is locked or has a failure.

® Check the mechanical system and correct the cause of overtorque.

· The parameter settings were incorrect.

® Adjust the n098 and n099 parameters according to the mechanical system.

Increase the set values in n98 and n099.

8-13

Maintenance Operations

Fault display

UL3

(flashing)

UL3 ser

(flashing) bb

(flashing)

Chapter 8

Fault name and Meaning

ON: Warning

UL3 (Undertorque detection)

Flashing: fault contacts do not change state.

V/f mode: Inverter output current fell below the preset value in constant n118.

Vector mode: Motor current or torque fell below the preset value in constants n097 and n118.

OFF: Protective operation

ON: Output is shut OFF and motor coasts to a stop.

When undertorque is detected, inverter performs operation according to the preset setting of constant n117.

Sequence error (SER)

A sequence change has been input while the Inverter is in operation.

Local or remote selection is input while the Inverter is in operation.

Note The Inverter coasts to a stop.

External base block (bb)

The external base block command has been input.

Note The Inverter coasts to a stop.

Probable cause and remedy

· Load (output current or output torque) is too low.

® Check the driven machine and correct the cause of the fault, or decrease the value of constant n118 up to the lowest value allowed for the machine.

· A sequence error has occurred.

® Check and correct the sequence.

· The external base block command has been input.

® Remove the cause of external base block input.

· The sequence is incorrect.

® Check and change the external fault input sequence including the input timing and NO or NC contact.

8-14

Maintenance Operations

Fault display

(flashing)

Chapter 8

Fault name and Meaning Probable cause and remedy

Forward- and reverse-rotation input (EF)

The forward and reverse commands are input to the control circuit terminals simultaneously for 0.5 s or more.

Note The Inverter stops according to the method set in n04.

· A sequence error has occurred.

® Check and adjust the local or remote selection sequence.

8-15

Maintenance Operations

Fault display

(flashing)

FAn

(flashing)

Chapter 8

Fault name and Meaning Probable cause and remedy

Emergency stop (STP)

The Digital Operator stops operating.

The STOP/RESET Key on the

Digital Operator is pressed while the Inverter is operating according to the forward or reverse command through the control circuit terminals.

Note The Inverter stops according to the method set in n04.

The emergency stop alarm signal is input as multi-function input.

A multi-function input 1 to 7 set to 20 or 22 has been used.

Note The Inverter stops according to the method set in n005.

The Inverter decelerates to a stop in deceleration time 2 with n005 set to 0.

Cooling fan fault (FAN)

The cooling fan has been locked.

· The parameter setting was incorrect.

® Check that the n007 parameter setting for STOP/RESET Key function selection is correct.

· An emergency stop alarm is input to a multi-function input.

® Remove the cause of the fault or correct the input sequence.

· The cooling fan wiring has a fault.

® Turn OFF the Inverter, dismount the fan, and check and repair the wiring.

· The cooling fan in not in good condition.

® Check and remove the foreign material or dust on the fan.

· The cooling fan is beyond repair.

® Replace the fan.

8-16

Maintenance Operations

Chapter 8

Fault display

oH3

Fault name and Meaning

FbL (flashing) Feedback loss fault (FbL)

Inverter overheating warning (oH3)

An Inverter overheating warning signal was input from an external control terminal set to multi-function input.

Communications time over (CE)

RS-422 or RS-485 communications were not properly carried out within 2 s. (Detected when n151 is set to “3.”)

Probable cause and remedy

· Feedback wiring error.

® Check for and correct any cable disconnection or faulty wiring.

· Feedback sensor error

® Check sensor status and replace any defective sensors.

· PID target value input error or feedback loss detection setting error

® Correct the target value input so that it is outside of the feedback loss detection range.

Correct the feedback loss detection parameter settings (n137, n138).

· Feedback input circuit error

® Replace the Inverter.

· Clear the Inverter overheating warning signal.

· Eliminate the cause of the warning signal input.

· A short-circuit, ground fault, or disconnection has occurred on the communications line.

® Check and correct the line.

· The termination resistance setting is incorrect.

® In the case of RS-422 communications, set pin 1 of SW2 of all Inverters to ON. In the case of RS-485 communications, set pin 1 of

SW2 of only the Inverter located at each end of the network to ON.

· Noise influence.

® Do not wire the communications line along with power lines in the same conduit.

® Use the twisted-pair shielded wire for the communications line, and ground it at the

Master.

· Master’s program error.

® Check and correct the program so that communications will be performed more than once every 2-s period.

· Communications circuit damage.

® If the same error is detected as a result of a self-diagnostic test, change the Inverter.

8-17

Maintenance Operations

8-2 Troubleshooting

Chapter 8

Due to parameter setting errors, faulty wiring, and so on, the Inverter and motor may not operate as expected when the system is started up. If that should occur, use this section as a reference and apply the appropriate measures.

Refer to 8-1 Protective and Diagnostic Functions, if the contents of the fault are displayed,

8-2-1 Parameters Fail Set

The display does not change when the Increment or

Decrement Key is pressed.

·Parameter write-prohibit is input.

This occurs when n001 for parameter write-prohibit selection/parameter initialization is set to 0. Set n001 to an appropriate value according to the parameter to be set.

·The Inverter is operating.

There are some parameters that cannot be set during operation. Refer to the list of parameters. Turn the Inverter OFF and then make the settings.

“OPj” is displayed.

A parameter setting error has occurred. Refer to 8-1-2 Warning Detection (Nonfatal

Error) and make the necessary corrections.

Nothing is displayed on the Digital Operator or “OPR” is displayed.

A connection error has occurred in the Digital Operator.

Turn OFF the Inverter and dismount the Digital Operator. After checking that the connector is free of any foreign material remount the Digital Operator.

8-2-2 Motor Fails to Operate

The motor does not operate with input through the control circuit terminals even though the frequency reference is correct.

·The operation method setting is incorrect.

If parameter n003 for operation mode selection is not set to 1 to enable the control circuit terminals, the RUN command cannot be executed through the control circuit terminals.

8-18

Maintenance Operations

Chapter 8

Check and correct the setting in n003.

·Input in 2-wire sequence while 3-wire sequence is in effect and vice-versa.

The Inverter will operate in 3-wire sequence according to the RUN, stop, and forward/stop commands if n052 for multi-function input 3 is set to 0. At that time, the

Inverter will not operate if input in 2-wire sequence is ON. On the other hand, the

Inverter in 2-wire sequence will only rotate in the reverse direction if input in 3-wire sequence is ON.

Check and correct the setting in n052 or change the input method of the RUN command.

·The Inverter is not in RUN mode.

When the PRGM or LO/RE indicator (red indicator) of the Digital Operator is lit, the

Inverter does not start.

Cancel the RUN command, and by pressing the Mode Key, turn ON the green indicator before restarting the Inverter.

·The value of the frequency reference is too low.

The Inverter will have no output if the frequency reference is below the minimum output frequency in n016.

Set the frequency reference to exceed the minimum output frequency.

·The Inverter is in local mode.

The RUN command can be given to the Inverter in local mode only with the RUN Key of the Digital Operator. Check the LO/RE indicator. If “Lo” is displayed, the Inverter is in local mode. Press the Increment Key so that “rE” will be displayed.

If the above operation is not possible, multi-function input will be set to local/remote selection. In that case, the mode can be switched only through the corresponding multi-function input terminal. Set the input terminal to OFF so that the Inverter will be in remote mode.

·The input wiring of the control circuit terminals of the Inverter is incorrect.

The Inverter cannot check the input signal if the input line of the control circuit terminals is incorrectly wired. Use the Digital Operator and check the setting in multi-function monitor U-96 for the input terminal status.

The default setting for Inverter input is to NPN sequence input, which can be changed to PNP sequence input. Refer to 2-2-1 Terminal Block and check that the

SW1 settings conform with the actual wiring.

8-19

Maintenance Operations

Chapter 8

The motor does not turn with input through the control terminals. (The frequency reference is set to zero or different from the set value.)

·The setting of the frequency reference is incorrect.

The frequency reference through analog input will be ignored if the Digital Operator has been selected for frequency reference settings. The frequency reference through digital input will be ignored if the Digital Operator has not been selected.

Check that the set value in n004 for frequency reference selection matches the actual method used.

When using analog input, refer to 2-2-1 Terminal Block and check that the SW2 settings conform with the actual input (voltage or current).

·The Inverter is in local mode.

The frequency reference can be given to the Inverter in local mode only with the

FREQUENCY adjuster or through a key sequence on the Digital Operator.

Check the LO/RE indicator. If “Lo” is displayed, the Inverter is in local mode. Press the Increment Key so that “rE” will be displayed.

·The gain and bias settings of the analog input are incorrect.

Check that the frequency reference gain in n060 and the frequency reference bias in n061 conform with the actual analog input characteristics.

The auxiliary frequency reference and frequency gain are not input by the multi-function analog inputs

If frequency reference 2 is selected when an auxiliary frequency reference is set for a multifunction analog input, the analog value of the multi-function analog input will become the frequency reference. Also, if the frequency gain is set, the specified frequency will be multiplied by a factor proportional to the analog value of the multi-function input. In either case, if no analog voltage is input by the multi-function analog input, the Inverter will not operate.

Check the multi-function analog input terminal parameters (n077, n078) and the wiring.

The motor stops during acceleration or when a load is connected.

·The load may be too big.

The 3G3MV has a stall prevention function and automatic torque boost function, but the motor responsiveness limit may be exceeded if acceleration is too rapid or if the load is too big.

8-20

Maintenance Operations

Chapter 8

Lengthen the acceleration time or reduce the load. Also consider increasing the motor capacity.

The motor only rotates in one direction.

·Reverse rotation-prohibit is selected.

If n006 for reverse rotation-prohibit selection is set to 1 (reverse run prohibited), the

Inverter will not accept reverse-rotation commands.

To use both forward and reverse rotation, set n05 to 0.

8-2-3 Motor Rotates in the Wrong Direction

·The output wiring of the motor is faulty.

When the U, V, and W terminals of the Inverter are properly connected to the U, V and

W terminals of the motor, the motor will operate in a forward direction when a forward rotation command is executed. The forward direction depends on the manufacturer and the motor type. Therefore, be sure to check the specifications.

Switching two wires among the U, V, and W will reverse the direction of rotation.

8-2-4 Motor Outputs No Torque or Acceleration is Slow

·The Inverter in vector control is restricted by the torque compensation limit.

If the torque compensation limit in n109 is set to a value that is too small, the motor torque will be limited to a low value and sufficient torque will not be available.

If no torque restriction is required, set the parameter to a range from 150% (default setting) to 200%.

·The stall prevention level during running is too low.

If the value in n093 for stall prevention level during operation is too low, the speed will drop before torque output is turned ON.

Check to be sure that the set value is suitable.

·The stall prevention level during acceleration is too low.

If the value in n094 for stall prevention level during acceleration is too slow, the acceleration time will be too long.

Check to be sure that the set value is suitable.

·V/f Control Limit

Unlike vector control, the output torque of the Inverter in V/f control is low at low frequencies. Consider the use of vector control if higher output torque at low frequencies is required.

8-21

Maintenance Operations

Chapter 8

8-2-5 Speed Accuracy of the Inverter Rotating at High

Speed in Vector Control is Low

·The rated motor voltage is high.

The maximum output voltage of the Inverter is determined by the voltage of input into the Inverter. If the input is at 200 VAC, for example, the maximum output voltage will be 200 VAC. The speed precision of the Inverter will drop if the output voltage designated by vector control has exceeded the maximum output voltage of the Inverter.

Use a motor with a lower rated voltage (e.g., a dedicated motor for vector control use).

8-2-6 Motor Deceleration Rate is Low

·Stall prevention during deceleration is set.

When connecting the Braking Resistor Unit or a braking resistor as a braking option, set n092 for Stall prevention during deceleration to 1 so that stall prevention will be disabled. If n092 is set to 0 (default setting), the Braking Resistor Unit or a braking resistor connected will not be used. Therefore, there will be no reduction in the deceleration time.

·The deceleration time setting is too long.

Check the deceleration time settings in n020 and n022.

·Motor torque is insufficient.

If the parameter constants are correct and there is no overvoltage fault, the power the motor will be limited.

Consider increasing the motor capacity.

·The Inverter in vector control is restricted by the torque compensation limit.

If the torque compensation limit in n109 is set to a value that is too small, the motor torque will be limited to a low value and sufficient torque will not be available.

If no torque restriction is required, set the parameter to a range from 150% (default setting) to 200%.

8-2-7 Vertical-axis Load Drops when Brakes are

Applied

·The sequence is incorrect.

The Inverter goes into DC braking status for 0.5 s after deceleration is completed.

This is the default setting.

Check the sequence to make sure that the brake is applied with DC braking status or adjust the value n090 for DC injection control time.

8-22

Maintenance Operations

Chapter 8

·The DC injection braking is insufficient.

If the DC braking power is insufficient, adjust the value in n089 for DC injection control current.

·An inappropriate brake is being used.

Use a brake intended for braking rather than holding.

8-2-8 Motor Burns

·The load is too big.

If the load of the motor is too big and the motor is used with the effective torque exceeding the rated torque of the motor, the motor will burn out. For example, the rated torque of the motor and capacity may be limited to eight hours of use if the inscription on the motor states that the motor is rated for eight hours. If the 8-hour rated torque is used for normal operation, it may cause the motor to bun out.

Reduce the load amount by either reducing the load or lengthening the acceleration/ deceleration time. Also consider increasing the motor capacity.

·The ambient temperature is too high.

The rating of the motor is determined within a particular ambient operating temperature range. The motor will burn out if it runs continuously at the rated torque in an environment in which the maximum ambient operating temperature is exceeded.

Lower the ambient temperature of the motor to within the acceptable ambient operating temperature range.

·The withstand voltage between the phases of the motor is insufficient.

When the motor is connected to the output of the Inverter, a surge will be generated between the switching of the Inverter and the coil of the motor.

Normally, the maximum surge voltage is approximately three times the input power supply voltage of the Inverter (i.e., approximately 600 V for 200-V Inverters, 1,200 V for 400-V Inverters).

Therefore, the dielectric strength of the motor to be used must be higher than the maximum surge voltage.

In particular, use a dedicated motor for 400-V Inverters.

8-23

Maintenance Operations

Chapter 8

8-2-9 Controller or AM Radio Receives Noise when

Inverter is Started

·Noise derives from Inverter switching.

Take the following actions to prevent noise.

Lower the carrier frequency of the Inverter in n080.

The number of internal switching times is reduced, so noise can be reduced to some extent.

Install an Input Noise Filter.

Install an Input Noise Filter on the power input area of the Inverter.

Install an Output Noise Filter.

Install an Output Noise Filter on the output area of the Inverter.

Use metal tubing.

Electric waves can be shielded by metal. Therefore, enclose the Inverter with a metal tube.

8-2-10 Ground Fault Interrupter is Actuated when

Inverter is Started

·Leakage current flows through the Inverter.

The Inverter performs internal switching. Therefore, a leakage current flows through the Inverter. This leakage current may actuate the ground fault interrupter, shutting the power OFF.

Use a ground fault interrupter with a high leakage-current detection value (sensitivity amperage of 200 mA or more, operating time of 0.1 s or more) or one with high-frequency countermeasures for Inverter use.

Reducing the carrier frequency value in n080 is also effective.

In addition, remember that a leakage current increases in proportion to the cable length. Normally, approximately 5 mA of leakage current is generated for each meter of cable.

8-24

Maintenance Operations

8-2-11 Mechanical Vibration

Chapter 8

Mechanical system makes unusual noise.

·Resonance between the characteristic frequency of the mechanical system and the carrier frequency.

There may be resonance between the characteristic frequency of the mechanical system and the carrier frequency. If the motor is running with no problems and the machinery system is vibrating with a high-pitched whine, it may indicate that this is occurring. To prevent this type of resonance, adjust the carrier frequency value in n080.

·Resonance between the characteristic frequency of a machine and the output frequency of the Inverter.

There may be resonance between the characteristic frequency of a machine and the output frequency of the Inverter. To prevent this from occurring, use the frequency jump function with the constants set in n083 through n086 to change the output frequency or install vibration-proof rubber on the motor base to prevent the resonance of the mechanical system.

Vibration and hunting are occurring.

·Influence by the torque compensation function or the slip compensation function.

The torque compensation function or the slip compensation function of the Inverter may influence the characteristic frequency of the mechanical system, causing vibration or hunting. In that case, increase the time constants in n104 for torque compensation and in n112 for slip compensation. The larger these time constants are, however, the slower the response speed of the torque compensation function and slip compensation function will be.

Motor vibrates excessively and does not rotate normally.

·Motor Phase Interruption

If one or two of the three phases of the motor are open, the motor will vibrate excessively and will not rotate. Check that the motor is wired correctly without any disconnection. The same phenomenon will occur if the output transistor of the Inverter is open and damaged. Check the balance of the Inverter’s output voltage as well.

8-25

Maintenance Operations

Chapter 8

8-2-12 Stable PID Control is Not Possible or Control

Fails

PID control is not possible with vibration or hunting.

·PID control gain adjustment is insufficient.

Check the frequency of vibration and adjust the proportional (P) control, integral (I) control, and derivative (D) control of the Inverter. Refer to 6-3-7 PID Adjustments.

PID control diverges.

·No feedback is input.

If the detected value is 0 with no feedback input, the PID control function will not operate. As a result, the output of the Inverter will diverge and the motor will increase its speed up to the maximum frequency.

Check that the set value in n164 for PID feedback input block selection conforms with the actual input and that the PID constants are set properly. Refer to 6-3-6 PID

Control Settings.

·Level adjustments of the target and detected values are imperfect.

The Inverter in PID control adjusts the deviation between the target and detected values so that the deviation will be zero. Therefore, the target and detected values must be adjusted so that they will have the same input level. Set the detected value gain in n129 after making the proper level adjustments.

·The relationship between the output frequency and detected value of the Inverter is opposite.

PID control will result in diversion if the detected value decreases when the output frequency of the Inverter increases. If that happens, set n128 for PID control selection to negative characteristics (e.g., if 1 has been set, change it to 5).

8-2-13 Inverter Vibrates in Energy-saving Control

·The energy-saving settings are incorrect.

Check the frequency of vibration.

If the frequency coincides with the power averaging time in n143, the Inverter is not in smooth probe operation. Set the probe operation voltage limit to 0 in n144 to disable the probe operation of the Inverter or reduce the set values of n145 (100% probecontrol voltage step) and n146 (5% probe-control voltage step) so that the voltage change range will be narrower.

8-26

Maintenance Operations

Chapter 8

8-2-14 Motor Rotates after Output of Inverter is Turned

OFF

·Insufficient DC Control

If the motor continues operating at low speed, without completely stopping, and after a deceleration stop has been executed, it means that the DC braking is not decelerating enough.

In such cases, adjust the DC control as described below.

Increase the parameter in n089 for DC injection control current.

Increase the parameter in n090 for DC injection control time.

8-2-15 Detects 0 V and Stalls when Motor Starts

·Insufficient DC control at startup

Generation of 0 V and stalling can occur if the motor is turning when it is started.

This can be prevented by slowing the rotation of the motor by DC braking before starting the motor.

Increase the parameter in n091 for startup DC injection control time.

8-2-16 Output Frequency Does Not Reach Frequency

Reference

·The frequency reference is within the jump frequency range.

If the jump function is used, the output frequency stays within the jump frequency range.

Make sure that the jump width settings in n083 through n085 for jump frequencies 1 through 3 and jump width in n086 are appropriate.

·The preset output frequency exceeds the upper-limit frequency.

The upper-limit frequency can be obtained from the following formula.

Maximum frequency in n011 ´ frequency reference upper limit in n033/100

Make sure that the parameters in n011 and n033 are correct.

8-2-17

Inverter Does Not Run Because EF (Simultaneous

Inputs of Forward and Reverse Commands) is

Detected, Or Motor Rotates Momentarily When

Control Device Power is Turned OFF

Sequence Error

An EF will be detected if a forward command and a reverse command are input simultaneously for 0.5 seconds or longer. Correct the sequence

8-27

Maintenance Operations

Chapter 8

Malfunction Due to Unwanted Current Path

Inverter inputs may remain ON due to an unwanted current path for the controller outputs. With the wiring shown in the following table, if the controller output power supply is less than 24 V DC or if the power is OFF, the current indicated by the arrow will flow and the Inverter inputs will operate. If that occurs, insert a diode as shown in the diagram at point A.

Control device Inverter (control input)

S1 to 7

8-28

Maintenance Operations

8-3 Maintenance and Inspection

Chapter 8

WARNING

Do not touch the Inverter terminals while the power is being supplied.

WARNING

Maintenance or inspection must be performed only after turning

OFF the power supply, confirming that the CHARGE indicator (or status indicators) is turned OFF, and after waiting for the time specified on the front cover. Not doing so may result in electrical shock.

WARNING

Maintenance, inspection, or parts replacement must be performed by authorized personnel. Not doing so may result in electrical shock or injury.

WARNING

Do not attempt to take the Unit apart or repair. Doing either of these may result in electrical shock or injury.

Caution

Carefully handle the Inverter because it uses semiconductor elements. Careless handling may result in malfunction.

Do not change wiring, disconnect connectors or Operator, or replace fans while power is being supplied. Doing so may result in injury or malfunction.

Daily Inspection

Check the following items with the system in operation.

·The motor should not be vibrating or making unusual noises.

·There should be no abnormal heat generation.

·The output current value shown on the monitor display should not be higher than normal.

·The cooling fan on the bottom of the Inverter should be operating normally, if the

Inverter model has the cooling fan.

8-29

Maintenance Operations

Chapter 8

Periodic Inspection

Check the following items during periodic maintenance.

Before beginning inspection, be sure to turn OFF the power supply. Confirm that all the indicators on the front panel have turned OFF, and then wait until at least 1 minute has elapsed before beginning the inspection.

Be sure not to touch the terminals right after the power has been turned OFF. Otherwise, an electric shock may occur.

·The terminal screws of the Inverter should not loose.

·There should be no conductive dust or oil mist on the terminal block or inside the

Inverter.

·The mounting screws of the Inverter should not be loose.

·No dirt or dust should be accumulating on the radiation fin.

·No dust should be accumulating on the vents of the Inverter.

·There should be no abnormalities in the outward appearance of the Inverter.

·There should be no unusual noises or vibration and the accumulated operating time should not exceeded the specifications.

Periodic Maintenance Parts

Periodic inspection standards vary with the installation environment and usage conditions of the Inverter.

The maintenance periods of the Inverter are described below. Keep them as reference.

Maintenance Periods (Reference)

Cooling fan: 2 to 3 years

Electrolytic capacitor: 5 years

Fuse: 10 years

The usage conditions are as follows:

Ambient temperature: 40_C

Load factor: 80%

Operation:

Installation:

8 hours per day

According to instructions in manual

It is recommended that the ambient temperature and power-on time be reduced as much as possible to extend of the life of the Inverter.

Note For details regarding maintenance, consult your OMRON representative.

8-30

Maintenance Operations

Chapter 8

Replacement of Cooling Fan

If the FAN fault is displayed or the cooling fan needs replacement, take the following steps to replace it.

Cooling Fan Models

Single-phase

200-VAC

Inverter

3G3MV-A2007

3G3MV-A2015

3G3MV-A2022

3G3MV-A2040

3G3MV-A2055/--A2075

3G3MV-AB015

3G3MV-AB022

3G3MV-AB040

3G3MV-A4015/-A4022

3G3MV-A4030/-A4040

3G3MV-A4055/-A4075

Cooling Fan

3G3IV-PFAN2007

3G3IV-PFAN2015M

3G3IV-PFAN2022

3G3IV-PFAN2037

3G3IV-PFAN2037 (2 parts)

3G3IV-PFAN2015M

3G3IV-PFAN2037

3G3IV-PFAN2037 (2 parts)

3G3IV-PFAN2015M

3G3IV-PFAN2037

3G3IV-PFAN2037 (2 parts)

Replacing Cooling Fan of 68-mm-wide Inverter Model

1. Press the left and right sides of the fan cover located on the lower part of the radiation fin in the arrow 1 directions. Then lift the bottom of the Fan in the arrow 2 direction to remove the Fan as shown in the following illustration.

Radiation fin (Heat sink)

Wind direction

2. Hold the fan wire and pull the protective tube of the cover in the arrow 3 direction.

Protective tube

There is a connector inside.

Fan wind direction

3. Slide the protective tube and remove the internal connector.

8-31

Maintenance Operations

Chapter 8

4. Remove the Fan from the fan cover.

5. Mount the new Fan on the fan cover. At this time, make sure that the wind direction of the Fan will be in the direction of the heat radiation fin.

6. Attach the connector, cover the connector with the protective tube, and insert the connector into the cover.

7. Mount the fan cover with the new Fan to the lower part of the heat radiation fin. Make sure that the fan cover snaps on securely with the heat radiation fin.

Replacing Cooling Fan of 108-mm-wide Inverter Model

1. Dismount the front cover, bottom cover, and fan connector CN4.

Cooling fan connector

(CN4 built in)

Wiring groove

Heat radiation fin (Heat sink)

Fan wind direction

2. Press the left and right sides of the fan cover located on the lower part of the radiation fin in the arrow 1 directions. Then lift the bottom of the Fan in the arrow 2 direction to remove the fan as shown in the following illustration.

Disconnect the wire from the electrical inlet on the bottom of the plastic casing.

3. Remove the Fan from the fan cover.

4. Mount the new Fan on the fan cover. At this time, make sure that the wind direction of the fan will be in the direction of the heat radiation fin.

5. Mount the fan cover with the new Fan to the lower part of the heat radiation fin. Make sure that the fan cover snaps on securely with the heat radiation fin.

6. Wire the power line through the electrical inlet on the bottom of the plastic casing and the wiring groove into the internal circuitry of the Inverter.

7. Attach the wire to connector CN10 and attach the bottom cover and front cover.

8-32

Specifications

9-1 Inverter Specifications

9-2 Option Specifications

Chapter 9

Specifications

9-1 Inverter Specifications

Chapter 9

200-V-class Inverters

3-phase

200-VAC models

Model 3G3MV-

Power supply

Rated voltage and frequency

Allowable voltage fluctuation

Allowable frequency fluctuation

Input power supply capacity

Heat radiation (W)

(see note 2)

Weight (kg)

Cooling method

A2001 A2002 A2004 A2007 A2015 A2022 A2040 A2055 A2075

3-phase 200 to 230 VAC at 50/60 Hz

--15% to 10%

±5%

0.4

0.9

0.6

Natural cooling

1.6

2.7

4.3

1.1

1.4

Cooling fan

5.9

9.3

13.3

17.6

13.0

18.0

28.1

45.1

72.8

94.8

149.1 249.8 318.1

0.9

1.5

2.1

4.6

4.8

Singlephase

200-VAC models

Model 3G3MV-

Power supply

Rated voltage and frequency

Allowable voltage fluctuation

Allowable frequency fluctuation

Input power supply capacity

Heat radiation (W)

(see note 2)

Weight (kg)

Cooling method

AB001 AB002 AB004 AB007 AB015 AB022 AB040

Single-phase 200 to 240 VAC at 50/60 Hz

--15% to 10%

±5%

0.5

14.1

0.9

20.0

1.6

31.9

2.7

51.4

4.3

82.8

5.9

9.3

113.6 176.4 ---

---

0.6

0.7

Natural cooling

1.0

1.5

2.2

Cooling fan

2.9

---

Max. applicable motor capacity

(kW)

Output specifications

Rated output capacity (kVA)

Rated output current (A)

Rated output voltage (V)

Max. output frequency

0.1

0.3

0.8

0.25

0.6

1.6

0.55

1.1

3.0

1.1

1.9

5.0

1.5

3.0

8.0

2.2

4.2

11.0

4.0

6.7

17.5

---

9.5

3-phase 200 to 240 VAC (according to the input voltage)

400 Hz parameter setting

---

---

9-2

Specifications

Chapter 9

Control characteristics

Protective functions

Harmonic-current countermeasures

Control method

Carrier frequency

Frequency control range

Frequency precision

(temperature characteristics)

Frequency setting resolution

DC reactor (option) connection possible

Sine wave PWM (V/f control)

2.5 to 10.0 kHz (in vector control)

0.1 to 400 Hz

Digital commands: ±0.01% (--10°C to 50°C)

Analog commands: ±0.5% (25°C ± 10°C)

Digital commands: 0.1 Hz (less than 100 Hz) and 1 Hz (100 Hz or over)

Analog commands: 0.06 Hz/60 Hz (equivalent to 1/1000)

0.01 Hz

Output frequency resolution

Overload capacity

External frequency set signal

Acceleration/deceleration time

Braking torque

Voltage/frequency characteristics

Motor protection

Instantaneous overcurrent protection

Overload protection

Overvoltage protection

Undervoltage protection

Momentary power interruption compensation

(selection)

Cooling fan overheating

Grounding protection

Charge indicator

(RUN indicator)

150% of rated output current for 1 min

Selectable with FREQ adjuster: 0 to 10 VDC (20 kW), 4 to 20 mA

(250 W), and 0 to 20 mA (250 W)

0.01 to 6,000 s (Independent acceleration and deceleration time settings: 2 types)

Approx. 20% (125 to 150% possible with braking resistor)

Set voltage vector control/user V/f pattern

Protection by electronic thermal

Stops at approx. 250% of rated output current

Stops in 1 min at approximately 150% of rated output current

Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is approximately 410 V

Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is approximately 200 V

(160 V for single-phase 200-VAC model)

Stops for 15 ms or more. By setting the Inverter to momentary power interruption mode, operation can be continued if power is restored within approximately 0.5 s.

Detects at 110°C ± 10°C

Protection at overcurrent detection level

Lit when the main circuit DC voltage is approximately 50 V or less.

9-3

Specifications

Chapter 9

Environment

Location

Ambient storage temperature

Ambient humidity

Ambient operating temperature

Altitude

Insulation resistance

Vibration resistance

Degree of protection

Indoors (with no corrosive gas, oil spray, or metallic dust)

--20°C to 60°C

Operating: 90% max. (with no condensation)

Panel--mounting:--10°C to 50°C

Closed wall-mounting:

--10°C to 40°C

1,000 m max.

5 MW min. (Do not carry out any insulation resistance or withstand voltage tests)

9.8 m/s

2.0 m/s

{1G} max. between 10 to 20 Hz

{0.2G} max. between 20 and 50 Hz

Panel-mounting models: Conforms to IP20 See note 3

Note 1. The power supply capacity is the capacity for the Inverter’s rated output. It will vary depending on the impedance at the input power supply. (This is due to fluctuations in the power factor.

The power factor can be improved by inserting an AC reactor.) There will also be variations in the ratio between the rated current of the motor that is used and the rated output current of the

Inverter.

Note 2. The heat radiation is the electric power consumed in the Inverter at the Inverter’s rated output.

Note 3. The 5.5- and 7.5-kW Inverters are closed wall-mounting models (NEMA1/IP20) as a standard, but they can be converted to panel-mounting (IP00) by removing the top and bottom covers.

400-V-class Inverters

3-phase

400-VAC models

Model 3G3MV-

Power supply

Rated voltage and frequency

Allowable voltage fluctuation

Allowable frequency fluctuation

Input power supply capacity

(see note 1)

Heat radiation (W)

(see note 2)

Weight (kg)

Cooling method

A4002 A4004 A4007 A4015 A4022 A4030 A4040 A4055 A4075

3-phase 380 to 460 VAC at 50/60 Hz

--15% to 10%

±5%

1.3

23.1

1.9

30.1

1.0

1.1

Natural cooling

3.6

54.9

1.5

5.1

75.7

5.9

83.0

1.5

Cooling fan

95.8

2.1

9.1

129.1

256.5

308.9

2.1

15.8

4.8

19.2

4.8

9-4

Specifications

Chapter 9

Max. applicable motor capacity (kW)

Output specifications

Rated output capacity (kVA)

Rated output current (A)

Rated output voltage (V)

Max. output frequency

Control characteristics

Harmonic-current countermeasures teristics Control method

Carrier frequency

Frequency control range

Frequency precision

(temperature characteristics)

Frequency setting resolution

0.37

0.9

1.2

0.55

1.4

1.8

Sine wave PWM (V/f control)

2.5 to 10.0 kHz (in vector control)

0.1 to 400 Hz

1.1

2.6

3.4

1.5

3.7

4.8

400 Hz parameter setting

2.2

4.2

5.5

3.0

5.5

7.2

DC reactor (option) connection possible

Digital commands: ±0.01% (--10°C to 50°C)

Analog commands: ±0.5% (25°C ± 10°C)

4.0

7.0

9.2

5.5

14.8

3-phase 380 to 460 VAC (according to the input voltage)

7.5

Output frequency resolution

Overload capacity

External frequency set signal

Acceleration/deceleration time

Braking torque

Voltage/frequency characteristics

Digital commands: 0.1 Hz (less than 100 Hz) and 1 Hz (100 Hz or over)

Analog commands: 0.06 Hz/60 Hz (equivalent to 1/1000)

0.01 Hz

150% of rated output current for 1 min

Selectable with FREQ adjuster: 0 to 10 VDC (20 kW), 4 to 20 mA

(250 W), and 0 to 20 mA (250 W)

0.01 to 6,000 s (Independent acceleration and deceleration time settings)

Approx. 20% (125 to 150% possible with braking resistor: 2 types)

Set voltage vector control/user V/f pattern

9-5

Specifications

Chapter 9

Protective functions

Motor protection

Instantaneous overcurrent protection

Overload protection

Overvoltage protection

Undervoltage protection

Momentary power interruption compensation

(selection)

Cooling fin overheating

Grounding protection

Charge indicator

(RUN indicator)

Environment

Location temperature

Protection by electronic thermal

Stops at approx. 250% of rated output current

Stops in 1 min at approximately 150% of rated output current

Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is approximately 820 V

Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is approximately 400 V

Stops for 15 ms or more. By setting the Inverter to momentary power interruption mode, operation can be continued if power is restored within approximately 0.5 s.

Detects at 110°C ± 10°C

Protection at overcurrent detection level

Lit when the main circuit DC voltage is approximately 50 V or less.

Ambient humidity

Ambient storage temperature

Altitude

Insulation resistance

Vibration resistance

Degree of protection

Indoors (with no corrosive gas, oil spray, or metallic dust)

Panel--mounting: --10°C to 50°C

Closed wall--mounting:

--10°C to 40°C

Operating: 90% max. (with no condensation)

--20°C to 60°C

1,000 m max.

5 MW min. (Do not carry out any insulation resistance or withstand voltage tests)

9.8 m/s

2.0 m/s

{1G} max. between 10 to 20 Hz

{0.2G} max. between 20 and 50 Hz

Panel-mounting models: Conforms to IP20 See note 3

The power factor can be improved by inserting an AC reactor.) There will also be variations in the ratio between the rated current of the motor that is used and the rated output current of the

Inverter.

Note 2. The heat radiation is the electric power consumed in the Inverter at the Inverter’s rated output.

Note 3. The 5.5- and 7.5-kW Inverters are closed wall-mounting models (NEMA1/IP20) as a standard, but they can be converted to panel-mounting (IP00) by removing the top and bottom covers.

9-6

Specifications

Chapter 9

Initial settings, depending on inverter capacity

200V class 3--phase

No.

Name

Inverter capacity n036 Motor rated current n105 Torque compensation iron loss n106 Motor rated slip n107 Motor phase to neutral*

Unit

0.1kW

0.25kW 0.55 kW 1.1 kW 1.5kW

2.2kW

4.0kW 5.5kW

7.5kW

A 0.6

1.1

1.9

3.3

6.2

8.5

19 19.6

26.6

1.7

2.5

3.4

2.6

4.2

2.9

6.5

2.5

11.1

11.8

2.6

2.9

19 28.8

43.9

3.3

1.5

1.3

17.99 10.28 4.573 2.575 1.233

0.8

0.385 0.199 0.111

n108 Motor leak inductance MH 110.4 56.08 42.21 19.07

13.4

9.81

6.34 4.22

n110 Motor no--load current % 72

200V class single--phase

73 62 55 45 35 32 26

2.65

No.

Name

Inverter capacity

Unit

0.1kW

0.25kW

0.55 kW 1.1 kW 1.5kW

n036 Motor rated current n105 Torque compensation iron loss n106 Motor rated slip

W n110 Motor no--load current %

400V class 3--phase

0.6

1.7

1.1

3.4

1.9

4.2

3.3

6.5

6.2

11.1

Hz 2.5

2.6

2.9

2.5

2.6

n107 Motor phase to neutral*

17.99

10.28

4.573

2.575

1.233

n108 Motor leak inductance MH 110.4

56.08

42.21

19.07

13.4

72 73 62 55 45

2.2kW

8.5

11.8

2.9

0.8

9.81

4.0kW

3.3

0.385

6.34

No.

Name

Inverter capacity

Unit

0.37kW 0.55 kW 1.1 kW 1.5kW

2.2kW

3.0kW 4.0kW

5.5kW

7.5kW

n036 Motor rated current n105 Torque compensation iron loss n106 Motor rated slip

0.6

3.4

1.0

4.0

1.6

6.1

3.1

11.0

4.2

11.7

5.5

7.0

19.3 19.3

9.8

28.8

13.3

43.9

Hz 2.5

2.7

2.6

2.5

3.0

3.2

1.5

1.3

n107 Motor phase to neutral*

41.97 19.08 11.22 5.044 3.244 1.514 1.514 0.797 0.443

n108 Motor leak inductance MH 224.3 168.8 80.76 53.25 40.03 24.84 24.84 16.87 10.59

n110 Motor no--load current % 73 63 52 45 35 33 33 26 30

Values of motor phase to neutral are set to half of the standard value

9-7

Specifications

9-2 Option Specifications

Chapter 9

9-2-1 EMC-compatible Noise Filter

·Be sure to select an optimum Noise Filter from the following so that the Inverter will satisfy EMC directive requirements of the EC Directives.

·Connect the Noise Filter between the power supply and the input terminals (R/L1,

S/L2, and T/L3) of the Inverter.

·The Inverter can be mounted to the upper side of the Noise Filter because the upper side of the Noise Filter incorporates mounting holes for the Inverter.

Standard Specifications

3-phase 200-VAC Noise Filter

Inverter

Model 3G3MV-

A2001/A2002/A2004/A2007 PFI2010-E

A2015/A2022 PFI2020-E

3-phase 200-VAC Noise Filter

Model 3G3MV-

Rated current (A)

16 to 20

A2040

A2055/A2075

PFI2030-E

PFI2050-E

26 to 30

Single-phase 200-VAC Noise Filter

Inverter

Model 3G3MV-

AB001/AB002/AB004

AB007/AB015

AB022

AB040

Single-phase 200-V Noise Filter

Model 3G3MVRated current (A)

PFI1010-E

PFI1020-E

PFI1030-E

PFI1040-E

3-phase 400-VAC Noise Filter

Inverter

Model 3G3MV-

A4002/A4004

A4007/A4015/A4022

A4030/A4040

A4055/A4075

3-phase 400-VAC Noise Filter

Model 3G3MVRated current (A)

PFI3005-E

PFI3010-E

PFI3020-E

PFI3030-E

15 to 20

9-8

Specifications

Connection Example

Noise Filter

MCCB

3-phase 200 VAC, single-phase 200 VAC or

3--phase 400 VAC

External Dimensions

Noise Filters for Single-phase 200-VAC Models

3G3MV-PFI1010-E

Three, 5-dia. holes

Two, M4 holes

(for Inverter mounting use)

Clamp core

Chapter 9

9-9

Specifications

3G3MV-PFI1020-E

Three, 5-dia holes

Four, M4 holes

(for Inverter mounting use)

Chapter 9

3G3MV-PFI1030--E

Three, 5-dia holes

Four, M4 holes

(for Inverter mounting use)

9-10

Specifications

3G3MV-PFI1040--E

Three, 5-dia holes

Four, M4 holes

(for Inverter mounting use)

Chapter 9

9-11

Specifications

Noise Filters for 3-phase 200-VAC Inverter Models

3G3MV-PFI2010-E

Three, 5-dia. holes

Two, M4 holes

(for Inverter mounting use)

Chapter 9

3G3MV-PFI2020-E

Three, 5-dia. holes

Four, M4 holes

(for Inverter mounting use)

9-12

Specifications

3G3MV-PFI2030--E

Three, 5-dia. holes

Four, M4 holes

(for Inverter mounting use)

Chapter 9

9-13

Specifications

3G3MV-PFI2050--E

Three, 6-dia. holes

Four, M5 holes

(for Inverter mounting use)

Chapter 9

9-14

Specifications

Noise Filters for 3-phase 400-VAC Models

3G3MV-PFI3005-E, 3G3MV-PFI3010-E

Three, 5-dia holes

Four, M4 holes

(for Inverter mounting use)

Chapter 9

3G3MV--PFI3020--E

Three, 5-dia. holes

Four, M4 holes

(for Inverter mounting use)

9-15

Specifications

3G3MV-PRS3030V

Three, 6-dia. holes

Four, M5 holes

(for Inverter mounting use)

Chapter 9

9-16

Specifications

9-2-2 DIN Track Mounting Bracket

Chapter 9

3G3IV-PZZ08122j

An adapter making it possible to easily mount the Inverter to DIN tracks.

Applicable Models

3-phase 400 V AC

Inverter DIN Track Mounting

Bracket

3G3MV-A2001/-A2002/-A2004/-A2007 3G3IV-PZZ08122A

3G3MV-A2015/-A2022

3G3MV-A2040

3G3MV-AB007/-AB015

3G3MV-AB022

3G3MV-AB040

3G3MV-A4002/-A4004/-A4007/-A4015/

-A4022

3G3MV-A4030/A4040

3G3IV-PZZ08122B

3G3IV-PZZ08122C

3G3IV-PZZ08122A

3G3IV-PZZ08122B

3G3IV-PZZ08122C

3G3IV-PZZ08122D

3G3IV-PZZ08122B

3G3IV-PZZ08122C

9-17

Specifications

External Dimensions (mm)

3G3IV-PZZ08122A 3G3IV-PZZ08122B

Chapter 9

Four, M4 tap

3G3IV-PZZ08122C

Side View

(Common to all the Units)

3G3IV-PZZ08122D

Four, M4 tap

Four, M4 tap Four, M4 tap

9-18

Specifications

9-2-3 DC Reactor

3G3HV-PUZDABj

Chapter 9

The DC Reactor suppresses harmonic current generated from the Inverter and improves the power factor of the Inverter. The DC Reactor suppresses harmonic current more effectively than the AC

Reactor. Furthermore, the DC Reactor can be used in combination with the AC Reactor.

Applicable Models

Voltage class

Inverter

Max. applicable motor capacity (kW)

200 V 0.1 to 0.75

1.5 to 4.0

5.5 to 7.5

400 V 0.2 to 0.75

1.5 to 2.2

3.0 to 4.0

5.5 to 7.5

Model

3G3HV-

PUZDAB18A3MH

PUZDAB36A1MH

PUZDAB5.7A11MH

PUZDAB12A6.3MH

PUZDAB23A3.6MH

DC Reactor

Rated voltage

(V)

Rated current

(A)

5.7

6.3

3.6

Inductance

(mH)

Loss

(W)

External Dimensions (mm)

External Dimension 1 External Dimension 2

Two, d2 mounting holes

Two, d1 mounting holes

Four, d1 mounting holes

9-19

Specifications

Chapter 9

Model

3G3HV-

PUZDABj

5.4A8MH

18A3MH

36A1MH

3.2A28MH

5.7A11MH

12A6.3MH

23A3.6MH

External dimension

H W

105

Dimension (mm)

D D1 D2

---

0.8

1.2

1.6

0.8

1.2

1.6

t d1

---

Weight

(kg)

0.8

2.0

3.2

0.8

1.0

2.0

3.2

9-2-4 AC Reactor

3G3IV-PUZBABj

The AC Reactor suppresses harmonic current generated from the Inverter and improves the power factor of the Inverter. Connect the AC Reactor to the Inverter if the capacity of the power supply is much larger than that of the Inverter. Select the AC Reactor model from the following table according to the motor capacity.

Connection Example

MCCB AC Reactor

Motor

Applicable Range

Power supply capacity (kVA)

AC Reactor required for smooth operation under present power supply conditions

AC Reactor not required

Inverter capacity (kVA)

9-20

Specifications

Chapter 9

Applicable Models and Dimensions

200-V Class

Max. applicable motor capacity (kW)

0.1 to 0.2

0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

4.0

5.5

7.5

Model

3G3IV-PUZBABj

2A7.0MH

2.5A4.2MH

5A2.1MH

10A1.1MH

15A0.71MH

20A0.53MH

30A0.35MH

40A0.265MH

2.5

Current (A) Inductance (mH)

7.0

4.2

2.1

1.1

0.71

0.53

0.35

0.265

Loss (W)

Model

3G3IV-PUZBABj

2A7.0MH

2.5A4.2MH

5A2.1MH

10A1.1MH

15A0.71MH

20A0.53MH

30A0.35MH

40A0.265MH

130

120

---

114

119

139

---

130

105

115

120

Dimension (mm)

130

105

10.5

11.5

2.5

Weight (kg)

400-V Class

Max. applicable motor capacity (kW)

0.2 to 0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

3.0 to 4.0

5.5

7.5

Model

3G3IV-PUZBABj

1.3A18.0MH

2.5A8.4MH

5A4.2MH

7.5A3.6MH

10A2.2MH

15A1.42MH

20A1.06MH

1.3

2.5

7.5

Current (A) Inductance (mH)

18.0

8.4

4.2

3.6

2.2

1.42

1.06

Loss (W)

2.5

Weight (kg)

9-21

Specifications

Chapter 9

Model

3G3IV-PUZBABj

1.3A18.0MH

2.5A8.4MH

5A4.2MH

7.5A3.6MH

10A2.2MH

15A1.42MH

20A1.06MH

Dimensions

130

160

120

130

---

115

---

130

120

130

Dimension (mm)

E F

105

130

160

All models except:3G3IV-PUZBAB20A0.53MH

3G3IV-PUZBAB30A0.53MH

3G3IV-PUZBAB40A0.265MH

3G3IV-PUZBAB20A1.06MH

M Terminal

10.5

11.5

M Terminal

Nameplate

Mounting Dimensions

4-J mounting bolt 4-J mounting bolt

Mounting Dimensions

9-2-5 Output Noise Filter

3G3IV-PLFj (Tokin)

The Output Noise Filter suppresses the generated noise of the Inverter from being transmitted to the output line. Connect the Output Noise Filter to the output side of the

Inverter.

Connection Example

Noise filter

9-22

Specifications

Chapter 9

Application Models

Inverter

Voltage class Max. applicable motor capacity

(kW)

1.5

2.2

3.7

0.2

0.1

0.2

0.4

0.75

0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

4.0

Inverter capacity (kVA)

2.7

4.1

6.9

0.9

0.3

0.6

1.4

2.1

1.4

2.1

2.7

4.1

6.9

Output Noise Filter

Model Rated current

(A)

3G3IV-PLF320KA 20

Dimensions

External Dimensions

Model

3G3IV-

PLF310KA TE-K5.5

PLF320KA

TE-K5.5

PLF310KB

Terminal board

A B C

Dimension (mm)

D E F G H

Weight

(kg)

0.6

0.5

9-23

Specifications

9-2-6

CompoBus/D Communications Unit

Chapter 9

3G3MV-PDRT1-SINV

This Unit is required when controlling the Inverter from CompoBus/D. Remote I/O functions and message functions can be used to suit the application.

Note

Only CompoBus/D Communications Units manufactured after January 1st, 2000 can be connected to 5.5-kW and 7.5-kW Inverters. Earlier products are not compatible with these Inverters.

External Dimensions (mm)

3 38

10.3

9-24

Specifications

Connection Example

C200HW-DRM21-V1 or CVM1-DRM21-

V1 Master Unit

3G3MV-series

Inverter

3G3MV-PDRT1-SINV

CompoBus/D Communications Unit

Switch

STO

Power

Supply

Motor

Chapter 9

9-25

Chapter 10 List of Parameters

List of Parameters

Chapter 10

Function Group 1 (n001 through n049)

Parameter

No.

Register No.

Name Description

n001 0101

Setting range

0 to 11 1

Unit of setting

Parameter write-prohibit selection/parameter initialization

Used to prohibit parameters to be written, sets parameters, or change the monitor range of parameters.

Used to initialize parameters to default settings.

0: Parameter n001 is set or displayed. Parameters from n002 to n079 can be displayed only.

1: Parameters from n001 to n049

(function group 1) are set or displayed.

2: Parameters from n001 to n079

(function groups 1 and 2) are set or displayed.

3: Parameters from n001 to n119

(function groups 1 through 3) are set or displayed.

4: Parameters from n001 to n179

(function groups 1 through 4) are set or displayed.

5: Same as set to 4, but run command excepted in program mode.

6: Clears the error log.

8: Initializes parameters to default settings in 2-wire sequence.

9: Initializes parameters to default settings in 3-wire sequence.

10: For the USA, initializes parameter in 2--wire sequence.

11:For the USA, Initializes parameters in 3-wire sequence.

Default setting

Changes during operation

Reference page

3--13

5-2

10-2

List of Parameters

Chapter 10

Parameter

No.

Register No.

n002 n003

0102

0103

Name

Control mode selection

Operation command selection

Description Setting range

Used to select the control mode of the

Inverter.

0: V/f control mode

1: Vector control mode (open loop)

Note The set value in n002 is not initialized with n001 set to 8 or 9.

Note Each of the following parameters is initialized according to the preset control mode. The default setting varies with the control mode.

n014: Middle output frequency n015: Middle output frequency voltage n016: Minimum output frequency n017: Minimum output frequency voltage n104: Torque compensation primary delay time constant n111: Slip compensation gain n112: Slip compensation primary delay time constant

See the reference pages for details.

Used to select the input method for the RUN and STOP commands in remote mode.

0: The STOP/RESET Key on the digital Operator is enabled.

1: Multi-function input is enabled through the control circuit terminals in 2- or 3-wire sequence.

2: RS-422/485 communications are enabled.

3: Input is enabled from the optional

CompoBus/D Communications

Unit.

Note The RUN command only through key sequences on the

Digital Operator is acceptable in local mode.

0, 1

0 to 3 1

Unit of setting

Default setting

Changes during operation

Reference page

5-3

No 5-11

10-3

List of Parameters

Chapter 10

Parameter

No.

Register No.

n004 n005 n006 n007 n008 n009

0104

0105

0106

0108

0109

Name

Frequency reference selection

Stopping method selection

Reverse rotation-prohibit selection

STOP Key function selection

Frequency reference selection in local mode

Operator frequency setting method selection

Description

Used to set the input method for the frequency reference in remote mode.

0: Digital Operator

1: Frequency reference 1 (n024)

2: Frequency reference control terminal (0 to 10 V)

3: Frequency reference control terminal (4 to 20 mA)

4: Frequency reference control terminal (0 to 20 mA)

5: Pulse train reference control terminal is enabled.

6: Frequency reference input through

RS44/RS485 is enabled.

7: Multi-function analog voltage input

(0 to 10 V) is enabled.

8: Multi-function analog current input

(4 to 20 mA) is enabled.

9: Frequency reference input through

CompoBus/D communications is enabled.

Used to set the stopping method for use when the STOP command is input.

0: Decelerates to stop in preset time.

1: Coasts to stop (with output turned

OFF by the STOP command)

Used to select the operation with the reverse command input.

0: Reverse enabled (accept).

1: Reverse disabled (not accept).

Used to enable/disable the STOP Key in remote mode with n003 for operation mode selection not set to 0.

0: STOP Key of the Digital Operator enabled.

1: STOP Key of the Digital Operator disabled.

Used to set the input method for the frequency reference in local mode.

0: The FREQ adjuster of the Digital

Operator enabled.

1: Key sequences on the Digital

Operator enabled. (Set in n024.)

Used to enable the Enter Key for setting the frequency reference with the

Increment and Decrement Keys.

0: The value is entered with the Enter

Key pressed.

1: The value is enabled when the value is input.

Setting range

0 to 9 1

Unit of setting

0, 1

Default setting

Changes during operation

Reference page

5-12

5-31

5-30

5-11

5-13

5-24

10-4

List of Parameters

Chapter 10

Parameter

No.

Register No.

n010 n011 n012 n013 n014 n015 n016 n017 n018

010A

010B

010C

010D

010E

010F

0110

0111

0112

Name

Acceleration/

Deceleration time setting

(n018)

Description Setting range

Operation selection at

Digital Operator interruption

Maximum frequency

(FMAX)

Maximum voltage

(VMAX)

Select whether or not to detect the

OPR error (Digital Operator connection error).

0: No (The Inverter continues operating.)

1: Yes

(Error output turns ON and the

Inverter coasts to a stop)

Used to set the V/f pattern as the basic characteristic of the Inverter.

V/f control mode: set output voltage per frequency

Vector control mode: set for torque adjustment

Output voltage n012

Maximum voltage frequency (FA)

Middle output frequency

(FB)

Middle output frequency voltage (VC)

0.1 to

255.0

(0.1 to

510.0) n017

Frequency

(Hz)

Note Set the parameters so that the

0.2 to

400.0

0.1 to

399.9

fied.

n016 n014 < n013 n011

Note The value set in n015 will be ignored if parameters n016 and n014 have the same value.

0, 1

50.0 to

400.0

0.1 to

255.0

(0.1 to

510.0)

0.1 to

10.0

Minimum output frequency

(FMIN)

Minimum output frequency voltage

(VMIN)

0.1 to

50.0

(0.1 to

100.0)

Select the acceleration or deceleration time of the Inverter.

0: 0.1 s

(Less than 1,000 s: 0.1-s increments; 1,000 s or over: 1-s increments)

1: 0.01 s

(Less than 100 s: 0.01-s increments; 100 s or over: 0.1-s increments)

0, 1

Unit of setting

0.1

Default setting

60.0

0.1 V 200.0

(400.0)

0.1

(see note 1)

60.0

1.5

0.1 V 12.0

(24.0)

0.1

(see note 2)

1.5

0.1 V 12.0

(24.0)

(see note 2)

1 0

Changes during operation

Reference page

6-41

5-7

5-27

Note 1. The values in brackets are those for 400-V-class Inverters.

Note 2. The values in brackets are those for 400-V-class Inverters.

10-5

List of Parameters

Chapter 10

Parameter

No.

Register No.

n019 n020 n021 n022 n023

0113

0114

0115

0116

0117

Name

Acceleration time 1

Deceleration time 1

Acceleration time 2

Deceleration time 2

S-shape acceleration/ deceleration characteristic

Description Setting range

Acceleration time: The time required to go from 0% to 100% of the maximum frequency.

Deceleration time: The time required to go from 100% to 0% of the maximum frequency.

Note

The actual acceleration or deceleration time is obtained from the following formula.

Acceleration/Deceleration time = (Acceleration/Deceleration time set value) ´ (Frequency reference value) ¸

(Max. frequency)

Used to set S-shape acceleration/deceleration characteristics.

0: No S-shape acceleration/deceleration (trapezoidal acceleration/deceleration)

1: S-shape acceleration/deceleration characteristic time 0.2 s

2: S-shape acceleration/deceleration characteristic time 0.5 s

3: S-shape acceleration/deceleration characteristic time 1.0 s

Note When the S-shape acceleration/deceleration characteristic time is set, the acceleration and deceleration times will be lengthened according to the

S-shape at the beginning and end of acceleration/deceleration.

0.0 to

6,000

0 to 3 1

Unit of setting

0.1 s

(chan ge in n018)

Default setting

10.0

Changes during operation

Yes

Reference page

5-27

10.0

Yes

5-27

5-28

10-6

List of Parameters

Chapter 10

Parameter

No.

Register No.

n024 n025 n026 n027 n028 n029 n030 n031 n032 n033

0118

0119

011A

011B

011C

011D

011E

011F

0120

0121

Name

Frequency reference 1

Frequency reference 2

Frequency reference 3

Frequency reference 4

Frequency reference 5

Frequency reference 6

Frequency reference 7

Frequency reference 8

Inching frequency command

Description

Used to set internal frequency references.

Note Frequency reference 1 is enabled in remote mode with n004 for frequency reference

Note These frequency references speed references (multi-function input). See the reference pages for the relationship

Setting range

0.0 to max.

frequency

Upper frequency reference limit

Used to set the inching frequency command.

Note The inching frequency command is selected with the inching command (multi-function input). The inching frequency command takes precedence over the multi-step speed reference.

Used to set the upper and lower frequency reference limits in percentage based on the maximum frequency as

100%.

0 to

110

Unit of setting

0.01

(chan ge in

0.00

6.00

100

Default setting

6.00

Changes during operation

Yes

Reference page

5-20

0.00

Yes 5-20

Yes

5-20

5-23

5-13 n034 0122 Lower frequency reference limit

(n14), the Inverter will have no output when a frequency reference less than the minimum output frequency input is input.

0 to

110

1% 0 No 5-13

10-7

List of Parameters

Chapter 10

Parameter

No.

Register No.

n035 0123

Name Description

Frequency reference setting/decimal place selection

Set the unit of frequency reference and frequency-related values to be set or monitored through the Digital

Operator.

0: 0.01 Hz

1: 0.1%

2 to 39: rpm (number of motor poles)

40 to 39,899: The value to be set or monitored at max. frequency.

Set the value as shown below.

Setting range

0 to

3,999

Unit of setting

Default setting

Changes during operation

Reference page

5-19 n036 n037

0124

0125

Rated motor current jjjj

Three digits

Decimal place (See note below)

Note To display 50.0, for example, set the value to 1500. The setting unit of each parameter or monitor item below varies with the decimal place.

· Parameters: n024 through n032 and n120 through n127

· Monitor Items: U-01 and U-02

Used to set the rated motor current for motor overload detection (OL1) based on the rated motor current.

Note In vector control mode, this parameter is used as a constant for vector control operation.

Note Motor overload detection (OL1) is disabled by setting the parameter to 0.0.

Note The rated motor current is default to the standard rated current of the maximum applicable motor.

0.0 to

150% of rated output current of the

Inverter

0.1 A Varies with the capacity

Motor protection characteristics

Used to set the motor overload detection (OL1) for the electronic thermal characteristics of the motor.

0: Protection characteristics for general-purpose induction motors

1: Protection characteristics for inverter-dedicated motors

2: No protection

Note If a single Inverter is connected to more than one motor, set the parameter to 2 for no protection.

The parameter is also disabled by setting n036 for rated motor to 0.0.

0 to 2 1 0 No

5-5

5-7

6-41

10-8

List of Parameters

Chapter 10

Parameter

No.

Register No.

n038 n039 n040

0126

0127

0128

Name

Motor protective time

Cooling fan operation

Direction for motor rotation

Description

Used to set the electric thermal characteristics of the motor to be connected in 1-minute increments.

Note The default setting does not require any changes in normal operation.

Note To set the parameter according to the characteristics of the motor, check with the motor manufacturer the thermal time constant and set the parameter with some margin. In other words, set the value slightly shorter than the thermal time constant.

Note To detect motor overloading quicker, reduce the set value, provided that it does not cause any application problems.

Used to operate the Cooling Fan of the Inverter while the Inverter is turned ON or only while the Inverter is in operation.

0: Rotates only while RUN command is input and for 1 minute after

Inverter stops operating

1: Rotates while Inverter is turned ON

Note This parameter is available only if the Inverter incorporates a

Cooling Fan.

Note If the operation frequency of the

Inverter is low, the life of the fan can be prolonged by setting the parameter to 0.

0: CCW

1: CW

The motor output shaft rotates in the counterclockwise (’0”) or in the clockwise (”1”) direction with a forward inverter reference.

Note Applicable for software version

No. 010024 or later.

Setting range

Unit of setting

1 to 60 1 min 8

Default setting

0, 1

Changes during operation

Reference page

6-41

No 6-42

10-9

List of Parameters

Chapter 10

Parameter

No.

Register No.

n041 0129 n042 n043 n044 n045 to n049

012A

012B

012C

---

Name

Acceleration time 3

Deceleration time 3

Acceleration time 4

Deceleration time 4

Not used

Description Setting range

4 acceleration/deceleration times can be set if Multi-func. Inputs (two from n050 to n056) are set to “11” (Accel/ decel time select 1) and to “27” (Accel/decel time select 2).

The following table shows which acceleration and decelaration times are selected by each possible combination of Accel/decel time select 1 and

2. The accel. and decel. times can be changed while the inverter is operating.

Accel/decel time select 1

OFF or not set

Accel/decel time select 2

OFF or not set

Acceleration time

Acceleration time 1 n019

Deceleration time

Deceleration time 1 n020

ON OFF or not set

Acceleration time 2 n021

Deceleration time 2 n022

0.00 to

6000 sec

0.00 to

6000 sec

0.00 to

6000

OFF or not set

---

ON Acceleration time 3 n041

Deceleration time 3 n042

ON ON Acceleration time 4 n043

Deceleration time 4 n044

Note Applicable for software version

No. 010024 or later

0.00 to

6000 sec

---

Unit of setting

Depend on n018 setting

Default setting

10.0

sec

Depend on n018 setting

10.0

sec

Depend on n018 setting

Depend on n018

10.0

sec

10.0

sec

-------

Changes during operation

Reference page

---

10-10

List of Parameters

Chapter 10

Function Group 2 (n050 through n079)

Para meter

No.

Register

No.

Name Description

n050 0132 Multi-function input 1

(Input terminal S1) n051 0133 Multi-function input 2

(Input terminal S2) n052 0134 Multi-function input 3

(Input terminal S3) n053 0135 Multi-function input 4

(Input terminal S4) n054 0136 Multi-function input 5

(Input terminal S5) n055 0137 Multi-function input 6

(Input terminal S6) n056 0138 Multi-function input 7

(Input terminal S7)

Used to select the functions of multi-function input terminals S1 through S7.

Set value

Function Description

Forward/

Reverse rotation command

Forward/

Stop

Reverse/

Stop

3-wire sequence (to be set in n052 only)

By setting to 0, the set values in n050 and n051 are ignored and the following settings are forcibly made.

S1: RUN input (RUN when ON)

S2: STOP input (STOP when OFF)

S3: Forward/Reverse rotation command

(OFF: Forward; ON:

Reverse)

Forward rotation command in 2-wire sequence. (Forward rotation with the signal turned ON)

Reverse rotation command in 2-wire sequence (Reversed with the terminal turned ON)

External fault (NO)

External fault (NC)

ON: External fault (EFj detection: j is a terminal number)

OFF: External fault

(EFj detection: j is a terminal number)

Fault reset ON: Fault reset (disabled while RUN command is input)

Setting range

Unit of setting

Defaul t setting

Changes during operation

Reference page

5-32 1 to

(26 see note)

1 to

(26 see note)

1 2 No 5-32

0 to

(26 see note)

1 to

(26 see note)

1 to

(26 see note)

1 to

(26 see note)

1 to

25,

(26 see note)

34, 35

5-32

Note Inverter overheating warning (setting value: 26) can be set for 5.5kW and 7.5kW Inverters only.

10-11

List of Parameters

Multi-step speed reference 1

Multi-step speed reference 2

Multi-step speed reference 3

Multi-step speed reference 4

Inching frequency command

Signals to select frequency references 1

Refer to 5-6-4 Setting

Frequency References through Key

Sequences for the relationship between multi-step speed references and frequency references.

Acceleration/Deceleration time changeover

External base block command

(NO)

External base block command

(NC)

Search command

(Searching starts from maximum frequency)

Search command

(Searching starts from preset frequency)

Acceleration/Deceleration-prohibit command

Local or remote selection

Communications/ remote selection

ON: Inching frequency command (taking precedence over the multi-step speed reference)

ON: Acceleration time

2 and deceleration time 2 are selected.

ON: Output turned

OFF

OFF: Output turned

OFF

ON: Speed search

(Searching starts from n09)

ON: Speed search

ON: Acceleration/Deceleration is on hold

(running at parameter frequency)

ON: Local mode (operated with the Digital

Operator)

ON: Communications input is enabled.

Chapter 10

10-12

List of Parameters

Emergency stop fault

(NO)

Emergency stop alarm

(NO)

Emergency stop fault

(NC)

Emergency stop alarm

(NC)

The Inverter stops according to the setting in n005 for interruption mode selection with the emergency stop input turned ON.

NO: Emergency stop with the contact closed.

NC: Emergency stop with the contact opened.

Fault: Fault output is

ON and reset with

RESET input. Alarm output is ON (no reset required).

“STP” is displayed (lit with fault input ON and flashes with alarm input ON)

ON: PID control disabled.

ON: Integral value reset.

(see note)

PID control cancel

PID control integral reset

PID control integral hold

Inverter overheating warning

Up or down command

Self-diagnostic test

ON: Keeps integral value on hold.

ON: Displays inverter overheating warning

(oH3)

Up or down command

(set in n56 only)

By setting n56 to 34, the set value in n55 is ignored and the following setting are forcibly made.

S6: Up command

S7: Down command

ON: RS-422/485 communications self-diagnostic test (set in n056 only)

Note Available for 5.5kW and 7.5kW Inverters only.

Chapter 10

10-13

List of Parameters

Para meter

No.

Register

No.

Name Description

Chapter 10

Setting range

Unit of setting

Defaul t setting

Changes during operation

Reference page

n057 0139 Multi-function output

1 (MA/MB and MC output terminals)

Used to select the functions of multi-function output terminals.

Set value

Function Description

0 Fault output ON: Fault output (with protective function working)

0 to 7,

10 to

(21 see note)

1 0 No 5-38 n058 013A Multi-function output

2 (P1-PC output terminals)

3 n059 013B Multi-function output

3 (P2-PC output terminals)

10-14

Operation in progress

Frequency detection

ON: Operation in progress

ON: Frequency detection (with frequency reference coinciding with output frequency)

Zero speed ON: Zero speed (at less than min. output frequency)

Frequency detection 1

ON: Output frequency frequency detection level (n095)

Frequency detection 2

Overtorque being monitored (NOcontact output)

ON: Output frequency frequency detection level (n095)

Output if any of the following parameter conditions is satisfied.

n096: Overtorque detection function selection 1

Overture being monitored (NCcontact output) n097: Overtorque detection function selection 2 n098: Overtorque detection level n099: Overtorque detection time

NO contact: ON with overtorque being detected

NC contact: OFF with overtorque being detected

0 to 7,

10 to

(21 see note)

0 to 7,

10 to

(21 see note)

Alarm output

Base block in progress

ON: Alarm being detected (Nonfatal error being detected)

Base block in progress

(in operation with output turned OFF)

RUN mode ON: Local mode (with the Digital Operator)

1 No

2 No

5-38

List of Parameters

Chapter 10

Para meter

No.

Register

No.

Name Description Setting range

Unit of setting

Defaul t setting

Changes during operation

Reference page

n060 n061

013C Frequency reference gain

013D Frequency reference bias n062 013E Analog frequency reference filter time n063 --Not used

Inverter ready

ON: Inverter ready to operate (with no fault detected)

Fault retry ON: Fault retry

UV in progress

Rotating in reverse direction

ON: Undervoltage being monitored

ON: Rotating in reverse direction

Speed search in progress

Communications output

ON: Speed search in progress

ON: Turns communications output 1 ON.

(see note)

PID feedback loss

Frequency reference loss

ON: PID feedback loss enabled.

ON: Frequency reference lost (when frequency reference loss detection in n064 is enabled, and either analog input or pulse train input is set for frequency reference selection in n004)

(see note)

Inverter overheating warning oH3

ON: Inverter overheating warning (ON when the multi-function input

Inverter overheating warning signal is being input, i.e., when 0H3 is flashing.)

Used to the input characteristics of analog frequency references.

Gain: The frequency of maximum analog input

(10 V or 20 mA) in percentage based on the maximum frequency as 100%.

Bias: The frequency of minimum analog input (0

V or 0 or 4 mA) in percentage based on the maximum frequency as 100%.

Used to set the digital filter with a first-order lag for analog frequency references to be input.

---

0 to

255

--100 to 100

0.00

2.00

---

100

0.01 s 0.10

---

Yes

---

5-14

5-15

---

Note Frequency reference loss (setting value: 20) and inverter overheating warning (setting value: 21) can be set for 5.5-kW and 7.5-kW Inverters only.

10-15

List of Parameters

Chapter 10

Para meter

No.

n064

Register

No.

0140

Name

Frequency reference loss detection (see note) n065 0141 Multi-function analog output type selection n066 0142 Multi-function analog output n067 0143 Multi-function analog output gain n068 0144 Multi-function analog voltage input gain n069 0145 Multi-function analog voltage input bias n070 0146 Multi-function analog voltage input filter time constant

Description Setting range

--100 to 100

0.00

2.00

Unit of setting

Defaul t setting

Selects the frequency loss detection function for when the frequency reference from the control circuit terminal suddenly drops.0: Disable (Operate according to frequency reference.)1: Enable (Continue operation at 80% of frequency reference prior to loss.)Note: Frequency reference loss: Frequency reference voltage drop of

90% within 400 ms.

Note Applicable for software version

No. 010024 or later

Select the multi-function analog output type.

0: Analog voltage output (functions set in n066)

1: Pulse train output (functions set in n150)

Selects the monitor item with n065 set to 0.

0: Output frequency (with 10-V output at max.

frequency)

1: Output current (with 10-V output with Inverter rated output current)

2: Main circuit DC voltage (with 10-V output at

400 [800] VDC)

3: Vector operation torque monitor (with 10-V output at rated motor torque)

4: Output power (with 10-V output at power equivalent to max. applicable motor capacity)

5: Output voltage (with 10-V output at

200 [200] VAC)

Note Values in ( ) apply with n067 set to 1.00.

Note Values in [ ] are for 400-V models.

Used to set the output characteristics of multifunction analog output.

0,1

0, 1

0 to 5 1

0.00

2.00

--255 to 255

0.01

1.00

100

Yes

Yes Set the input characteristics of multi-function analog voltage input.

Gain:Set the frequency of maximum analog input (10 V) in percentage based on the maximum frequency as 100%.

Bias: Set the frequency of minimum analog input (0 V) in percentage based on the maximum frequency as 100%.

Set a primary delay digital filter for multi-function analog voltage input.

1% 0

0.01 s 0.10

Changes during operation

Reference page

5--18

Yes

5-41

5--42

5-17

Note Frequency reference loss (setting value: 20) can be set for 5.5-kW and 7.5-kW Inverters only.

10-16

List of Parameters

Chapter 10

Para meter

No.

Register

No.

Name Description Setting range

Unit of setting

Defaul t setting

n071 0147 Multi-function analog current input gain n072 0148 Multi-function analog current input bias n073 0149 Multi-function analog current input filter time constant n074 014A Pulse train frequency reference gain n075 014B Pulse train frequency reference bias n076 014C Pulse train frequency reference input filter time constant n077 014D Multi--function analog input terminal function selection

Set the input characteristics of multi-function analog current input.

Gain:Set the frequency of maximum analog input (20 mA) in percentage based on the maximum frequency as 100%.

Bias: Set the frequency of minimum analog input (0 V) in percentage based on the maximum frequency as 100%.

Set a primary delay digital filter for multi-function analog current input.0.00 to 2.00

Set the input characteristics of pulse train input.

Gain:Set the gain in percentage based on the maximum frequency of the pulse train

Bias: Set the bias in percentage for frequency reference input at 0-Hz pulse train input based on the maximum frequency as

100%.

Sets the pulse train input’s primary-delay digital filter for frequency reference.

n078 014E Multi--function analog input terminal selection n079 014F Multi-function input frequency bias

Selects the function allocated to the multi-function analog input terminal.

0: Disable multi-function analog input function.

1: Auxiliary frequency reference

2: Frequency gain

3: Frequency bias

4: Output voltage bias

Note: When setting “3,” also set the standard value for the bias in n079.

Selects whether voltage input or current input is to be used.

0: Enable multi-function analog voltage input

(and disable current input).

1: Enable multi-function analog current input

(and disable voltage input).

When “3” is set for n077, set the standard value for the bias as a percentage, taking the maximum frequency as 100%.

--255 to 255

--100 to 100

0.00

2.00

--255 to 255

--100 to 100

0.00

2.00

0 to 4 1

0,1

0 to

100

0.01 s 0.10

100

0.01 s 0.10

Yes

Changes during operation

Yes

Reference page

NO TAG

5-25

5--24

5--25

5--15

10-17

List of Parameters

Chapter 10

Function Group 3 (n080 through n0119)

Para meter

No.

Register

No.

Name Description Setting range

n080 n082 n083

0150

0152

0153

Carrier frequency selection n081 0151 Momentary power interruption compensation

Number of fault retries

Jump frequency 1

Used to set the carrier frequency.

Note The default setting does not need any changes in normal operation.

Note Refer to 6-4 Setting the Carrier Fre-

quency for details.

Used to specify the processing that is performed when a momentary power interruption occurs.

0: Inverter stops operating

1: Inverter continues operating if power interruption is 0.5 s or less.

2: Inverter restarts when power is restored.

Used set the number of times that reset and restart are automatically attempted for the

Inverter when the Inverter has an overvoltage fault or overcurrent fault.

Used to set the frequency jump function.

1 to 4,

7 to 9

0 to 2 1

0 to

0.0 to

400

0.01

Output frequency n084 0154 Jump frequency 2

0.0 to

400

0.01

Unit of setting

Defaul t setting

Varies with the capacity.

Changes during operation

Reference page

6-26

0.00

6-42

6-43

6-44

6-44 n085 0155 Jump frequency 3

Frequency reference

0.0 to

400

0.01

Hz n086 0156 Jump width n087 0157 Accumulated operating time function selection

(See note.) n088 0158 Accumulated operating time

(See note.)

Note Set n083 to n085 to satisfy the following condition.

n083 n084 n085

Selects the operating status to be accumulated.

0: Accumulate the time that the Inverter power is ON (i.e., the time from when the power is turned ON until it is shut OFF).

1: Accumulate Inverter execution time (i.e., the time that forward or reverse signals are being input).

Sets the initial value for the accumulated operating time, with 10 h as 1.

The accumulation begins from the set time.

The accumulated operating time’s monitor value (U-13) can be cleared to 0 by setting “0” here.

0.0 to

25.5

0,1

0 to

6550

0.01

1 =

10H

0.00

6-44

6--45

6--46

Note Accumulated operating time can be selected with 5.5kW and 7.5kW Inverters only.

10-18

List of Parameters

Chapter 10

Para meter

No.

Register

No.

Name Description Setting range

Unit of setting

Defaul t setting

Changes during operation

Reference page

6-29 n089 0159 DC injection braking current n090 015A DC injection braking-to-stop time n091 015B Startup DC injection braking time n092 015C Stall prevention during deceleration

Used to impose DC on the induction motor for braking control.

Set the DC braking current in percentage based on the rated current of the Inverter as

100%.

Output frequency

Minimum output frequency

(n016) n091 n090

Time

Used to select a function to change the deceleration time of the motor automatically so that there will be no overvoltage imposed on the motor during deceleration.

0: Stall prevention during deceleration enabled

1: Stall prevention during deceleration disabled

0 to

100

0.0 to

25.5

0.0 to

25.5

0, 1

0.1 s

1 n093 n095

015D Stall prevention level during acceleration n094 015E Stall prevention level during operation

015F Frequency detection level n096 0160 Overtorque detection function selection 1 n097 0161 Overtorque detection function selection 2

Note Be sure to set the parameter to 1 when the Braking Resistor Unit or a braking resistor is used as an option.

Used to select a function to stop the acceleration of the motor automatically for stall prevention during acceleration.

Set the level in percentage based on the rated current of the Inverter as 100%.

Used to select a function to reduce the output frequency of the Inverter automatically for stall prevention during operation.

Set the level in percentage based on the rated current of the Inverter as 100%.

Used to set the frequency to be detected.

Note The parameter n57, n58 and n59 for multi-function output must be set for the output of frequency detection levels 1 and 2.

Used to enable or disable overtorque detection and select the processing method after overtorque detection.

0: Overtorque detection disabled

1: Overtorque detection only when speed coincides and operation continues (issues alarm)

2: Overtorque detection only when speed coincides and output turned OFF (for protection)

3: Overtorque always detected and operation continues (issues alarm)

4: Overtorque always detected and output turned OFF (for protection)

Select the item to detect overtorque.

0: Detected from output torque.

1: Detected from output current.

30 to

200

30 to

200

0.00

400.0

0, 1

0.01

0 to 4 1

0.5

0.0

170

160

0.00

6-29

6-31

6-32

6-47

6-35

6-36

10-19

List of Parameters

Chapter 10

Para meter

No.

Register

No.

Name Description Setting range

Unit of setting

n098 0162 Overtorque detection level n099 0163 Overtorque detection time n100 0164 UP/DOWN frequency selection

Used to set overtorque detection level.

Detection from output torque: Set in percentage based on the rated motor torque as 100%.

Detection from output current: Set in percentage based on the rated Inverter output current as 100%.

Used to set the detection time of overtorque.

n101 0165 Speed n103 n104

0167 search deceleration time n102 0166 Speed search operation level

Torque compensation gain n105 0169 Torque compensation core loss n106

0168 Torque compensation primary delay time constant

016A Rated motor slip

Used to store the adjusted frequency reference with the UP/DOWN function.

0: Frequency not stored

1: Frequency stored

The frequency must be on hold for 5 s or more.

Note

Only applicable for 200/400V,

5.5/7.5kW models

Note Applicable for software version

No. 010024 or later

Note

Only applicable for 200/400V,

5.5/7.5kW models

Note Applicable for software version

No. 010024 or later

Used to set the gain of the torque compensation function.

Note The default setting does not need any changes in normal operation.

Set the response speed of the torque compensation function.

Note Normally, the default setting does not need to be changed.

Set the core loss of the motor in use.

Note Normally, the default setting does not need to be changed.

Note This parameter is enabled in V/f control mode only.

Used to set the rated slip value of the motor in use.

Note Used as the constant of the slip compensation function.

30 to

200

0.1 to

10.0

0, 1

0.0 to

10.0

0 to

200

0.0 to

2.5

0.0 to

25.5

0.0 to

6,550

0.0 to

20.0

n107 016B Motor phase to neutral resistance

Set this parameter to 1/2 of the phase to neutral resistance or phase-to-phase resistance of the motor.

Note This parameter is used as a vector control constant.

0.000

65.50

0.1 s 0.1

0.1s

2.0

0.1

150

1.0

0.1 s 0.3

Defaul t setting

160

Changes during operation

Reference page

6-36

Yes

0.1 W Varies with the capacity.

0.1

0.001

Varies with the capacity.

Varies with the capacity

Yes

6-36

6-48

---

6-37

6-38

6-39

5-6

6-2

10-20

List of Parameters

Chapter 10

Para meter

No.

Register

No.

Name Description Setting range

Unit of setting

n108 016C Motor leakage inductance n109 n110

016D Torque compensation limit

016E Motor noload current

Set the leakage inductance of the motor in use.

Note This parameter is used as a vector control constant.

Note The Inverter with the default setting in this parameter fully functions in vector control.

Set a limit on the torque compensation function in vector control mode.

Note Normally, the default setting does not need to be changed.

Note The Inverter in torque compensation control limits the torque at a current 1.5 times larger than the set value.

Used to set the no-load current of the motor in use based on the rated motor current as 100%.

Note Used as the constant of vector control and the slip compensation function.

0.00

655.0

0 to

250

0 to

99 n111 016F Slip compensation gain n112 n113 n114

0170

0164

Slip compensation primary delay time

Slip compensation during regeneration

Not used

Used to set the gain of the slip compensation function.

Note The default is set to 1.0 in vector control mode.

Note The slip compensation function is disabled with n66 set to 0.0.

Used for the response speed of the slip compensation function.

Note The default is set to 0.2 in vector control mode.

Note The default setting does not need any changes in normal operation.

Selects the slip compensation function in regenerative operation.

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

Note This parameter is valid only in vector control mode.

---

0.0 to

2.5

0.0 to

25.5

0, 1

---

0.01

0.1

0.1 s 2.0

---

150

---

Defaul t setting

Varies with the capacity.

Changes during operation

Reference page

6-2

Varies with the capacity

0.0

Yes

---

6-3

5-6

6-39

6-40

---

10-21

List of Parameters

Chapter 10

Para meter

No.

Register

No.

Name Description

n115 0173 Stall prevention level automatic suppression selection n116 0174 Stall prevention acceleration/ deceleration time setting n117 0175 Undertorque detection selection

Selects whether or not to automatically decrease the level for stall prevention during operation if the frequency lies in a constant output range exceeding the frequency set in n013 for max. voltage frequency (a range greater than the rated motor frequency).

0: Automatic suppression function disabled

(the value of n094 is valid for any frequency)

1: Automatic suppression function enabled.

Note The operation level is decreased by n094

´ (max. voltage frequency/output frequency).

Note The stall prevention function during operation operates according to the acceleration/deceleration time set in n116.

Sets the acceleration/deceleration time for the stall prevention function during operation.

0: Accelerates or decelerates according to acceleration/deceleration time 1 or 2, whichever is selected.

1: Accelerates or decelerates according to acceleration/deceleration time 2.

(n021/n022).

Note When a faster (or slower) acceleration/ deceleration time is desired, set this parameter to “1” and set the desired acceleration/deceleration time for stall prevention operation in acceleration/deceleration time 2.

0: Undertorque detection not provided

1: Detected during constant-speed running.

Operation continues after detection.

2: Detected during constant-speed running.

Operation stops during detection.

3: Detected during running. Operation continues after detection.

4: Detected during running. Operation stops during detection.

(1)To detect undertorque at accel/decel, set to

3 or 4.

(2)To continue the operation after undertorque detection, set to 1 or 3.

(3)To stop the inverter by a fault at undertorque detection, set 2 or 4.

Note Applicable for software version

No. 010024 or later.

0, 1

0,1

Setting range

Unit of setting

Defaul t setting

Changes during operation

Reference page

6--33

No 6--34

10-22

List of Parameters

Chapter 10

Para meter

No.

Register

No.

Name Description Setting range

Unit of setting

Defaul t setting

Changes during operation

Reference page

10% n118 0176 Undertorque detection level n119 0177 Undertorque detection time

Sets undertorque detection current level. (Inverter rated current=100%)

If detection by torque is selected (n097), motor rated torque becomes 100%.

Overtorque detection function selection 2

(n097) is used both for overtorque and undertorque detection.

Note Applicable for software version

No. 010024 or later.

If time in which motor current falls below the undertorque detection level (n118) is longer than undertorque detection time, the undertorque detection function operates.

Note Applicable for software version

No. 010024 or later.

0 to

200%

0.1 to

10.0

sec

0.1

sec

0.1

sec

Function Group 4 (n120 through n179)

Parameter

No.

Register No.

Name Description Setting range

n120 n121 n122 n123 n124 n125 n126 n127 n128

0178

0179

017A

017B

017C

017D

017E

017F

0180

Frequency reference 9

Frequency reference 10

Frequency reference 11

Frequency reference 12

Frequency reference 13

Frequency reference 14

Frequency reference 15

Frequency reference 16

PID control selection

Set the internal frequency references.

are selected with multi-step

0.00

Hz to max.

tion inputs). See the reference pages for the relationship between multi-step frequency

Unit of setting

0.01

(Cha ngeable with n035 set-

Selects the PID control method.

0: PID control disabled.

1 to 8: PID control enabled.

Note The derivative control method

(i.e., the derivative control of the deviation or detected value), the addition of the frequency reference, and the positive or negative characteristics of PID control are selectable.

0 to 8 1

Default setting

0.00

Changes during operation

Yes

Reference page

5-20

0.00

Yes

5-20

6-18

10-23

List of Parameters

Chapter 10

Parameter

No.

Register No.

n129 n130 n131 n132 n133 n134 n135 n136 n137 n138

0181

0182

0183

0184

0185

0186

0187

0188

0189

018A

Feedback value adjustment gain

Proportional

(P) gain

Integral (I) time

Name

Derivative (D) time

PID offset adjustment

Integral (I) upper limit

PID primary delay time

Feedback loss detection selection

Feedback loss detection level

Feedback loss detection time

Description Setting range

Unit of setting

Default setting

0.01

1.00

Set the value by which the feedback value is multiplied.

Note This parameter is used for adjusting the target and detected values so that they will have the same input level.

Set the proportional (P) gain for PID control.

Note PID control is disabled with this parameter set to 0.0.

Set the integral (I) time for PID control.

Note Integral control is disabled with this parameter set to 0.0.

Set the derivative (D) time for PID control.

Note Derivative control is disabled with this parameter set to 0.0.

This parameter is for the offset adjustment of all PID control.

Set the parameter in percentage based on the maximum frequency as

100%.

Set the upper limit value of integral control output.

Set the parameter in percentage based on the maximum frequency as

100%.

Set this parameter to the primary delay time constant for the frequency reference after PID control.

Note Normally, the default setting does not need to be changed.

Set the detection method of feedback loss in PID control.

0: Feedback loss detection disabled.

1: Feedback loss detection enabled

(Nonfatal error: FbL warning)

2: Feedback loss detection enabled

(Fatal error: FbL error)

Sets the detection level of feedback loss.

Set the parameter in percentage based on the feedback value equivalent to the maximum frequency as

100%.

Set the detection time of feedback loss.

Note If the detection level set in n137 or lower is detected for the set time in n138, the result will be determined as feedback loss.

0.00 to

10.00

0.0 to

25.0

0.0 to

360.0

0.00 to

2.50

--100 to 100

0 to

100

0.0 to

10.0

0.01

0 to 2 1

0 to

100

0.0 to

25.5

0.1

0.1 s

1.0

0.00

100

0.0

1.0

Changes during operation

Yes

Reference page

6-18

Yes

6-19

6-20

10-24

List of Parameters

Chapter 10

Parameter

No.

Register No.

n139 n140 n141 n142 n143 n144 n145 n146

018B

018C

018D

018E

018F

0190

0191

0192

Name

Energy-saving control selection

Energy-saving control coefficient K2

Energy-saving voltage lower limit at

60-Hz output

Energy-saving voltage upper limit at

6-Hz output

Power averaging time

Probe operation voltage limit

Probe operation control voltage step at 100%

Probe operation control voltage step at 5%

Description Setting range

Unit of setting

Default setting

Select the energy-saving control function.

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

Note This parameter is enabled in V/f control mode only.

Set the coefficient for the primary level of energy-saving control.

Note The constant automatically changes according to the motor code in n158. Make fine adjustments of the contact if necessary after setting the motor code in n158.

These parameters prevent the output voltage of the Inverter from dropping excessively so that the motor will not stall or come to a stop at the primary level of energy-saving control.

0, 1

0.0 to

6.550

0 to

120

0.1

Varies with the capacity

Set the lower limit of output voltage in percentage at each frequency based on the rated motor voltage as 100%.

Note Normally, the default settings do not need to be changed.

Set the time required to calculate the average of power used in energy-saving control.

Power averaging time (ms) = Set value x 24 (ms)

Note Normally, the default setting does not need to be changed.

0 to 25 1%

1 to

200

Set the range of voltage control for the secondary level of energy-saving control.

0 to

100

Set the parameter in percentage based on the rated motor voltage as

100%.

Note No probe operation is available with the parameter set to 0.

Set the range of probe operation voltage in percentage based on the rated motor voltage as 100%.

0.1 to

10.0

Note Normally, the default setting does not need to be changed.

0.1 to

10.0

1 (24 ms)

0.1%

0.5

0.2

Changes during operation

Reference page

6-7

6-8

6-9

6-10

6-11

6-11 n147 n148

10-25

List of Parameters

Chapter 10

Parameter

No.

Register No.

n149 n150 n151

0195

0196

0197

Name

Pulse train input scale

Multi-function analog output, pulse train frequency selection.

RS-422/485 communications timeover detection selection

Description

Set this parameter to the pulse train input scale so that frequency references can be executed by pulse train input.

Set the maximum pulse train frequency in 10-Hz increments based on

10 Hz as 1.

Note This parameter is enabled with n004 for frequency reference selection set to 5.

Select the relationship between the pulse train output frequency and output frequency.

0: 1,440 Hz at max. frequency (A proportional relationship is applied to frequencies less than the maximum frequency)

1: 1x output frequency

6: 6x output frequency

12: 12x output frequency

24: 24x output frequency

36: 36x output frequency

Note This parameter is enabled with n065 set to 1.

The set value in the parameter determines whether communications timeover detection will be performed with

“CE” displayed if there is an interval of more than 2 s between normal communications and how the detected communications time-over will be processed.

0: Detects time-over, fatal error, and the Inverter coasts to a stop.

1: Detects time-over, detects fatal error, and the Inverter decelerates to a stop in deceleration time 1.

2: Detects time-over, detects fatal error, and the Inverter decelerates to a stop in deceleration time 2.

3: Detects time-over, detects nonfatal error warning, and the Inverter continues operating.

4: No time-over is detected.

Setting range

100 to

3,300

0, 1, 6,

12, 24,

Unit of setting

1 (10

Hz)

0 to 4 1

Default setting

2,500

Changes during operation

Reference page

5-25

5-42

7-2

10-26

List of Parameters

Chapter 10

Parameter

No.

Register No.

n152 n153 n154 n155 n156 n157 n158 n159 n160

0198

0199

019A

019B

019C

019D

019E

019F

01A0 tion

Name

RS--422/485 communications frequency reference/display unit selection

RS-422/485 communications Slave address

RS-422/485 baud rate selection

RS-422/485 parity selec-

RS-422/485 send wait time

RS-422/485

RTS control selection

Motor code

Energy-saving voltage upper limit at

60-Hz output

Energy-saving lower limit voltage at

6-Hz output

Description

Set the unit of frequency reference and frequency-related values to be set or monitored through communications.

0: 0.1 Hz

1: 0.01 Hz

2: Converted value based on 30,000 as max. frequency

3: 0.1% (Max. frequency: 100%)

Set this parameter to the Slave address (Slave unit number) for communications.

00: Broadcast message (with the communications function disabled)

01 to 32: Slave address

Select the communications baud rate.

0: 2,400 bps

1: 4,800 bps

2: 9,600 bps

3: 19,200 bps

Select the parity check function for communications data.

0: Even

1: Odd

2: No parity

Set the time to wait for a response after the DSR (data-send-request) message is received from the Master.

Select whether or not to enable the

RTS (request-to-send) communications control function.

0: RTS control disabled

1: RTS control enabled (available to

1-to-1 RS-422 communications only)

Set the code to automatically set the constants for energy-saving control.

0 to 8: 200-VAC, 0.1- to 4.0-kW motor

20 to 28: 400-VAC, 0.1- to 4.0-kW motor

These parameters prevent the motor from over excitation due to voltage changes during energy-saving control.

Set the upper limit of output voltage in percentage at each frequency based on the rated motor voltage as 100%.

Note Normally, the default settings do not need to be changed.

Setting range

0 to 3 1

Unit of setting

00 to

10 to

0, 1

0 to

120

0 to 3 1

0 to 2 1

1 ms

0 to 70 1

0 to 25 1%

Default setting

Varies with the capacity.

120

Changes during operation

Reference page

7-3

7-4

7-5

6-7

6-10

10-27

List of Parameters

Chapter 10

Parameter

No.

Register No.

n161 n162 n163 n164 n165

01A1

01A2

01A3

01A4

01A5

Name

Power detection width for probe operation switching

Power detection filter constant

PID output gain

PID feedback input block selection

Installed braking resistor overheating protection

(see note 1)

Description Setting range

Set the detection width of power that sets the Inverter into probe operation.

Set the width in percentage based on the power to be detected as 100%.

Note Normally, the default setting does not need to be changed.

Note The Inverter will operate with a power detection width of 10% if the value is set to 0.

Set the filter time constant of the power detection block of the Inverter operating in probe operation.

Filter time constant (ms) = Set value in n162 x 4 (ms)

Note Normally, the default setting does not need to be changed.

Note The Inverter will operate with a time constant of 20 ms if the value is set to 0.

Set the rate by which PID control value is multiplied for PID control.

Note Normally, the default setting does not need to be changed.

Set the feedback input block for PID control detection.

0: Frequency reference control terminal for voltage input (0 to

10 V) is enabled.

1: Frequency reference control terminal for current input (4 to

20 mA) is enabled.

2: Frequency reference control terminal for current input (0 to

20 mA) is enabled.

3: Multi-function analog voltage input

(0 to 10 V) is enabled.

4: Multi-function analog current input

(0 to 20 mA) is enabled.

5: Pulse train reference control terminal is enabled.

Note Make sure that the target value input and feedback value input do not overlap with each other.

0: Overheating protection disabled

1: Overheating protection enabled

0 to

100

0 to

255

0.0 to

25.0

0,1

1 (4 ms)

0.1

0 to 5 1

Unit of setting

1.0

Default setting

Changes during operation

Reference page

6-11

6-12

6-21

---

10-28

List of Parameters

Chapter 10

Parameter

No.

Register No.

n166 n167 n168 n169

01A6

01A7

01A8

01A9

---

Name Description Setting range

Unit of setting

1% Input open-phase detection level (see note 1)

Input open-phase detection time (see note 1)

Output open-phase detection level (see note 1)

Output open-phase detection time (see note 1)

Not used

Sets the main circuit DC voltage fluctuation level, as a percentage, for detecting an input open phase.

200-V-class Inverters: Set 400 V as

100%.

400-V-class Inverters: Set 800 V as

100%.

If “0” is set, the input open-phase detection function will be disabled.

Recommended setting: 7 (%)

Note Applicable for software version

No. 010024 or later.

Sets the input open-phase detection time in units of seconds.

If “0” is set, the input open-phase detection function will be disabled.

Recommended setting: 10 (s)

Note Applicable for software version

No. 010024 or later.

Sets as a percentage the current for detecting an output open phase, taking the Inverter’s rated output current as 100%.

If “0” is set, the output open-phase detection function will be disabled.

Recommended setting: 5 (%)

Note Applicable for software version

No. 010024 or later.

Sets the output open-phase detection time in units of seconds.

If “0” is set, the output open-phase detection function will be disabled.

Recommended setting: 0.2 (s)

Note Applicable for software version

No. 010024 or later.

---

0 to

100

0 to

255

0 to

100

0.0 to

2.0

---

0.1s

---

Default setting

0.0

--n170 to n172 n173 01AD DC injection

P gain

(=0.001)

(=0.083) n174 01AE DC injection I time

Adjust the response of the DC injection with the proportional gain (P).

Note Applicable for software version

No. 010024 or later.

Adjust the response of the DC injection with the integral time (I).

Note Applicable for software version

No. 010024 or later.

1 to

999

1 to

250

(=4ms)

(=100ms)

Changes during operation

Reference page

6--50

---

6--50

6--51

---

10-29

List of Parameters

Chapter 10

Parameter

No.

Register No.

n175 n176 n177

01AF

01B0

01B1

Name Description Setting range

Unit of setting

Low carrier frequency at low speed

Parameter copy and verify function selection

Parameter read prohibit selection

This function automatically reduces the carrier frequency to 2.5 kHz if the output frequency is 5 kHz or less, and the output current is 110% or greater than the rated Inverter current. Normally this setting is not necessary.

This function improves the overload capacity at low frequencies.

0: Low carrier frequency at low speed disabled.

1: Low carrier frequency at low speed enabled.

Note Normally, it is not necessary to change the default setting.

Note This function is enabled if n080

(carrier frequency) is set to 2, 3, or 4.

Select the function to read, copy, and verify the parameter between the memory of the Inverter and that of the

Digital Operator.

rdy: Ready to accept the next command.

rEd: Reads the Inverter parameter.

Cpy: Copies the parameter to the

Inverter.

vFy: Verifies the Inverter parameter.

vA: Checks the Inverter capacity display.

Sno: Checks the software number.

Note No parameters can be copied to the Inverter in RUN operation.

Select the copy-prohibit function.

Set this parameter to store the data in the EEPROM of the Digital Operator.

0: Read prohibited for Inverter parameters (data cannot be stored in EEPROM).

1: Read possible for Inverter parameters (data can be stored in

EEPROM).

0, 1 rdy to

Sno

0, 1

---

1 rdy

Default setting

0 (see note 2)

Changes during operation

Reference page

6--28

Yes

3-10

3--17

10-30

List of Parameters

Parameter

No.

Register No.

n178 01B2

Name

Fault log

Chapter 10

Description

Used to display the four most recent faults recorded.

Setting range

---

Unit of setting

---

Default setting

---

Changes during operation

---

Reference page

6--52 n179 01B3 Software number

Fault generation item

Display

Note This parameter is monitored only.

Used to display the software number of the Inverter for OMRON’s control reference use.

Note This parameter is monitored only.

-----

Note 1.

Available for 5.5-kW and 7.5-kW Inverters only.

Note 2.

The default setting for 5.5-kW and 7.5-kW Inverters is “1.”

-------

10-31

Chapter 11 Using the Inverter for a Motor

Using the Inverter for a Motor

Chapter 11

Using Inverter for Existing Standard Motor

When a standard motor is operated with the Inverter, a power loss is lightly higher than when operated with a commercial power supply.

In addition, cooling effects also decline the low-speed range, resulting in an increase in the motor temperature. Therefore, motor torque should be reduced in the low speed range.

The following figure shows allowable load characteristics of a standard motor.

If 100% torque is continuously required in the low-speed range, use a special motor for use with Inverters.

Allowable Load Characteristics of Standard Motor

25% ED (or 15 min)

40% ED (or 20 min)

60% ED (or 40 min)

Torque (%)

Continuous

Frequency (Hz)

High-speed Operation

When using the motor at high-speed (above the motor rated frequency), problems may arise in dynamic balance and bearing durability.

Torque Characteristics

The motor may require more acceleration torque when the motor is operated with the

Inverter than when operated with a commercial power supply. Check the load torque characteristics of the machine to be used with the motor to set a proper V/f pattern.

11-2

Using the Inverter for a Motor

Chapter 11

Vibration

The 3G3MV Series employs high carrier PWM control to reduce motor vibration. When the motor is operated with the Inverter, motor vibration is almost the same as when operated with a commercial power supply.

Motor vibration may, however, become greater in the following cases.

·Resonance with the natural frequency of the mechanical system

Take special care when a machine that has been operated at a constant speed is to be operated in variable speed mode.

If resonance occurs, install vibration-proof rubber on the motor base.

·Imbalance rotor

Take special care when the motor is operated at a high speed (50 Hz or more).

Noise

Noise is almost the same as when the motor is operated with a commercial power supply. Motor noise, however, becomes louder when the motor is operated at a speed higher than the rated speed (50 Hz).

Using Inverter for Special Motors

Pole-changing Motor

The rated input current of pole-changing motors differs from that of standard motors.

Select, therefore, an appropriate Inverter according to the maximum input current of the motor to be used.

Before changing the number of poles, always make sure that the motor has stopped.

Otherwise, the overvoltage protective or overcurrent protective mechanism will be actuated, resulting in an error.

Submersible Motor

The rated input current of submersible motors is higher than that of standard motors.

Therefore, always select an Inverter by checking its rated output current.

When the distance between the motor and Inverter is long, use a cable thick enough to connect the motor and Inverter to prevent motor torque reduction.

Explosion-proof Motor

When an explosion-proof motor or increased safety-type motor is to be used, it must be subject to an explosion-proof test in conjunction with the Inverter. This is also applicable when an existing explosion-proof motor is to be operated with the Inverter.

11-3

Using the Inverter for a Motor

Chapter 11

Gearmotor

The speed range for continuous operation differs according to the lubrication method and motor manufacturer. In particular, the continuous operation of an oil-lubricated motor in the low speed range may result in burning. If the motor is to be operated at a speed higher than 60 Hz, consult with the manufacturer.

Synchronous Motor

A synchronous motor is not suitable for Inverter control.

If a group of synchronous motors is individually turned on and off, synchronism may be lost.

Single-phase Motor

Do not use the Inverter for a single-phase motor.

The motor should be replaced with a 3-phase motor.

Power Transmission Mechanism (Speed Reducers, Belts, and

Chains)

If an oil-lubricated gear box or speed reducer is used in the power transmission mechanism, oil lubrication will be affected when the motor operates only in the low speed range. The power transmission mechanism will make noise and experience problems with service life and durability if the motor is operated at a speed higher than 50 Hz.

Motor Burnout Caused by Insufficient Dielectric Strength of

Each Phase of Motor

Surge occurs among the phases of the motor when the output voltage is switched.

If the dielectric strength of each phase of the motor is insufficient, the motor may burn out.

The dielectric strength of each phase of the motor must be higher than the maximum surge voltage. Normally, the maximum surge voltage is approximately three times the power voltage imposed on the Inverter.

Be sure to connect Inverter-dedicated motors if the Inverter is a 400-V-class model.

Standard motors do not have sufficient dielectric strength and may burn out.

11-4

Revision History

A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual.

Cat. No. I527-E2-02

Revision code

The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page numbers refer to the previous version.

Revision code

Date

May 1999 Original production

Revised content

Revision History

April 2000

New Inverters with different capacities added:

3G3MV-A2055/A2075/A4055/A4075.New functions added for with 5.5-/7.5-kW

Inverters, new 3G3IV--PFNj Input-side Noise Filter added, and general revisions and corrections made. Specific changes are as follows:

Preliminary: Information added on installation types.

Page 1-2: Information added on enclosure ratings and motor capacity.

Page 1-7, 3-3: Information added on Reset Key. Note added after table.

Pages 1-8: Summary of new features added.

Page 2-4: Information added on dimensions and weight of new models.

Page 2-5: “Caution” notices changed to “Warning” notices.

Page 2-6: Information added on ambient operating temperatures, Inverter weights, and installing Inverters in control panels.

Page 2-8: Description changed.

Page 2-9: Information added on removing the terminal cover and bottom cover.

Page 2-12, 2-19, 2-20: Information added for new models.

Page 2-14, 2-34, 3-7, 5-4, 5-8, 5-30, 5-35, 5-32, 7-27, 9-2, 9-4, 9--7, 10-4, 6-27 to 6-28,

10-12, 10-14, 10-16, 10-17, 10-19, 10-26: Information added to tables. Notes added after tables.

Page 2-22: Information added on circuit breaker installation.

Page 2-23: Information added on magnetic contactors.

Page 2-24: Information added on noise filters.

Page 2-27: Information added on cable length.

Page 2-34: Information added on Braking Resistor and Braking Resistor Unit.

Page 2-35: Information added to wiring diagram and table. Note added after table.

Page 2-39, 2-41, 6-8, 8-5, 8-8, 7-28, 8-9 to 8-13, 8-26, 9-10, 9-12, 9-14, 9-18, 9-19,

9-28:

Information added to table.

Page 3-8, 3-9, 5-30: Notes added after table.

Page 3-11: Information added on motor capacities.

Page 3-12, 3-16, 7-12, 7-15: Notes added.

Page 5-10: Information added on remote/local selection methods.

Page 5-14: Information added on frequency referencing by analog inputs.

Page 5-15: Information added on multi-function analog inputs.

Page 5-16: Information added on multi-function analog inputs and frequency reference loss detection.

Page 5-24: Information added on pulse train frequency reference input filter time constant.

Page 5-34: Information added on external base block command and speed search. Information added to table. Note added after table.

Page 6-4, 6-5, 6-20, 7-27: Changes made in table.

Page 6-6: Information added on energy-saving control.

Page 6-45: Information added on accumulated operating time.

Page 6-50: Information added on input and output open-phase detection.

Page 7-5: Correction made to section heading. Information added on baud rate, parity, and RTS control selection.

Page 7-9: Information added on message intervals.

Page 7-10: Information added on message data configuration.

Page 7-11: Information added on error checks.

Page 7-22: Bit status changed.

Page 7-26, 7-27, 9-27, 8-26: Correction made to heading.

Page 8-16: Information added on multi-function inputs.

Page 8-23: Information added on sequence errors and unwanted current paths. Diagram added.

Page 9-7, 9-15: Model number changed.

Page 9-21, 9-24: Diagram added

Page 9-25: Information added to table. Diagram added.

Page 9-26: Information on input noise filters deleted.

Standard Models

Appendix A

Hello! I'm an AI assistant trained on the OMRON SYSDRIVE 3G3MV Inverter User's Manual. I understand the functions, installation, wiring, operation, maintenance, and specifications of these inverters. Ask me anything!

Show related prompts

Assistant typing

Assistant is out of keyboard. Please, try again later.

Key features

Open-loop vector control for powerful torque
Meets EC Directives and UL/cUL standards
Convenient parameter copy function
Easy cooling fan replacement
Built-in braking transistor
Inrush current prevention circuit
RS-422/485 communication support
Variety of I/O signals
Harmonics suppression with DC reactors

Frequently asked questions

The 3G3MV Inverter uses open-loop vector control, which ensures a torque output that is 150% of the rated motor torque at an output frequency of 1 Hz.

The 3G3MV Inverter supports RS-422 and RS-485 communications conforming to the MODBUS Communications Protocol.

The 3G3MV incorporate a braking transistor. so the powerful control can be archived by conencting a braking resistor.